JP7418765B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachislot machines").

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are known in which setting states such as the probability of winning or losing a lottery or the probability of executing various effects can be set to one of a plurality of settings by a setting change operation by a gaming hall manager. In such gaming machines, for example, a setting key is inserted into a predetermined setting key insertion section located on the back side of the gaming machine, and the inserted setting key is rotated in a specific direction before turning on the power to the gaming machine. Therefore, it is common to control the above-mentioned setting state to a changeable setting change permissible state.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 6-91049

In such gaming machines, the ingenuity in presentation is insufficient, and there are many people who wish for a gaming machine with more ingenuity.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with improved performance .

The present invention includes a firing device that can be operated by a player and fires a game ball toward a gaming area,
A gaming machine in which a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded when the game ball enters a prize opening provided in the gaming area,
a lottery means that performs a lottery regarding a win when the game ball enters a specific winning hole among the entered prize holes;
performance determining means for determining one of the plurality of performances based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means;
a performance display means for displaying the performance determined by the performance determination means;
a calculation processing means that executes a predetermined calculation process based on the number of game balls fired toward the game area and the number of game balls given when a specific condition is met;
A gaming machine comprising: information display means capable of displaying a result calculated by the calculation processing by the calculation processing means,
A game ball is fired toward the game area, and the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls given by the number of game balls fired toward the game area is the first level when the game situation is such that play is possible. If the result of the lottery by the lottery means is not a win, the performance determining means determines a performance from a first performance group in which the special performance cannot be displayed on the performance display means, and fires a game ball toward the game area. and the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls given by the number of game balls fired toward the game area is less than the value obtained by subtracting 3% of the value of the first level from the value of the first level. If the result of the lottery by the lottery means is not a win in a gaming situation where the game can be played at the second level where the value is the second level, the performance determining means can display the special performance on the performance display means. Deciding on a performance from a group of performances,
The plurality of effects include a special reach effect, and the size of the decorative pattern when the special effect is displayed on the effect display means is the size of the decorative pattern when the special reach effect is performed. It is greater than
When the special performance is displayed on the performance display means in a game situation where games can be played at the second level, it is possible to perform a display that makes it possible to recognize that the game situation is a game situation where games can be played at the second level,
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first level becomes a gaming situation in which games can be played at the second level, a specific effect different from the special effect can be displayed ;
The time for displaying the special performance is longer than the variation time of the performance that is most likely to be selected as a performance when a performance is determined from the first performance group.
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved performance .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut approximately at the center in the front-rear direction within the game area. It is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration inside the main control MPU. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of an arithmetic circuit within the main control MPU. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of a serial communication circuit. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 22 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 21. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of accessory ratio calculation and display processing. 25 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the accessory ratio calculation/display process of FIG. 24. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in a ROM and RAM built into the main control MPU. It is a figure showing the structure of data stored in an area for accessory ratio calculation. It is a figure showing the composition of an accessory ratio display. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a driver circuit. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram of data input to the driver circuit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. It is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the accessory ratio display. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a load register selection table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of accessory ratio. It is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation area update process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation/display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the structure of data stored in a base calculation area. It is a front view showing another example of a game board. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display selection processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation area update process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating another example of base calculation area update processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 1. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 2. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 1. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 2. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 3; 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation processing 4. FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display processing. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 3; 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 4. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing another example of base display processing. It is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the connection example of an ejection bulb sensor and a main control board. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a main control input circuit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control I/O port. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control I/O port. FIG. 98 is a timing diagram in the configuration example of the main control I/O port shown in FIG. 97; FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes in states (intervals) related to calculation of a base value. It is a figure which shows the example of the character displayed on a base display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 102 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization process shown in FIG. 101. FIG. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a base calculation area 13128. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing. 106 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the base calculation process of FIG. 105. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display data generation processing. It is a flow chart which shows a modification of base calculation processing. It is a diagram showing calculation of the base when the game state is switched. It is a diagram showing an example of a game history recorded in a gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error screen. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error signal. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an error. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a diagram showing an example of a game history. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a peripheral control board and its surroundings. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration of a peripheral control SRAM. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history recording condition setting table. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history. It is a diagram showing a modification of the game history. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine having a setting section viewed from behind with the door open. 127 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126 seen from behind with the door closed. 127 is a diagram showing a setting section of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a setting part. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting section seen from the back. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine equipped with the game board shown in FIG. 131, viewed from behind. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol and special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol change waiting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol variation pattern setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. 140(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects executed in outlier variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A). FIG. FIG. 140 is a schematic diagram showing an example of effects executed in outlier variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A). 140(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of performance executed in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A). 140(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of performance executed in the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of mounting a main control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another example of mounting the main control board. 147(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A' in FIG. 147(B). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another example of mounting the main control board. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting confirmation processing. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram of security signals. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member open. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. provided in the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing details of storage areas provided by ROM, RAM, etc., and the ROM area in this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing details of a RAM area in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the structure of data stored in an area for accessory ratio calculation. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing details of a parameter information setting area of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of system reset start-up processing that is executed when the slot machine is reset. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of periodic processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of information signal N output processing.

A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame and the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, game board 5, main body frame 4, and outer frame 2, as seen from the front, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 as seen from behind.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are spaced apart vertically and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the frame 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and back. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

The outer frame 2 also includes a curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and a curtain plate member 50 that is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 which has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and has a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and is attached to the lower front side of the door frame base unit 100 to play the game. A tray unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100, and the game balls attached to the lower right front side of the door frame base unit 100 through the tray unit 200 and stored in the upper tray 201. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area of the game board 5, and a tray unit 200 that is attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base unit 100 and is used to catch game balls that fail to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges game balls to the lower tray 202 of the door frame base unit 100, a ball feeding unit 540 that is attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base unit 100 and that sends the game balls in the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher 680, It includes a glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 whose part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 is attached to the front lower part of the game board 5 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a ball launcher 680 are attached to the right side of the body frame base when viewed from the front. , a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L that is attached to the rear side along the upper and left sides of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front and that pays out game balls to the player side. A character-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the rear lower part of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. A back cover 980 that covers the rear side is provided.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 is provided that controls the progress of the game played on the pachinko machine 1. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device. Note that the accessory ratio display 1317 may be provided in the payout control board unit 950 instead of the main control unit 1300.

Furthermore, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 without providing a separate display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, by constantly displaying the accessory ratio on any of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the player may be informed of the accessory ratio and the player may be able to check the condition of the pachinko machine.

As will be explained later, the prize ball ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of balls won by the number of balls won by the total number of balls won.For example, a pachinko machine with a high percentage of prize balls (for example, 90%) will receive many prize balls due to jackpots. I can say that I am doing well because I have been able to do so. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low value of the accessory ratio (for example, 10%) has fewer jackpot games and fewer prize balls during jackpots, so it can be said that the machine is not performing well. Therefore, the player can select a pachinko machine to play by considering the value of the accessory ratio.

As a mode of notifying the player of the accessory ratio, the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, if the role ratio is 70% or more, the value will be displayed in red and the frame lamp will be lit or blinking in red, and if it is between 69% and 30%, the value will be displayed in green and the frame lamp will be lit or blinking in green. do. It is preferable to display the numerical value of the accessory ratio in such a manner that it cannot be mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative pattern when it is not changing, or the size of the number indicating the proportion of the accessory may be made smaller than the decorative pattern. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, the aspect of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be changed depending on the numerical value of the accessory ratio, and the player may be notified of the accessory ratio. For example, if the proportion of the accessory is 70% or more, the decorative pattern will be displayed in red and the frame lamp will light red or blink, and if it is between 69% and 30%, the decorative pattern will be displayed in green and the frame lamp will be lit green. Or blink. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Alternatively, the information may be displayed on a liquid crystal display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. At that time, the above-mentioned display mode may be changed, or it may be displayed not only with the proportion of the accessory but also with other information. Other information includes the number of jackpots, the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called consecutive jackpots), the number of balls held, and the remaining balance.

Moreover, not only the accessory ratio, but also the continuous accessory ratio, base value, etc., which will be described later, may be displayed in a changed manner as described above. The display mode of the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and base value may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a sealed transparent resin main control board box 1320 that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, and is arranged on a printed circuit board. The finished parts can be seen from the outside. Further, for example, if the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control unit 1300 can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be seen from the back side of Machine 1. By enclosing the accessory ratio display 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the accessory ratio display 1317 to make the gaming machine 1 appear less gambling, and to ensure that the gaming machine 1 is accurate. Can display gambling nature.

In addition, if the back cover 980 is made of opaque resin, by making a hole in the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio display 1317 or by making the position of the accessory ratio display 1317 transparent, pachinko The accessory ratio display 1317 may be made visible from the back side of the machine 1.

Furthermore, even when the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be made flat or the back cover 980 can be made thin. The ratio display 1317 may be made easier to see from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

A discharge port is provided at the bottom of the back of the pachinko machine 1 to collect game balls flowing out from the gaming area 5a via the out port 1111, winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharge them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. Note that the game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island equipment. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharged ball sensor 3060 that detects game balls discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the accessory ratio display switch 1318 can be operated. It is preferable to display (print, engrave, sticker, etc.) on the printed circuit board near the accessory ratio display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320 that the switch is for operating the accessory ratio display. Note that the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is preferably installed near the accessory ratio display 1317, but it does not need to be installed on the main control unit 1300, but may be installed on another board (for example, in a location where it is easy to operate). It may be provided on the control board 4700, the power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. It may be provided in the peripheral control unit 1500, a relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, a power board in the power board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Further, as described later, the accessory ratio display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the accessory ratio display switch 1318 in a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it incorrectly.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the upper part of the dispensing unit base 801, which is opened upward and extends left and right. A ball tank 802 is box-shaped and stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 is attached to a payout unit base 801 on the lower side of the ball tank 802, and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are moved to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front and that guides game balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; It is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side, and allows the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 to be guided by the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. A payout device 830 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls put out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. an upper full ball path unit 850 that releases game balls from either the normal discharge port or the full ball path unit 850, and the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 that is attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801; A normal guide path that guides the released game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the penetrating ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and a normal guide path that guides the released game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. A lower full bulb path unit 860 having a full bulb guide path leading to the full bulb receptacle 530 is provided.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a bass speaker that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and houses a power supply board therein; An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 that is installed across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls inside. A payout control board unit 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from a ball firing device 680 are sent to the upper part of the game area 5a. a front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide the player; a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a; It has a box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. a main control unit 1300 that is installed in the front side of the game panel 1100 in the game area 5a, and a table unit (not shown) that has a plurality of winning holes that can receive game balls that are hit into the game area 5a. ), and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 above the board holder 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the handle lever 504 with game balls stored in the upper tray 201, the ball launcher 680 fires the game with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game ball hit into the game area 5a is received in a winning hole (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 by the payout device 830 according to the accepted winning hole. . Since the player's interest can be increased by this payout of the game ball, the game ball in the upper tray 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. Furthermore, FIG. 16 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut approximately at the center in the front-rear direction within the game area.

The game board 5 of this embodiment has a game area 5a into which game balls are driven when the player operates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In addition, the game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is operated by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. The main control unit 1300 has a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) that controls the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 is placed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 is installed on the front side of the game panel 1100. The game machine further includes a front unit 2000, which is attached to the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000, which is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also includes a transparent flat panel plate 1110, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open to receive game balls that are hit into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are used for playing games at different positions in the gaming area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to receive a ball, a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position in the gaming area 5a and detects passage of a gaming ball, and a gaming ball that passes through the gate section 2003. The second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the regular lottery drawn by drawing, and the first special lottery draws by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second grand prize opening 2006 in which game balls can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second big winning hole 2006 is composed of two big winning holes, a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b, which are arranged in one channel through which game balls flow (Fig. 16).

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005, and A lower side unit 2200 is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001, and a lower side unit 2200 is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped frame that is attached to the top of the side unit 2300 and approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a back box 3010 that is arranged at a predetermined position within the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning hole sensors 3015 that detect game balls accepted into the general winning hole 2001 of the cage front unit 2000, and a lock that is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is used to detachably attach the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A mechanism 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 that is attached to the right end of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front and is used to discharge game balls received in the general prize opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500, A lower right ball passage unit is installed near the front end of the lower right corner in the front view inside the back box 3010, and is used to discharge game balls received into the second grand prize opening 2006 or the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. 3035.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes an upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 that covers the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and an upper relay board cover 3041 that is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042, a performance drive board 3043 housed in the performance drive board box 3042, a panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a panel relay board 3044. and a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side of the board.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 has a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end of the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at the top of the vertical center. A rear lower rear movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a rear upper left movable production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view The back left movable production unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, and the back upper center is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. It includes a movable performance unit 3400 and a back/front/back movable performance unit 3500 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back/lower/rear movable performance unit 3100.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

A shot ball sensor 1020 is provided on the back side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing the backflow prevention member 1007) to detect game balls hit into the game area 5a. For example, the firing ball sensor 1020 is configured with a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when it detects a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and entered the game area 5a. Note that the firing ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position where the game ball always passes within the game area. By fixing the position of the ball launch sensor 1020 on the game board 5, specifications can be made common among multiple models, and inspections at the manufacturing site and after installation in the hall become easier.

Further, the firing ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the gaming area 5a near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects an out ball before the winning hole sensor detects the winning of the game ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of out balls and prize balls, the base value can be accurately calculated without detecting prize balls caused by game balls that are not counted as out balls.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an outlet 1111 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position within the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel board 1110 in a detachable manner from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and positioning holes formed on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game balls flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a are guided to the rear side outlet 1111 by the out guide part 1003, and are discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1111.

[2-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received, and the The liquid can be discharged downward from the discharge section 1201 (see FIG. 14).

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game content, payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the game board 5 is assembled into the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator consisting of one LED that displays the gaming status, and two LEDs based on the normal lottery results drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display device that displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal symbols related to the passage of the game ball to the gate section 2003. Among them, there is a normal holding display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition for the variable display has not yet been met, and a display for receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 (starting winnings). After the first special symbol is variably displayed by controlling the blinking of the eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result drawn by (occurrence), these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting manner according to the first special lottery result. Among the variable displays of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of game balls into the first special symbol display device and the first starting port 2002, the number of pending variables is the number of variable displays for which the start condition for the variable display has not yet been met. A first special reservation number display consisting of two LEDs is displayed, and eight LEDs are blinked based on the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004 (occurrence of starting winnings). A second special symbol display device that variably displays the second special symbol by controlling and then displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result, and acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004. A second special reservation number display device consisting of two LEDs that displays a reservation number, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition for the fluctuation display has not yet been met among the fluctuation displays of the second special symbol, and a first special symbol. A round indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 when the lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "jackpot" etc. It mainly has the following. Note that some of the displays (for example, the first special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 may be configured with 7-segment LEDs.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and a liquid crystal display control section 1512 for controlling effect images (see FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main LCD display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. To be more specific, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at approximately the center thereof. This main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. This main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 that protrude outward from the left side when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece that protrudes outward from the right side when viewed from the front. 1602. This main liquid crystal display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward, has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface when viewed from the front in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010, which will be described later. Insert the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and then move the locking mechanism 3020 downward. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the bottom.

[2-8. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and its front end protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel board 1110, and its rear end passes through the opening 1112. and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. The table unit 2000 of this embodiment has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are always open and capable of receiving game balls shot into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 that are inside the gaming area 5a. a first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions; a gate section 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of game balls; A second starting port 2004 allows game balls to be accepted according to the normal lottery results that are drawn by passing through the part 2003, and a lottery is performed by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The game machine is provided with a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second grand prize opening 2006 in which game balls can be accepted depending on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Of the plurality (four in this case) of general winning holes 2001, three are arranged at the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged near the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed approximately directly below the blocking portion 1006 at the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting port 2004 is located directly below the gate portion 2003 to the right when viewed from the front. Among the plurality of general winning holes 2001 described above, the general winning hole 2001 located near the upper right in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front is placed directly above the second starting hole 2004. The first big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged above the first big prize opening 2005 on the right side of the first starting mouth 2002 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second big prize opening 2006 in the front unit 2000 includes a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b, which are arranged along one channel through which game balls flow. It is made up of. As for the second big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2006a is arranged near the lower right of the front view in the gaming area 5a, and the second bottom big winning hole 2006b is located in the front view of the second big winning hole 2006a. It is located at the bottom on the left side.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005, and A lower side unit 2200 is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the opening unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning openings 2001, and a lower side unit 2200 is installed above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped frame that is attached to the top of the side unit 2300 and approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

[2-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be explained. The starting port unit 2100 is located in the gaming area 5a, near the lower end of the center in the left and right direction, directly above the out port 1111, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005.

The starting opening unit 2100 includes a flat unit base 2101 having a first prize opening 2005 attached to the front surface of a panel board 1110 and having a rectangular shape extending left and right and penetrating back and forth, and a first winning opening 2005 in the unit base 2101. Above the big prize opening 2005, a ball receiving part 2102 protrudes forward from the upper part approximately in the center in the left-right direction and forms the first starting opening 2002, and a first starting opening is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. A ball guiding part 2103 that guides the game balls received in the first starting port 2002 downward; a first starting port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guiding part 2103 and detects the gaming balls received in the first starting port 2002; A first attacker unit 2110 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big prize opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big prize opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened to the front with approximately the same size as the first big winning opening 2005. a box-shaped unit case 2111, and a horizontally long rectangular flat plate-shaped first grand prize opening door whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the first grand prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 that is installed inside the unit case 2111 and drives the opening/closing of the first big winning opening door member 2112, and a first attacker solenoid 2113 that is installed inside the unit case 2111 and is accepted into the first big winning opening 2005. A first big prize opening sensor 2114 that detects game balls that have been played, a first starting opening sensor 2104 that is attached to the top surface of the unit case 2111, a first attacker solenoid, a first big winning opening sensor 2114, and a main control board 1310. A starting port unit relay board 2115 that relays the connection with the starting port unit, and a starting port unit decorative board (not shown) that is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 and that decorates the first grand prize port 2005 with light emission. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 opens upward and is large enough to receive only one game ball at a time. The first grand prize opening 2005 penetrating through the unit base 2101 opens toward the front and has a size that can accept a plurality of game balls (for example, 4 to 6 balls) at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, a first starting port 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the unit base by a ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided downward on the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, it can be passed through the first attacker unit 2110 and discharged downward. In this embodiment, two first starting port sensors 2104 are provided, and in the main control board 1310, when the two first starting port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting port sensor 2104 is installed. It is determined that the game ball was accepted in 2002. Thereby, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity due to insertion of an unauthorized tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the starting port unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first big winning port door member 2112 of the first attacking unit 2110 opens to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the opening 2005 from behind to close the first prize opening 2005. This first big winning opening door member 2112 is in an upright state that closes the first big winning opening 2005, and both left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111, and the upper side is the front and By rotating it so as to move it downward, the first big prize opening 2005 can be brought into an open state from a closed state.

The first big prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (the first attacker solenoid 2113 is de-energized) and closes the first big prize opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first big prize opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly higher than the lower side. It will be in the position. In other words, the first big winning opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so that it becomes higher toward the front from the lower side of the first big winning opening 2005.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first big winning hole 2005 and comes into contact with the first big winning hole door member 2112, the direction of flow of the game ball is changed from below due to the inclination of the first big winning hole door member 2112. It changes backward, is accepted into the first big prize opening 2005, and enters into the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball accepted into the first big winning hole 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 17. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various production devices during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various production devices during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and an upper plate liquid crystal display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It includes a liquid crystal display control section 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the display device 244 and the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game balls by rotating the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and input/output devices (I/O devices). A main control I/O port 1314 as a /O device), a main control input circuit 1315 into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and a main control It is equipped with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the MPU 1311. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1311 also includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in a first starting port 2002, and a second starting port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in a second starting port 2004. 2551, general winning hole sensor 3015 that detects the game ball accepted into the general winning hole 2001, gate sensor 2547 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate part 2003, detects the game ball accepted into the first big winning hole 2005 A first large winning hole sensor 2114 to detect the game ball accepted into the second upper large winning hole 2006a and second lower large winning hole 2006b as the second large winning hole 2006, and a second upper large winning hole sensor 2554, Detection signals from the second lower large prize opening sensor 2557, the ejected ball sensor 3060, the fired ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a, etc. are sent via the main control I/O port 1314, respectively. is input.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs control signals from the main control I/O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, thereby controlling the starting port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display, second special symbol display, and first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I/O port 1314. A drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol storage display, a normal symbol display, a normal symbol storage display, a game status display, a round display, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting hole sensor 2104, the second starting hole sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper big winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning hole For the sensor 2557, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, whereas for the general winning opening sensor 3015, a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because the game balls frequently enter the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and also frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2547 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (such as a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are opened (or enlarged) and the game balls are frequently thrown. In order to enter the ball, detection of the game ball by the first large winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper large winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning hole sensor 2557 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are also used for the first large winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper large winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning hole sensor 2557. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where game balls do not enter frequently, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3015.

The main control MPU 1311 also transmits various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sends various commands related to the control of game effects executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. It is also transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511. Note that, upon receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 formats these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from a power board in the power board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") that serves as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1311 to store various information in the RAM 1312 during power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and when these voltages become lower than the power failure warning voltage, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I/O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

An accessory ratio display 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position that is visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory ratio display 1317 displays the accessory ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with an accessory ratio display switch 1318. The accessory ratio display switch 1318 is preferably configured as a push button switch that operates momentarily, but it may also be a switch of another type. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Note that the accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, and the display contents may be switched by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the configuration inside the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 includes a CPU 13111, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, a random number generation circuit 13112, a parallel input port 13113, a serial communication circuit 13114, a timer circuit 13115, an interrupt controller 13116, an external bus interface 13117, a clock circuit 13118, a verification block 13119, a unique It has information 13120, an arithmetic circuit 13121, and a reset circuit 13122.

CPU13111 executes a program stored in ROM1313. The RAM 1312 stores data necessary when executing a program.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides random numbers for determining the lottery results of the variable display game (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the presentation contents of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is, for example, a so-called hard random number generation means that outputs a random number updated at the timing of a clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 are used in the lottery for winning special symbols, the lottery for winning symbols in the special symbol variation display game, and the lottery for winning normal symbols.

The parallel input port 13113 is a port into which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various commands related to control of game performance and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to and from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various information regarding games (gaming information) and various commands regarding payout of game balls to and from the payout control board 951 via the main control I/O port 1314. Furthermore, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the accessory ratio to the accessory ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupts and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts to the CPU 13111 (general interrupts, NMIs that cannot be masked by software). That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to a vector table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the vector table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. The external bus interface 13117 can input and output I/O requests (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit addresses (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7).

The clock circuit 13118 generates an internal clock for the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). Further, the clock circuit 13118 divides the frequency of the input clock signal by a set number and outputs it to the outside from the CLKO terminal. For example, a clock signal to be supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

The verification block 13119 is a functional block that verifies whether the ROM 1313 has been illegally modified using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311, and is written in a non-rewritable manner at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function independent of the program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written into the chip when it is manufactured.

The reset circuit 13122 has an undesignated run prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an unspecified address in the ROM 1313, the undesignated run prohibition circuit estimates that the access is by an unauthorized program and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer period has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 using a reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function for the arithmetic results without depending on a program, and includes a multiplication circuit 131211 and a division circuit 131215.

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a 32-bit product, and converts an input value (multiplier, multiplicand) into a product using a multiplication function. Functions as an output conversion circuit.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a multiplier and a multiplicand of 16 bits or less in a multiplication input register A131212 and a multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at a predetermined timing, and stores the result of multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 obtains the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The process from writing values to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the operation result to the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock), and the CPU 13111 , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the multiplication result can be obtained by referring to the multiplication result register 131214.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that divides a dividend of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) and outputs a 32-bit quotient and a 32-bit remainder. It functions as a conversion circuit that converts input values (divisor, dividend) into quotient and remainder using functions and outputs the results.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a dividend of 32 bits or less in a division input register A131216, and stores a divisor of 32 bits or less in a division input register B131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that values are stored in both of the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, it reads the stored values at a predetermined timing and calculates the quotient that is the result of dividing the dividend by the divisor. The result is stored in the division result register A131218, and the remainder is stored in the division result register B131219. Further, when the division circuit 131215 reads the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, it is preferable to erase the read values and clear the registers. Furthermore, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start command is input, and store the division results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 do not need to be erased at the read timing. Furthermore, even if values are already stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 (without clearing the stored values), the values may be overwritten.

The CPU 13111 obtains the division results from the division result registers 131218 and 131219. The process from writing values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the operation results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks), and the CPU 13111 After the values are stored in registers 131216 and 131217 and a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the quotient and remainder can be obtained by referring to division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as will be described later, division processing is necessary to calculate the base value, and the division processing performed by the CPU 13111 by executing the program is performed by multiple multiplications and subtractions, so it takes a considerable amount of time. Such is the case. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process every time the timer interrupt process is performed, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required to calculate the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process (see Figures 75 and 80). . In addition, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing from the writing of values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the operation result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. Base calculation processing during timer interrupt processing can be efficiently executed.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of serial communication circuit 13114.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmitting and receiving circuits, and each data transmitting and receiving circuit transmits and receives data for one channel to and from a predetermined device. Note that in FIG. 20, only the data transmitting circuit is illustrated, and a description of the data receiving circuit (for example, one channel is implemented) is omitted.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the serial communication circuit 13114 has channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the accessory ratio. Three channels are used, channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317, and channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. 3149.

Data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then stored in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is configured with a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores it in the transmission shift register 3144.

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at the rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

Command status register 3145 is a register that is referenced to confirm the transmission status.

Communication setting register 3146 stores commands for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores baud rate settings for defining the data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

These settings will be explained in detail below. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, whether to use FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and parity (whether to use parity, even parity, or odd parity) are set. For example, channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951 are in FIFO mode, stop bit = 1 bit, and 1×××1010B, which means even parity. is set, and channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is set to 1×××1000B, which means FIFO mode, stop bit=1 bit, and parity not used.

In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142. Furthermore, since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set parity when transmitting data outside the main control board 1310 at high speed.

Since the accessory ratio display 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, it is less affected by noise than communication with other boards via communication wires. Furthermore, since the amount of data to be transmitted and received is small, the communication speed may be low, and there is little need to use parity. Note that along the pattern for transmitting signals between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, along the left and right and/or thickness directions of signal lines provided on the surface or inner layer of the printed circuit board) A ground pattern is provided in the layer adjacent to the signal transmission pattern), and the shielding effect of the ground pattern can reduce noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. Specifically, if the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the relevant bit of the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is space in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

Note that the relevant bit of the status register can be used to determine whether there is an abnormality in the transmission FIFO. For example, even if no data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the bit in the status register is not set, it means that there is no empty space in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. It may be determined that data is not being transmitted from the FIFO, and error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed.

Baud rate register 3148 defines the data transmission rate. For example, channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 is set to 19200 bps, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951 is set to 1200 bps, and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 Channel 2 used for communication with is set to 1200 bps.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed depending on the data transmitted on each channel. This is because the gaming balls are rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuit of the gaming machine is in an environment where it is easily affected by noise. For this reason, data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that the data for controlling the ball hitting, which is directly related to the profit given to the player, is reliably transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and has no relation to ball launch. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and if it is determined to be abnormal, it does not operate the peripheral control board 1510 or executes abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification) and commands request retransmission. If the retransmitted command is determined to be normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored using the normal command. Therefore, data can be transmitted at a high rate in communication with the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player will be able to recognize the delay from the winning of the starting slot to the start of fluctuation of the symbols, which may reduce interest.

Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or at a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). good. In addition, communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). You may adopt a rate between . If the data transmission rate is increased, switching noise of the transistor of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 may cause other circuits to malfunction. On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the transmitted data due to noise, the same data will be retransmitted every timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated, and if the retransmitted command is normal, the display contents of the accessory ratio display 1317 This is because the transmission rate returns to normal, so there is no need to make the transmission rate extremely low.

The command status register 3145 is a register that is referenced to check the transmission status, and each bit is defined as follows, for example.
Bit 7: SnTC Flag indicating completion of transmission; 0 indicates transmission is in progress, and 1 indicates completion of transmission. Bit 6: SnTDBE In normal mode (communication mode that does not use FIFO), this is a flag indicating that the transmission data is empty; 0 indicates that the data has not been transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 indicates that it has been transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, it is set when data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and the transmission data register 3142 is in a state where no transmission data is stored.

In the SnTFTL FIFO mode, this flag indicates the transmit FIFO trigger level; 0 indicates that the amount of transmit data stored in the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142 is greater than or equal to the trigger level, and 1 indicates that the amount of transmit data stored in the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142 is greater than or equal to the trigger level. Indicates that the amount of transmitted data currently being sent is less than the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is less than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, during communication in FIFO mode, data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 after confirming that the bit is 1.
Bits 5-2: Unused (fixed at 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL This is a bit for clearing the transmission buffer and break code transmission, emptying the transmission data, or setting the transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), and is written externally. For example, to forcibly clear the contents of the buffer, set the relevant bit to 1. More specifically, this is used when a command has been written to the FIFO, but due to some circumstances (for example, an abnormality has occurred), transmission of the written command is canceled. Note that even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of start-stop synchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission/reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, and a serial communication circuit for start-stop synchronization and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication may be provided separately.

Further, although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating data capture timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Payout control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the explanation of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. The payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., includes a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, a shootout solenoid 682 that controls shooting, and a ball feed solenoid 551 that controls the ball feed, although detailed illustrations are omitted. A firing control section 953 that performs feed control, an error LED indicator that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that releases the error displayed on the error LED indicator, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a ball ejecting switch for ejecting game balls in the dispensing device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball ejecting operation.

[3-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 that performs various controls regarding payouts on the payout control board 951 is a microcomputer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustrations are omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout control MPU as a processor. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the dispensing control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535, the out of ball detection sensor 827, the dispensing control I/O port, etc. Detection signals from a detection sensor 842 and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

Detection signals from the ball outage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit, and are input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port. Ru.

Further, detection signals from the door frame release switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch that detects the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the dispensing control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , sends commands to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner to output commands to the error LED display or to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 via the payout control I/O port. Or, the number of game balls actually put out is outputted to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the games of the players by keeping track of the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Among the signals output from the external terminal board 784, the signals generated by the main control board 1310 are output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. Note that the signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951.

The error LED indicator is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and If the number "1" is displayed, it will notify you that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it is notified that there are no game balls in the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is in play (specifically, the shuttlecock is Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, it is notified that the payout blade and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult to rotate the payout blade, and the number "3" is displayed. When there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the dispensing detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 842), the number "5" is displayed. When the number "6" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error". ” (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number “7” is displayed. When it is, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection is disconnected anywhere from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Sometimes, it is notified that the game balls are "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. be done. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls lent out, and outputs a signal to display the remaining balance on the display. entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control section]
Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551 has a firing control input into which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. a circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the gaming area 5a based on this clock signal, and this firing reference pulse. A firing solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 682 based on the firing reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls are launched toward the gaming area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feeding reference pulse is generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and is output to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the handle unit 500, there is a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launching of the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input as a CR connection signal to the firing control input circuit, and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the intensity with which a game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This firing solenoid drive circuit receives a firing reference pulse and inputs a driving current for firing the game ball toward the gaming area 5a with a firing strength commensurate with the rotational position of the handle lever 504, based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507. When this occurs, an output is sent to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit moves the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 551 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. When one ball is received into the sending unit 540 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped and the received game ball is sent to the ball firing device 680 side. In this way, the drive current outputted from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current outputted from the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit to the ball feeding solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

Note that the power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the payout control MPU to store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs production control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control section 1511. , and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral control section]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance, although detailed illustrations are omitted. The sound source IC includes a sound source IC that performs this, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the provided color LEDs, etc. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to the performance drive board 3043, Game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various performance units provided in Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as the vibration device 242 provided on the frame 3 and the door lower right drive motor 272, and the collar provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side light-emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to LEDs, etc., and door-side driving light-emission data consisting of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side. control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244 from the serial I/O port for the liquid crystal control portion to the liquid crystal display control portion 1512, In addition, it outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various performance units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via a performance drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. . Further, detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button press sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Additionally, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that indicates that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal. Monitoring operations.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs music and music in accordance with various performances from speakers 921 installed in the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sound effects, etc. are played. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, the plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side and the bass speaker 921 on the main body frame 4 are provided with an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or , 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (acoustic production) than before.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It is used in conjunction with WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

The display commands output from this peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side lighting and blinking command, game board side lighting and blinking command, movable body drive command, and display command are output from the peripheral control MPU to the performance drive board 3043 attached to the rear of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

This effect driving board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting/blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or outputs a lighting signal or blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting/blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on this is output to the LEDs of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

In addition, the performance drive board 3043 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. or output to .

[3-3b. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 60. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 60. When this peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs processes such as initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, determining hot start/cold start, and setting a wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU first performs processing to initialize itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU can be initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state where interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands related to control of game production and pachinko etc. are output from the main control board 1310. It becomes possible to receive various commands such as commands regarding the status of the machine 1.

Following step S1000, the production control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and are stored in the peripheral control RAM as current calendar information in the calendar information storage unit. and set it in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

Following step S1002, the production control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V blank signal, which will be described later, that is executed upon input of a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU is ready to be accepted. The value 1 is set during interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the production control program determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the peripheral control unit enters a standby state until the steady state processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control section steady processing is to be executed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is first set to the value 1 (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1009, the production control program performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the production control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the production control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 119. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to perform continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, the operation button 220C is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches 258 provided in the performance operation unit 220 in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process to be described later. Based on the acquired various information, whether or not the operation button 220C is operated is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation button 220C is reflected in the game performance.

Following step S1014, the production control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP with a built-in sound source transfers drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP with a built-in sound source to the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the side of the door frame in the display data creation process described later. Output to the decorative board 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233.

Following step S1016, the production control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the production control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the VDP with a built-in sound source in the sound data creation process described later to the speaker 921, and also outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the VDP with a built-in sound source in the sound data creation process to be described later. Sound data such as sounds and notification sounds are output to the speaker 921.

Following step S1018, the production control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the production control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data from the first screen data to output to the VDP with a built-in sound source, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, Update pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating light emission mode, in order to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data is to be used as the light emission mode of various LEDs. , update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the first sound of the sound data that instructs the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated in order to instruct which number of sound command data from the command data is to be output to the VDP with a built-in sound source.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data, which drive data is to be output from the first drive data? Update the pointer to indicate what to do.

Following step S1020, the production control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the performance control program analyzes the information transmitted from the game board side decorative board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command (receiving means) analyzes various commands received (command analysis means).

Following step S1022, the production control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands that are classified into predetermined notification displays, the production control program also issues various abnormal notifications. The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. set in the abnormal display mode for execution. Or extract it from the peripheral control RAM and set it in the peripheral control RAM. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed in the order of priority registered in advance, and the system will automatically move to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. I can do it.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the production control program analyzes the commands analyzed in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (step S1022) as various commands categorized as status displays, e.g. In the case of an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling in a mode different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the game board side decorative board 3053 (performance device), the door frame side A visual warning is given to the outside using a decorative board 233 (presentation device) and a lamp (presentation device), and an audible warning is given to the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are prevented.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the production control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the production control program updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, which was acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM, and the calendar information stored in the time information storage unit. Update the time information. Through this RCT acquisition information update process, hours, minutes, and seconds, which are time information stored in the time information storage section, are updated, and based on this updated time information, year, month, and year, which are calendar information stored in the calendar information storage section, are updated. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the production control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer is specified among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating a light emission mode. Peripheral control controls game board side light emitting data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emitting data. It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the section 1511 and set in the peripheral control RAM, and the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is generated. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511, created, and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the production control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the production control program selects the screen data indicated by the pointer from among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the screen generation schedule data whose pointer has been updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020. is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP with a built-in sound source. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP with a built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and sends it to the game board side decorative board 3053. And one screen worth of drawing data (one frame worth) to be displayed on the door frame side decorative board 233 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the production control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the production control program selects the pointer that is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the VDP with a built-in sound source. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP with a built-in sound source extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM, and controls the built-in sound source. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to track numbers specified in the data, and output channels to be used are set according to output channel numbers.

Following step S1032, the production control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the production control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control RAM to a first backup area and a second backup area, respectively. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control SRAM are copied and backed up to a backup first area and a backup second area, respectively.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU from being reset.

Following step S1036, the production control program sets the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1009 to The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

This peripheral control section steady processing starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009, indicating that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and then setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1010. The interrupt timer activation process is performed, and the processes of steps S1012, S1014, . Setting this will complete the process. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP with a built-in sound source, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the V blank signal The interval at which is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

Next, a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control unit 1511 is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU shown in FIG. 61 is input from the sound source built-in VDP of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed in response to this will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045). As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 60 is being executed; Each is set to a value of 0 when the execution of the process is completed.

If the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050); Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value is 1, and the value is 1, and the peripheral control They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 60. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the number of 1ms timer interrupt execution times STN is smaller than 33, as shown in FIG. S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so the V blank signal The interval at which is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before it is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

If the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, if the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, pointers are selected from among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and peripheral control RAM. According to the drive data instructed by the controller, various motors, solenoids, and other electrical drive sources are driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed, Update pointer.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. The original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in this peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1106, performance operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation (operation history information of the button 220C, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in this peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side presentation receiver IC of the door frame side decorative board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As described above, the LOCKN signal is generated when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decorative board 233 detects that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Once it has been determined, this is a signal that is output to notify that fact.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied and backed up to a backup first area and a backup second area, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are copied to the backup second area. 1 area and a backup 2nd area and back them up.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above as the progress of the effects are executed within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60, various processes related to the effect from step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control section due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the state of progress of the performance by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the state of progress of the performance by the 1ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

Furthermore, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233, and the peripheral control MPU and the VDP with built-in sound source are mounted. Even in manufacturing lots of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[3-4. LCD display control section]
Next, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is configured as a microprocessor, although detailed illustration is omitted. A display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the top liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal An image ROM that stores various data on the screen displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied. It is equipped with.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to display the main liquid crystal display device 1600, It controls the drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Note that, if the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that fact. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and top liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511. A plurality of schedule data, non-resident area transfer schedule data, and the like corresponding to the control data (display commands) are stored. The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order in which the screens are drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244. has been done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data transfers various screen data to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and top liquid crystal display device 244 from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance as the schedule data progresses. The order in which data is transferred is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one starting from the first screen data, and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and displays the sprite data on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper plate. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244. In addition, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the top liquid crystal display device 244 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to notify that fact. do. Note that the VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing in the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a line buffer. This is a method in which the retained drawing data for one line is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. As the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, as the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and top liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM becomes impossible to ignore, and the main liquid crystal This will affect the speed at which images are drawn on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the top liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when various people (characters) are to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the top liquid crystal display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of people on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, or the top liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device, with the positions where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as the "overlapping order of sprites") set. 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

Note that the sprite is constructed by pasting together a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be expressed using one sprite character, and relatively large sprites such as people can be expressed using a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally x 3 vertically. can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using an even larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244 perform main scanning in which the display state of each pixel is set in one direction along the pixel, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. and sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in a direction intersecting that one direction. When the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top liquid crystal display device 244 receive one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, When viewed from the front of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the signals are sequentially output from left to right to one line of pixels, respectively. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially scanned from left to right as viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 as main scanning. Output to each pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, the content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 10, 16, 17, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, game balls are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by the player rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. is struck into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving force of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more clockwise the handle lever 504 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. In other words, game balls can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and game balls are attached to the obstacle nails. By making contact, the falling speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball, so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition to the obstacle nails, the game area 5a is provided with windmills (not shown) that are rotated by contact with game balls at appropriate positions.

When the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500 while coming into contact with the center accessory 2500. When the game ball flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center accessory 2500, it passes through the warp passage 2521 and enters the center accessory. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522 which is open within the frame of 2500 and passes through the guide path 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and goes back and forth from side to side, leading to a central guide section 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or side guide sections 2532 on the left and right sides thereof. It is emitted backward from either of the When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guiding part 2531 of the stage 2530, since the central guiding part 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, the game ball released from the central guiding part 2531 The ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When game balls are received into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from the side guiding part 2532, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball released into the gaming area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the first big winning port 2005 in an open state, etc.

By the way, if the game ball that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf section 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and will enter the general prize opening of the lower side unit 2200. 2001, first starting port 2002, etc. Then, when game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, the game ball hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center accessory 2500 (the ball is driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500). ) and enters the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. In this upper right circulation space 2541, although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails and flow while changing the direction of flow in various ways. This upper right circulation space 3541 is provided with a gate portion 2003 at the top, a general prize opening 2001 at the bottom, and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549.

The game ball that has flown down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enters the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side. The game ball that has entered this lower right circulation space 2543 is transferred to the second upper prize opening 2006, which closes the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b that are lined up on the left and right. Pass through the second attacker passage 2543a in which the upper surfaces of the door member 2552 and the second lower large prize opening door member 2555 form the bottom surface, and enter the gaming area 5a from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side when viewed from the front. released. The downstream end (discharge plate part 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball heads toward the first big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state, When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball is accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game balls flowing through the right flow path 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543 flow down while an increase in the flow speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In addition, in very rare cases, in the lower right circulation space 2543, the game ball may enter the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a, and the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b will enter the game area 5a. The game board 5 is discharged from the second outlet 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits the right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate section 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, a normal random number is updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. A normal random number is obtained from among them, and a normal lottery is performed by comparing the obtained normal random number with a predetermined normal winning determination table. When the time-saving control described later is not executed and the result of this normal lottery is a "normal win", the second starting port door member 2549 rotates once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and opens the second starting port. 2004 is opened, and a game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period of time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when time saving control is being executed, a normal lottery is conducted to determine whether the "normal win" is the "first normal win", "second normal win", or "third normal win". Then, when the time saving control is being executed and the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is one of "first normal win", "second normal win", and "third normal win", the second starting port door member 2549 opens. After opening the second starting port 2004 by rotating it in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then the second starting port 2004 is opened. Opening/closing control is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 Repeat for several times). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "1st normal win", the period for each of the 5 times during which the second starting port 2004 is in a state where it is possible to accept game balls is "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and if the regular lottery result of the regular lottery is "2nd regular win" The five periods during which the second starting port 2004 is enabled to accept game balls are "0.3 seconds," "0.28 seconds," "1.1 seconds," and "0.28 seconds." , "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "3rd normal win", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where it can accept the game ball. The periods are ``0.3 seconds,'' ``0.28 seconds,'' ``0.3 seconds,'' ``0.28 seconds,'' and ``1.1 seconds.'' The "win" is a win that is more advantageous to the player (the game ball is easier to receive into the second starting port 2004) than the "first normal win". Furthermore, when game balls are received into the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

In this embodiment, in the variable display of the normal symbols performed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the game ball passing through the gate section 2003, the normal symbols are displayed after starting the variable display of the normal symbols. A certain amount of time is set (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal variable time) until the display stops (usually until the lottery result is indicated). In the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates and enters the open state after the normal variable time has elapsed. Note that during execution of time saving control, which will be described later, control is executed to shorten the normal fluctuation time compared to normal (state where time saving control is not executed). Further, the opening time for opening the second starting port 2004 by rotating the second starting port door member 2549 may be changed depending on the gaming state, for example, when time saving control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, between the time the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal symbols fluctuatingly displayed on the normal symbol display stop displaying (until the normal lottery result is suggested), a new game ball passes through the gate section 2003. 2003, it is not possible to start a new fluctuating display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display, so the fluctuating display of normal symbols will not be started until the previous fluctuating display of regular symbols ends (normal lottery result I am trying to put it on hold until the suggestion is finished. Specifically, the normal random number obtained by the main control board 1310 is stored based on the gate sensor 2547 detecting a game ball passing through the gate part 2003, and the state is reached in which the fluctuating display of normal symbols can be started. The start of variable display of normal symbols will be postponed until then. The maximum number of normal random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is 4, and even if a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being held. . This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the first starting port sensor 2104 updates the first starting port sensor 2104 with a numerical value range predetermined in the main control board 1310. By obtaining a first special random number from among the special random numbers and comparing the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a "jackpot") is created. , "small win", etc.) A first special lottery result is drawn. Then, after controlling the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display to blink for a predetermined variable time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the first special lottery result, the first special lottery result is displayed. The first special lottery result is indicated to the player by displaying it in a lighting manner according to the first special lottery result (after displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner, a stop symbol according to the first special lottery result is displayed). In addition, the first special lottery results that are drawn when game balls are accepted into the first starting slot 2002 include "miss", "small hit", "2R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "10R jackpot". By comparing the obtained first special random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which of these is the case, and furthermore, after a jackpot game, it is normally (low probability state: in this example, with a probability of about 1 in 395) Probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as variable probability state): in this example, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/44) to improve the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) Whether or not to execute it (whether it is a definite variable jackpot or not) and whether to execute time-saving control (time-saving state) that shortens the variation time more than usual when the first special lottery result is a loss (whether it is a time-saving jackpot or not). ) and the period for executing the time saving control (time saving number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special stroke symbol and the second special symbol)) are also determined. Note that the probability of winning a "small win" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (in this example, about 1/300).

Further, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310 is selected. By obtaining a second special random number of ) will be drawn for the second special drawing result. Then, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined variable time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the second special lottery result, and then the second special lottery result is displayed. The second special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying it in a lighting manner according to the second special lottery result (after displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner, a stop symbol according to the second special lottery result is displayed). In addition, the second special lottery results drawn when game balls are accepted into the second starting port 2004 include "miss", "2R jackpot", "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", which one of these is determined by comparing the obtained second special random number with the jackpot determination table, and furthermore, after the jackpot game, the normal ( Low probability state: In this example, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1 in 395. Probability improvement control that increases the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) (high probability state (also referred to as variable probability state): this example There is a probability of about 1 in 44 of winning the jackpot), and whether or not the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1 in 44 (probability of winning the jackpot is 1 in 44). It also determines whether to execute (time-saving state) (whether it is a time-saving jackpot or not) and the period during which time-saving control is executed (time-saving number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)). It is now possible to do so.

When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. , After a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the eight LEDs of the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) are displayed in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and then the first grand prize opening is Either of the opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 becomes in a state where it is possible to receive a game ball in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 while the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout board control the payout device. 830 to a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 11 when the game balls are accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005, or 15 when the game balls are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006). is dispensed onto the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are able to accept game balls, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 to accept game balls, many games can be played. The ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R jackpot", the first big prize opening 2005 will hold the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening/closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice) in which the opening/closing pattern starts from an acceptable open state and then closes. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the first jackpot 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 becomes open to receive game balls, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened. When either of the following conditions is satisfied: a number of game balls (for example, 7 pieces) are accepted, or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 pieces) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. , an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the game ball into an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``4R jackpot'' is repeated for 4 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``16R jackpot'' is repeated for 16 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening/closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R jackpot" (the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) In the opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is opened and then closed after being in an open state capable of receiving a game ball), it is practically difficult to allow the game ball to enter the first grand prize opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot" (After the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 becomes open to accept game balls, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or the first grand prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 7) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006, or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. When the above conditions are satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 in the opening/closing pattern that puts the game ball in a closed state where it cannot be accepted. In addition, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the above first jackpot will be won. After the opening 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 becomes open to accept a game ball, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined time has elapsed since the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened. Either a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 7) are accepted, or a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening/closing pattern that brings the game balls into a closed state that cannot be accepted may be used as the actual special lottery result, and a predetermined number of balls (for example, , 7) are accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. An opening/closing pattern in which the first big prize opening 2005 is closed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed when the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R jackpot". It is also possible to provide a device that executes a plurality of rounds including an opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is opened to accept the game ball and then closed for a period of 0.6 seconds). For example, if a special lottery result is ``8R jackpot that is actually 4R'', a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 7) are accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005, or the second grand prize opening After repeating the opening/closing pattern four times in which a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are accepted in 2006, the game balls are brought into a closed state where they cannot be accepted. The opening/closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is a "small win" or "2R jackpot" (the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) An opening/closing pattern in which the game ball is opened to accept a game ball and then closed may be repeated four times.

By the way, in this embodiment, the second big winning hole 2006 is composed of a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b that are arranged on the left and right, and the second big winning hole 2006 is used. In the case of "Jackpot", for example, in the first round (1st round), the second big prize opening 2006a opens and can accept game balls, is closed due to the satisfaction of the conditions that make it impossible to accept, and then can be accepted next time. Until (during the interval), the second lower prize opening 2006b is opened to start the next round (2nd round) in which game balls can be accepted, and when the second lower prize opening 2006b becomes unable to accept, Since the interval period has elapsed in the meantime, the second upper prize winning hole 2006a is opened again and the game balls can be accepted. Then, the second upper large winning hole 2006a and the second lower large winning hole 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are completed. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, during the "jackpot", either the second upper jackpot 2006a or the second lower jackpot 2006b is in a state where it can accept a game ball, so this state When the ball is hit right and the game ball is distributed in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball is always accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006, thereby eliminating the chance of losing a game ball and entertaining the players. I can do it.

Further, in this embodiment, for some of the above-mentioned plural types of jackpots, whether or not to execute the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game is varied depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot in which probability improvement control is not performed after the jackpot game in a non-time saving state (state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (state where the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game. Further, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in which probability improvement control is not performed after the jackpot game in a non-time saving state (state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in the time saving state (state where the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game. In addition, in a low probability non-time saving state (a state in which both probability improvement control and time saving control are not executed: also referred to as normal state), the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are jackpot games, and then the probability improvement control is executed. If it is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are in a state where the probability improvement control is being executed or the time saving control is being executed, that is, in a state other than the normal state.The probability improvement control is executed after the jackpot game. If it is a jackpot, time saving control is executed after the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed by receiving the game ball into the second starting port 2004. The variable display of the second special symbol executed on the second special symbol display is not executed at the same time, but only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and Until the second special symbol, which is variably displayed on the second special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the second start slot 2004, is stopped and displayed (until the second special lottery result is suggested), the first start When a new game ball is accepted into the opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display starts to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a new manner. Since the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) cannot be displayed, the fluctuating display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) will not start until the fluctuating display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (first special lottery) We are putting this on hold until the results and second special lottery results are finalized. Specifically, the first special random number obtained by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted into the first starting port 2002 by the first starting port sensor 2104 and the second starting port sensor 2551 The second special random number obtained by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted into the second starting port 2004 is stored, and the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stored. The start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbols (symbols) can be started. The maximum number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is four each, and for more than four, the number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is stored in the first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded instead of being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are configured so that the second special random number is digested with priority. In other words, regardless of the timing of receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the symbol.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery results are indicated by the function display unit 1400 by repeatedly turning on and off the eight LEDs that constitute the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) for a predetermined period of time. It blinks and then stops in a predetermined lighting manner, and the special lottery result is indicated by the combination of LEDs that are lit at the time of this stop.

On the other hand, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals (variation pattern commands, judgment result notification commands, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery results are displayed using effect images. A suggestion is made. Specifically, on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative pattern rows each consisting of a plurality of different patterns are displayed in multiple rows (for example, three rows of a left decorative pattern, a middle decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern). The decorative pattern row starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and then is stopped and displayed in order (in this example, the left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in this order), and finally all the decorative pattern rows stop. When displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed is suggested to the player. In other words, multiple decorative pattern rows change according to the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) obtained when the starting winning occurs. After being displayed, a performance image is displayed that is stopped and displayed to suggest the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). Note that the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is better than the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, players generally pay attention to the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

Note that there is a time period (LED blinking time (fluctuating time)) indicating a special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, and a time period indicating a special lottery result on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol row changes and the final image is displayed). The time it takes for the function display unit 1400 to be displayed is different from the time it takes for the function display unit 1400 to be displayed.

In addition to displaying an effect image to suggest the special lottery result on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 also displays the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left side, etc. according to the special lottery result. The middle decoration unit 3050, the back lower/back movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. are used as appropriate. , a light-emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. can be performed, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[5. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 1310 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. Specifically, the system/user reset process that is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and the timer interrupt process that is executed at a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) by a timer activated by the system/user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
FIGS. 21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure for initializing the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and then "03H" indicating activation of the watchdog timer is written. Furthermore, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Subsequently, it is determined whether a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1 until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit A power outage warning signal is input from In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the process is made to wait for a predetermined period of time (for example, 200 milliseconds) while activating a watchdog timer.

If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) has elapsed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). . When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories (area for calculating the ratio of accessories 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30 ), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power outage flag is set (step S20). The power outage flag is a flag that is set when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off through normal processing, such as when a power outage occurs (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power outage flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag has been set, the power outage flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 and the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power shutoff are used in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased and step S24 Proceed to.

Subsequently, using the check code, it is determined whether the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories (area for calculating the ratio of accessories 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the work area for accessory ratio calculation may be incorrect, so the data stored in the work area for accessory ratio calculation is erased (step S26).

Note that when providing one or more backup areas in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using the check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup area 1 , 2, and N, and the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal first is copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

Regarding the area for accessory ratio calculation, data in the area for accessory ratio calculation 13128 may be erased at predetermined time intervals, separately from the check code determination result when the power is turned on. In addition, for each predetermined amount of operation (for example, for each predetermined number of balls fired, for each predetermined number of winning balls, for each predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation display games, for each jackpot of a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

In this way, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is different for each type of data (game control data 13132 and role object ratio calculation/display data 13136). Erase with conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed-up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased. If the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the gaming machine 1 can be deleted at any timing. For this reason, the backed-up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, and the deletion of the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall staff is prevented. , it is possible to prevent concealment of an abnormal state of the ratio of accessories. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been modified to have a high or low accessory ratio.

When the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes initial settings for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) (step S28). In the initial settings of the main control MPU 1311, first, the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) is initialized and interrupts are permitted. Furthermore, initial settings of the serial communication port and test signal output port are performed. Starts the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, settings are made for the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951, and accessory ratio display 1317. Further, after the serial communication circuit 13114 starts operating, the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is initialized.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command generation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To generate a power-on command, a power-on state reference command is set as reference command data, and command addition data corresponding to the command to be generated is added.

The power-on commands include a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol/electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command that notifies the gaming state when the power is restored after the power is turned off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the normal electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol/electric accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the gaming machine 1 is completed by the processing from power-on of the gaming machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power outage warning signal (step S36), and determines whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S38). If the power outage notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), the random number update process is executed (step S40). In the random number updating process in step S46, random numbers other than the random numbers used to determine winning in special lottery and regular lottery are mainly updated. Incidentally, the process of updating random numbers for determining winning in the special lottery and the regular lottery is executed by a timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure notice signal is detected, and these processes are set as main processes on the main control side (normal means after initial setting).

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power outage process (power outage setting means). In the power-off processing, processing is performed to back up data in order to restore the state before the power outage occurred. Specifically, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, will not be performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312, and protecting game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set in the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that it is not necessary to clear all output ports; for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, power consumption during the time until the main board side power-off process is completed can be reduced, and the main board-side power-off process can be completed reliably.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up to the work area is normal.

Next, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the accessory ratio calculation work area (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, there is no need to calculate the check code in step S50. Note that the check code may be calculated and stored each time data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, instead of in the main board power-off process.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as a check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Subsequently, data in the main area of the accessory ratio calculation work (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be performed not in the process when the main board side power is turned off, but in the accessory ratio calculation/display process as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated).

In this way, by storing the data used to calculate the accessory ratio in the backup area along with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the accessory ratio can be retained even when the power is cut off. , it is possible to calculate the role ratio in long-term operation.

Furthermore, a value indicating that backup has been performed normally is stored in the backup flag area as a power outage flag (step S56). This completes the storage of game backup information. Finally, writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S58), and the process waits until recovery from the power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1 and switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70). The main control board 1310 in this embodiment has bank 0 and bank 1, which are switched and used each time timer interrupt processing is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect game balls that have entered winning holes such as general winning holes, detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activities using magnets, and prize ball control processing. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 that indicates that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the prize ball command transmitted in the above is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, in the switch input process, the number of out balls is counted by reading detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the ejected ball sensor 1020.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs timer update processing (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 lights up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, which will be described later, and the normal period determined by the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the symbol fluctuation display pattern, the payer ACK signal that indicates that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) is sent. When determining whether or not an input has been made, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes random number update processing 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the random numbers for jackpot determination, the random numbers for jackpot symbols, and the random numbers for small win symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, random numbers for determining the initial value for jackpot symbols and small winning numbers are updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S50 in the system/user reset process (main process on the main control side) shown in the figure. The random number for determining the initial value for the symbol is also updated.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written into the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check is performed to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the area 13128 in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the ratio of prize balls. (see FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The process of step S81 can be skipped if there are no prize balls to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes frame command reception processing (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, and outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 951 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (for example, frame status display command, error release notification command, etc.), and sends the above-mentioned transmission information as transmission information. Store in the information storage area. In addition, in the prize ball discharge process, the number of prize balls discharged is recorded in a storage area (see FIG. 27) determined by the gaming state of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

The accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S89). .

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes fraud detection processing (step S84). In the fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and when it is detected by the count switch that a game ball has entered the jackpot openings 2005 and 2006 when the game ball is not in a jackpot gaming state, the main control program creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether the random number value for jackpot matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Furthermore, it is determined whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state based on the jackpot symbol random number value. If the probability variable transition condition is satisfied, the game is then shifted to a probability variable state, while if the probability variable transition condition is not satisfied, the game state is shifted to a game state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the probability of winning the special lottery described above is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and it is determined whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. If the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" (referred to as "normal lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the second starting opening door member 2549 is opened (or enlarged), resulting in a gaming state in which a game ball can be accepted into the starting winning opening 2004, which is advantageous for the player. Shift to gaming state.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, performs accessory ratio calculation/display processing (FIGS. 24 and 25). is called, and the accessory ratio is calculated by referring to the number of prize balls stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to check the accessory ratio (gambling quality of the gaming machine 1) based on the latest data.

Note that regardless of whether the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, if the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed. You can. In addition, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. May be displayed. Since the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game has stopped. are doing. In this way, when the accessory ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, CPU resources are not consumed by division and subtraction for calculating the accessory ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

Details of the accessory ratio calculation/display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. Further, a specific example of how to display the accessory ratio will be described later. Note that when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated; For each operation, only the displayed value may be calculated. In addition, the accessory ratio is calculated regardless of whether the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. May be displayed.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and suspends the game, the processing for updating the area for calculating the ratio of accessories (step S81) and the processing for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories (step S89) are executed. Regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, by executing these processes, it is possible to check the accessory ratio even when fraud is being reported.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or a jackpot game When in the state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), it also outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, and a normal symbol display information output signal. It outputs various information (gaming information) signals related to the game, such as signals, time saving information output information, and starting slot winning information output signals, to the payout control board 951.

In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out pitches counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 every predetermined number of out pitches (such as 10).

Furthermore, in the output data setting process, test signals to be output to the inspection device connected to the gaming machine 1 are set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. The transmission information stores various commands created in the timer interrupt processing of this routine. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value to the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the timer interrupt processing, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 You may also perform calculation processing of the physical ratio. In this case, a command for displaying the accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or from the payout control section 952 to the peripheral control section 1511. A command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio may also be transmitted.

[5-3. Accessory ratio calculation/display processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts illustrating an example of accessory ratio calculation/display processing. The accessory ratio calculation/display process is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation/display processing. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, if the calculated accessory ratio is within a predetermined range (or outside the range), the performance in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the ratio of accessories exceeds a predetermined threshold (threshold smaller than a reference value), the preview performance may be changed to provide a preview performance that is more interesting than a normal preview performance.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is the same as the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the main area is normal, so execute the accessory ratio calculation process and extract the accessory from the data in the main area. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the accessory ratio is calculated by dividing the number of acquired balls divided by the total number of acquired balls, and the continuous accessory ratio is calculated by dividing the number of consecutive acquired balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. The decimal part (value after the decimal point) of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio may be rounded down or rounded off. Then, the process advances to step S160.

In addition, in step S156, each time the accessory ratio and/or the continuous accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is updated, the updated value may be copied to the backup area.

If the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, in the calculation of the accessory ratio, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted and divided to calculate the accessory ratio. may be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of pitches acquired is 32 bits, numerical values from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, if the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8- or 16-bit operations, the lower 16 bits from the most significant bit with a value of 1 are taken out of the number of acquired pitches stored in 32 bits. It is recommended to store it in a register (16 bits) for division. Note that if the number of acquired pitches is less than the maximum value of the number of bits that can be used for calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be extracted and used for calculation.

Further, if the total number of pitches acquired is divided by 100 (rounding down to the nearest whole number) and used as the dividend (the number to be divided) to calculate the accessory ratio, calculations using decimals can be avoided.

Further, the upper limit of the accessory ratio may be set to 99, and if the calculation result of the accessory ratio is 100 or more, it may be set to 99.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, so calculate the accessory ratio from the data in the backup area 1. try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and if the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. (Step S146). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148 ), the accessory ratio calculation process is executed, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process advances to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in backup area 1 is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in backup area 2. try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and if the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. (Step S152). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 2 is copied to the main area (step S154). ), executes the accessory ratio calculation process, reads out the data in the main area, and calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio (step S156). Then, the process advances to step S160.

If there is another backup area, it is similarly determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all backup areas are abnormal, the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories (area for calculating ratio of accessories 13128) is initialized and the abnormality is reported (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation/display processing because if the main board side is reset during power-off processing, the power failure flag and checksum are not calculated, so the check code is stored in the RAM 1312 during the initialization processing. The backed up data will be initialized, but if you calculate and memorize the check code periodically during the character ratio calculation/display process, even if the pachinko machine is powered on again, the work area for calculating the character ratio can be saved. This is because the data in (accessory object ratio calculation area 13128) can be left without being erased.

Subsequently, the backup area allocation counter value is updated by adding 1 (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area allocation counter value is an odd number (step S166). If the backup area distribution counter value is an odd number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 2 (step S170). By allocating the copy destinations of data in the main area based on the backup area allocation counter value and writing data to only some of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent abnormal values from being written to multiple backup areas.

Note that when three or more backup areas are provided, the backup areas into which data is written may be allocated based on the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area allocation counter value by the number of backup areas.

Subsequently, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of accessory ratio and the calculated value, refer to a conversion table (not shown) to obtain data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory ratio display 1317, The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of accessory ratio is accessory ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated accessory ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the lower two digits.

In the accessory ratio calculation process (step S156) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process, data on the number of pitches acquired is read from the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the work area for accessory ratio calculation shown in FIG. 27). , data cannot be written to the storage area related to the number of balls acquired in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processing of steps S156 and S172 is configured by a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the storage area related to the number of acquired pitches in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. , data can be written in the storage area of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio.

As explained above, in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, the data for calculating the accessory ratio is copied to the backup area, so if the normal power outage processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset, etc., the data for calculating the accessory ratio is copied to the backup area. The data used to calculate the ratio can be protected.

Incidentally, since the processing in steps S156 and S172 is common regardless of the type of gaming machine, it is preferable to configure it with one or more common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side, separate from the common program module. This is because data checking and backup methods differ depending on the model. However, if data checking and backup methods are made common among models, they may be placed in a common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM 1313 will be explained. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The ROM 1313 includes game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debug (inspection function) code 13133, debug (inspection function) data 13134, accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135, and accessory ratio calculation/display. It includes an area for storing data 13136. The ROM 1313 of this embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) that stores programs and data related to the gaming machine 1 such as game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. and a debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) that stores programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the gaming machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. and an accessory ratio calculation area (third storage area) that stores programs used for the purpose of calculating accessory ratios, such as accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136. is assigned.

There is an empty area of 16 bytes or more between the final address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in dump list format, the game control area and The debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, there is a free space of 16 bytes or more between the final address of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 and the starting address of the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135, and it is displayed in dump list format. In this case, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. Note that the value stored in the free area may be the same fixed value, and may be set to a value that is different from the values set in the game area and the debug area, or a value that is infrequently set. In this way, when displayed in dump list format, the game control area, debug (inspection function) area, and accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Alternatively, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without separating the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area. good. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing between the game control area and other areas, it is possible to eliminate processing in the accessory ratio calculation area (accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135, Ratio calculation/display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that defects (bugs, etc.) in the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 will affect game control.

Note that the debug (inspection function) area stores programs and data for purposes that are not directly related to gaming, such as various functions used only when debugging the gaming machine 1 other than gaming control of the gaming machine 1. A code for outputting a test signal is stored. These debugging (inspection function) codes are programs for outputting debugging (inspection function) signals. Furthermore, the accessory ratio calculation area stores a program for calculating the accessory ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game.

Moreover, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. In addition, the game control code 13131 can be read and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debugging (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable, and configured to not be able to write to the area. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. Processing based on the debugging (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed while the gaming control code 13131 is being executed, but the gaming control code 13131 can be executed from the debugging (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. This increases the independence of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133, so even if the game control code 13131 is changed, changes to the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be kept to a minimum. .

Further, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of timer interrupt processing) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculation/display code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As illustrated, the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, it is possible to inspect the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. The inspection of the game machine 1 can be performed separately, and the effort required to inspect the gaming machine 1 can be reduced. Furthermore, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be used in common with multiple models without depending on the model.

FIG. 26(B) is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may include a main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored, as well as a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which copies of the data stored in the main area are stored. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code can be set in the initialization process when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or each time the data in the main area is updated in the role ratio calculation/display process, or the check code can be set in the main control side power-off process (Fig. It may be set in step S50 to step S54) of No. 22. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power-off process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power outage flag. That is, if the check code in the main area is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the power outage flag is set. Further, if the power outage flag is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Note that if the main area is determined to be abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (steps in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the main control side power-off processing, the values of the main area may be copied to each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Furthermore, in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, each time the value in the main area is updated, the updated data may be copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

Unused space is provided between the main area and backup area 1 and between backup area 1 and backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Data on the number of pitches acquired in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23), which is timed by the main control MPU 1311, and is written in the accessory ratio calculation process (step in FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process. The information is read out in step S156). In this way, the accessory ratio calculation/display process reads the data on the number of balls acquired from the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) reads the data on the number of balls acquired in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. By writing the above, it is possible to completely separate the game control program and the program that executes the processing of calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories, and the program for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories can be made common to gaming machines with different specifications. .

Note that the accessory ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process uses the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio as the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Write to ratio storage. The data of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are read out in the accessory ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the accessory ratio calculation/display process when displaying the accessory ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

FIG. 27(A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the total number of balls acquired, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of consecutive accessory objects are stored. The number of balls acquired for the accessory is the number of prize balls that are won by hitting the accessory that is in operation (for example, the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 that are open, and the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is open). be. The number of consecutive winning balls is the number of balls won by winning a winning object while the winning object is continuously operating (for example, the prize opening is open during a series of jackpots). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of balls acquired as accessories divided by the total number of balls acquired. The continuous yakuza ratio can be calculated as the number of consecutive yakuza acquired balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. The number of accessory balls acquired, the number of consecutive accessory balls acquired, and the total number of balls acquired are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt process, Stored.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of balls acquired as role objects, the number of consecutive balls acquired as role objects, and the total number of balls acquired correspond to the total number of balls acquired in FIG. 27(B), which will be described later. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation. Since this data will not be deleted unless something goes wrong with the data, a large storage area is provided to store data for a long period of time. Moreover, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

FIG. 27(B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects, the number of other balls acquired, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the total number of balls acquired, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of continuous accessory objects are stored. The storage area for each data is composed of a ring buffer that has n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n = 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of won balls is When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers of all data move, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when data other than the total number of balls acquired (number of balls acquired as accessories, number of fired balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol fluctuation display games, number of jackpots in special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number, The write pointer may also be moved.

Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data strings moves every predetermined number of prize balls. Further, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the accessory ratio is calculated using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer completes one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the value of the total cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Even if the ring buffer goes through one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of consecutive accessory objects as explained in FIG. 27(A). The number of other balls won is the number of prize balls won by winning in a prize other than the accessory (a prize opening that does not open or close, for example, the general prize opening 2001). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the number of balls acquired for the accessory, the number of other balls acquired, the number of consecutive balls acquired, and the total number of balls acquired are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The physical ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27(C) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. With the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), more detailed data than that shown in FIG. 27(B) can be obtained, including the number of ordinary electric accessory balls acquired, the number of special electric accessory balls acquired, and the number of starter pitches acquired. , and store the number of winning balls acquired, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of balls acquired, the winning prize ratio, and the consecutive winning prize ratio. The storage area for each data is composed of a ring buffer that has n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the predetermined number (6000) is reached, the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, if data other than the total number of balls acquired (number of special electric accessory balls acquired, number of fired balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol fluctuation display games, number of jackpots in special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number. You may move the write pointer to

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer goes through one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. , even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Among the work area structures shown in Figures 27 (B) and (C), the number of balls acquired as accessory objects in the ring buffer, the number of other balls acquired, the number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory objects, the total number of balls acquired, and the normal number of balls acquired as electric accessory objects. The number of balls obtained, the number of balls obtained for special electric accessories, the number of balls obtained in the starting hole, and the number of balls obtained in other winning holes are each a 2-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 65535 in decimal can be stored. Number of balls acquired as accessory items, number of other balls acquired, number of consecutive balls acquired as accessory items, total number of balls acquired, number of ordinary electric accessory balls acquired, number of special electric accessory balls acquired, number of balls acquired as starter openings, and other balls acquired as prize openings. Each cumulative number has a storage area of 3 bytes, and can store numbers up to 16777215 in decimal notation. Since the cumulative total is the sum of data for 6000 prize balls x n (60000 prize balls if n=10), a large storage area is provided. Number of balls acquired as accessories, number of other balls acquired, number of consecutive balls acquired as accessories, total number of balls acquired, ratio of accessories, ratio of consecutive accessories, number of balls acquired as ordinary electric accessories, number of balls acquired as special electric accessories, starting port The total number of balls acquired and the total number of other winning holes acquired are each a 3 or 4 byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation can be stored. Since the cumulative total will not be erased unless something goes wrong with the data, a larger storage area is provided to store long-term data. Moreover, the cumulative total and the total cumulative total of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio each have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), the total number of balls acquired, the ratio of accessory objects, and the ratio of continuous accessory objects are the same as those explained in FIG. 27(B). The number of other balls won is the number of prize balls won by winning a prize in a prize other than an accessory (a prize opening that does not open or close). The number of ordinary electric accessory balls acquired is the prize ball obtained by winning the ordinary electric accessory object (the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port door member 2549 is open) that is operating according to the result of a lottery with normal symbols. It is a number. The number of special electric accessory balls acquired is the number of prize balls that are won by entering special electric accessory objects that are in operation (for example, the opened grand prize openings 2005 and 2006) as a result of a lottery based on special symbols. The number of balls won in the starting hole is the number of prize balls that are won by entering the starting winning hole (first starting hole 2002). The number of other winning holes acquired is the number of prize balls obtained by winning into a winning hole (general winning hole 2001) which is not an accessory (does not operate) and does not trigger a special symbol lottery. The number of balls acquired for ordinary electric accessories, the number of balls acquired for special electric accessories, the number of balls obtained for starting openings, the number of balls obtained for other prize openings, the number of consecutive balls obtained for accessories, and the total number of balls acquired are determined in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27(A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process, but other The data will not be deleted when the Therefore, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the totals shown in FIGS. 25(B) and 25(C) may be deleted every predetermined period.

In addition, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, or the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculation value. , number of acquired pitches for accessories>total number of pitches acquired, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Furthermore, when the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, the abnormality may be notified. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Configuration of accessory ratio display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, a 7 segment LED 13172 consists of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are preferably housed in one package, but they may be housed in separate packages.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 and signals for setting the operating state of the accessory ratio display 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating data loading timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operating cycle of the driver circuit 13171, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. Segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit signals for lighting each LED element (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit control signals indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 the signals transmitted by the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp correspond to. The direction of the illustrated signal (current) differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is a common anode type or a common cathode type, but an example of the common anode type is illustrated.

A resistor 13174 is connected to the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171 to determine the value of current flowing through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the luminance of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, 8x4 data selector 3174, decoder 3175, 2x8 data selector 3176, constant current driver 3178, driver 3179, It has a latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, a digit-limit control section 3181, a duty ratio control section 3182, a data selector control section 3183, a standby mode control section 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16 bits of data, and sends it to the 16-bit data latch 3172 as parallel data. Note that the 4 bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode of the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 35), and the 4 bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting the register corresponding to the operation mode. (see FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are the detailed setting data.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and connects D15 to D8 to each control section (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control section 3181, duty ratio control section 3182, data selector control section). 3183 and standby mode control unit 3184), and sends D7 to D0 to 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control section (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control section 3181, duty ratio control section 3182, data selector control section 3183, standby mode control section 3184). Furthermore, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15-D8 and selects the 8-bit data latch 3173 that stores display data (8 bits D7-D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 selects the 8 bits of data register 0, that is, Digit-A. A signal is sent to select 8-bit data latch 3173 so that data latch 3173A stores data.

The 8-bit data latches 3173 are provided in the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, take in data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED, Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8×4 data selector 3174.

The 8×4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at a predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends it to the decoder 3175 and the 2×8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 uses a character generator decoding table (see FIG. 34) to convert the input data into a character to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to a 2×8 data selector 3176.

The 2×8 data selector 3176 refers to the decoding settings and selects the data from the decoder 3175 if the mode is set to use the decoder, and selects the data from the decoder 3175 if the mode is set to not use the decoder. 4 data selector 3174 is selected. The selected data is input to constant current driver 3178.

Constant current driver 3178 uses data from 2×8 data selector 3176 to output current signals for lighting each segment from data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. As described above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

The driver 3179 accepts the sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 in order to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 determines which 7-segment LED (digit) is displayed by controlling the current sink timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3.

The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of digits to be lit from 1 to 4 by external settings. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are 00100001B and D7 to D0 are XXXX0011B, the setting is made to use all four digits in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. is written. Note that × indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio when lighting the 7-segment LED 13172. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by setting from the outside, and controls the brightness with which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, by setting D15 to D8 to 00100000B and inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, 16 levels of duty from 0/16 to 15/16 are set in the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182. Ratio settings are written.

The data selector control unit 3183 controls the settings of the decoder. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 based on external settings. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001××××B, the setting to use the decoder is written to the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000×××. By inputting the data XXB, the NO DECODER setting, which does not use a decoder, is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to not be used. The ×8 data selector 3176 is controlled to select data from the 8×4 data selector 3174.

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls standby mode settings and data clear settings. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to standby mode by external setting. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In standby mode, the current settings are maintained as they are, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

Furthermore, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all data held internally by external settings. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all data held in registers and latches is cleared and initialized.

Oscillator 3185 generates a clock used within driver circuit 13171.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of mounting the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 31A shows the main control board box 1320 of implementation example 1. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and houses the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened without destroying the box once closed.The model number of the main control board 1310 is displayed on the surface of the main control board box 1320. (sticker affixed, engraved, printed, etc.) or an opening sticker is affixed. The opening seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

Mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31(B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 31(A). In implementation example 1, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on a main control board 1310. Note that the main control MPU 1311 is preferably mounted such that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are in the same direction.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in a main control board box 1320 and constitutes the main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made by arranging no parts around it.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position that is visible from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 is preferably the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the model number display of 1320 on the main control board box. Moreover, it is preferable that the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 be the same. In addition, when the main control board 1310 is mounted in a gaming machine in a landscape orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are in the same direction. It is preferable to implement the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so that In addition, when the main control board 1310 is mounted in a gaming machine in a portrait orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the main control MPU 1311, and the main control board 1310 are at 90 degrees. It is preferable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so that the orientation is oriented.

In addition, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for pulling out signal lines from the main control board 1310 are located at the ends along the long sides of the main control board 1310 (in the figure, the upper length Although it is mounted at the upper end along the side, it may be mounted at the lower end along the lower long side or at the end along the left and right sides. That is, it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 be arranged at positions where the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the accessory ratio display 1317 and does not obstruct the visibility of the accessory ratio display 1317. .

Furthermore, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening sticker affixed to the main control board box 1320 are affixed at positions that do not overlap with either the main control MPU or the accessory ratio display 1317.

By implementing the accessory ratio display 1317 in this way, the accessory ratio display 1317 and the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 are displayed in the correct orientation, improving their visibility and improving the manufacturing process and game hall. Even during post-installation inspections, it is possible to check the ratio of accessories and whether or not the main control MPU 1311 has been modified without having to take an unreasonable posture.

In another implementation example shown in FIG. 31(C), the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numerical display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted in the same direction, but the circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 The orientation of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the orientation of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping the model number display of the main control board box 1320 or the opening seal affixed to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are of low importance when inspecting for unauthorized modification, so there is little significance in arranging them on the main control board 1310 in the same direction.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317.

As shown in FIG. 32(A), the signal of the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may become unstable due to the influence of noise. Therefore, it is desirable that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 be placed as close as possible.

For example, as shown in the figure, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101). L1) Arrange so that it is shorter than L1). That is, L1 becomes larger than L2.

Further, as described above, no parts are placed around the main control MPU 1311, as shown by the dotted line, in order to easily confirm from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made. For this reason, the wiring length L1 ends up being a certain length, but the wiring length L2 is made as short as possible.

Note that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or in separate packages, and in either case, they are mounted so that L1 is larger than L2.

FIG. 32(B) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another implementation example, and FIG. 32(C) is a diagram in the implementation example shown in FIG. 32(B). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIG. 32(B), ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 in which no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and inner layer of the signal line 13101. It is preferable to provide a ground pattern 13107 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern on at least one of the back surface and inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106.

To explain the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13103 that supplies the clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 ) arranged so that they do not intersect. Further, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the back surface or the inner layer through the through hole 13105. In this case as well, the signal line 13104 is arranged avoiding the prohibited area 13106 (that is, so that the signal line 13104 and the signal line 13101 do not intersect).

Note that, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board with patterns on the front and back sides and no inner layer. It is also applicable to multilayer substrates having inner layers (4 layers, 6 layers, etc.).

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

The load register selection table is a table for determining a register that stores data input to the driver circuit 13171.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182, and the duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the duty ratio, and is written to the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181 to set the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence or absence of decoding and the number of display digits. The decode register and the number of digits register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting whether or not to decode or data for setting the number of display digits, and the data selector control unit 3183 decodes It is written to the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

The data register is used by 8-bit data latches 3173A-D, and data to be displayed on each digit of 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15-D8 are 00100010B-00100101B, the data set in D7-D0 is data for lighting the 7-segment LED, and is written to the data register in the 8-bit data latch 3173A-D.

The duty ratio, the presence or absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the register described above do not need to be set each time the accessory ratio is displayed, and only need to be set once, so they are initialized in step S28 of FIG. 21. is set as . Note that if you set the initial settings only once, the settings may be changed due to the influence of noise etc. after the initial settings. may be reset each time the button is pressed). This makes it possible to always display the correct display even if the settings change due to noise.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using a character generator decoding table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Furthermore, when displaying numbers, D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, so the calculation results can be input to the driver circuit 13171 and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 without conversion.

Note that lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display example of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states: initial state, data input state, LED lighting state (0000), LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and LED lighting state (all lighting). is being prepared.

To control these five states, there are mode setting instructions: blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby. The blank command cuts off the output of constant current driver 3178 and the output of driver 3179. The normal operation command causes the 7-segment LED 13172 to display after each setting is completed. When a normal operation command is input without setting display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write command sets the number of digits to be used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. Select the register to write data in D11 to D8, and input the contents to be set to the register in D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all-lighting command turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side, and lights up all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby command is divided into two types depending on parameters: a standby command that transitions to a standby state, and a clear command that transitions to an initial state. The standby command maintains the current settings, stops the operations of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. Further, the clear command clears and initializes all data held in registers and latches, and also turns off the display.

Note that the blank command is also a type of display command, so in this specification, "display" includes any state in which the 7-segment LEDs are all on, some of the segments are on, and all the lights are off.

Display examples in each of the above-mentioned states will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

When the gaming machine is powered on, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 has not been completed or the display data has not been set, so it is in the initial state (ALL BLANK), and the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on as shown in FIG. 36(A). becomes a non-lighting state in which all segments of the light are turned off. Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the accessory ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized, so it is preferable to set it to standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the game machine.

After completing the initial setting by setting control data in various control registers in the driver circuit 13171, when display data is input, a predetermined display is displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. This predetermined display may be performed by displaying "-" in all digits or lighting all segments, as shown in FIG. 36(B). It is preferable that the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

Moreover, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED is turned on (lit according to the input data). Specifically, the system enters the accessory ratio display state, displays a code indicating the display content in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172, and displays the numerical value of the accessory ratio in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(C), "y175" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. In addition, if the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display a display that allows identification of this fact. For example, all digits (or numbers) may be displayed blinking, or the decimal point may be lit or blinking.

Further, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display contents of the 7-segment LED 13172 are changed. In other words, a different type of accessory ratio is displayed. In this case as well, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. In this case as well, it is preferable to provide a display that allows identification that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, as described above. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later using FIG. 37.

When the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display is made to confirm the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 (FIG. 36(E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is a good idea to turn off the lights and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This accessory ratio non-display state is the same as after the initial setting is completed, but may be in a different format as long as it is distinguishable from the accessory ratio display.

FIG. 36(E) is a display example when the accessory ratio display 1317 or the main control MPU 1311 has an abnormality and the accessory ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. Further, the abnormality display may be in a different form from that shown in the figure, as long as it can be distinguished from a normal accessory ratio display to indicate that the accessory ratio display is not possible.

Furthermore, in any state, when an all-lighting command is input, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 light up. Furthermore, if a blank command or standby command is input in any state, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned off while retaining data. Furthermore, when a data clear command is input in any state, all data held in registers and latches is cleared, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit, and the initial state is returned.

[8. Display of role ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be explained.

As described above, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As mentioned above, the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal display device, and displays the numerical value of the accessory ratio in the lower two digits and the type of value in the upper two digits. Display.

Furthermore, the accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured with a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, it is preferable to alternately display the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value.

The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in different display formats depending on the comparison result between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value. For example, when the ratio of accessories exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green when normal, red when exceeding the standard, etc.). By changing the display mode based on the comparison result with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the proportion of the accessory is abnormal.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may be composed of one or more LED lamps. When the accessory ratio display 1317 is configured with one LED lamp, the comparison result between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in different manners. For example, if the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. Further, if the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, the display lights up, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold value, the display blinks.

When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, the accessory ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, it may be displayed in different display modes (display colors) depending on the display content (accessory object ratio or continuous accessary object ratio, recent data display or medium-term data display, etc.).

In addition, if the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the collection period of prize ball data is short and the value of the accessory ratio may not have converged, so it will be displayed in a different display format (display color, blinking, etc.) You may. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of pitches acquired is less than the threshold value is different from the display mode when it exceeds the above-mentioned reference value.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may switch between displaying the latest data, displaying medium-term data, and displaying long-term data. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and 27(C). The mid-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and 27(C). The long-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the total sum in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and 27(C).

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the accessory ratio display 1317. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the gaming situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. Although the display of the function display unit 1400 is changed by opening the main body frame 4, it is preferable that the progress of the game continues. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the accessory ratio display to the game state display. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened during a special symbol fluctuation display game, the ratio of accessories is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the remaining time cannot be displayed fluctuatingly. can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol stops at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol on the functional display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, it can be configured so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display other than the accessory ratio. For example, the number of winnings for each type of winning hole or the number of paid out prize balls per unit time may be displayed. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, and 10 hours.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the ball output rate during normal times, excluding special prizes (during jackpots), and can be calculated by dividing the number of safe pitches by the number of out pitches. The number of fired balls (number of out balls) is detected by the fired ball sensor 1020. As described above, the firing ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exit (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game balls from the ball firing device to the gaming area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Further, the number of out pitches may be detected by the ejected ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharged ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port that discharges the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In addition, an out-port passage ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) is provided to detect game balls passing through the out-port 1111 provided at the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021, The number of out balls may be detected by the sum of the number of game balls detected by the starting hole sensors 2104, 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557. Furthermore, there is a shot supply ball sensor (not shown) that detects game balls supplied to the ball launcher 680, and game balls that are launched from the ball launcher 680 but do not reach the gaming area 5a (so-called foul balls). A foul ball sensor (not shown) is provided to detect the ball, and the number of foul balls is subtracted from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launching device 680 detected by the shot supply ball sensor to calculate the number of out balls (number of fired balls). May be detected.

The number of out pitches may be counted using any of the methods described above. That is, it is sufficient to provide either the ejected ball sensor 3060 or the ejected ball sensor 1020 among the illustrated sensors.

Also, the number of safe pitches is equal to the number of prize pitches paid out. In addition, the base may be defined as the ball payout rate for each gaming state (during normal play, during electric support, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and calculated as the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls for each gaming state. . By displaying the base on the accessory ratio display 1317, it is possible to check on the spot for each game machine the deviation from the design value of ball launch performance during operation. Furthermore, since the ball hitting performance can be checked without using a hole controller, it becomes easier to inspect each gaming machine during on-site inspection of a gaming hall.

The accessory ratio display 1317 displays information regarding other winnings and prize balls of the base (the number of prizes entered into the general winning hole 2001, the number of prize balls resulting from the winning, the number of winnings into the starting winning hole 2002, and the number of prize balls resulting from the winning). , the number of winnings in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls resulting from the winning, etc.) may be displayed.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, or may display the accessory ratio by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318. For example, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318, which is a pushbutton switch, is pressed, the display of the accessory ratio starts, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, the display disappears. Note that when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. You may. That is, if the main body frame is not open, even if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Furthermore, the display contents may be changed each time the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the accessory ratio (cumulative total), is displayed in the first two digits, and a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls are displayed. The lower two digits display the ratio of the role to the character. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated once more, the display of the first two digits changes to A6, which means the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), and the continuous accessory ratio for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 prize balls) is displayed. may be displayed in the last two digits (FIG. 37(B)). Furthermore, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the accessory ratio (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the first two digits, and the accessory ratio according to the latest data is displayed in the lower two digits (the latest data display) (Fig. 37(C)). When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated once more, the display of the first two digits changes to y6, which means the accessory ratio (cumulative), and the ratio of the accessory to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 prize balls) is lowered. It may be displayed in two digits (mid-term data display) (FIG. 37(D)).

The accessory ratio display switch 1318 does not need to be provided as an independent switch, and may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as the accessory ratio display switch 1318 when operated while the gaming machine 1 is in operation. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the accessory ratio display switch 1318 into one switch, there is only one switch to be operated by the attendant at the game parlor, and erroneous operations by inexperienced attendants can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the gaming machine in operation, and to check the gambling quality of the gaming machine in operation.

In addition, the data on the number of prize balls is accumulated as data for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories 13136, and if the check code is abnormal, the data for calculating and displaying the ratio of accessories 13136 is deleted, so the incorrect ratio of accessories is displayed. can be avoided.

In addition, the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is deleted under conditions different from the deletion conditions for the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, so accurate prize ball number data can be maintained. , it is possible to calculate accurate role ratios.

In addition, since the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 will not be erased by mistake due to operation by a game hall attendant. Since the physical ratio calculation/display data is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the system is configured to prevent the data from being erased due to an erroneous operation by an attendant at the game hall. Furthermore, since the gaming hall cannot intentionally delete data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is increased, and concealment of a high accessory ratio can be prevented.

[9. Base display]
[9-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base]
Up to this point, we have described an embodiment of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays an accessory ratio.Next, we will describe an embodiment of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a base value. In this embodiment, a pachinko machine that exclusively calculates and displays a base value will be described, but an accessory ratio may also be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as mentioned above, when a game ball enters the starting prize opening (first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004), a lottery is held using random numbers, and a special symbol fluctuation display game is executed. do. The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol fluctuation display game is a relatively short fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation pattern of about 10 seconds, shortened fluctuation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is often selected when there are many pending numbers). There are also relatively long fluctuation patterns (such as super reach that last more than 1 minute). When calculating the base value in a pachinko machine, the notification of the base value requires less urgency than the notification of an error, so the notification can be made at the timing when the special symbol variable display game switches to the next variable display game. However, if the fluctuating display time is long, instead of waiting for the end of one special symbol fluctuating display game, when a predetermined condition is met (for example, the number of out balls (fired balls) or the number of prize balls (paid balls) It is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display when the number) changes. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when predetermined conditions are met during a game (for example, during a special symbol fluctuation display game), such as the number of out balls (number of fired balls) or the number of prize balls (number of paid balls) ), the base value is calculated and displayed. Next, a specific configuration of a pachinko machine that operates as described above will be explained.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has almost the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration represented by the reference numeral 1317 is a base display instead of an accessory ratio display. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may use a 4-digit 7-segment LED, for example, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 28, or may use other digits (for example, 2-digit). A 7 segment LED may also be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment acquires data on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the role object ratio calculation area update process (step S81) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311, In accessory ratio calculation/display processing (step S89), a base value is calculated and displayed. In the following explanation, the "accessory object ratio calculation area update process" in step S81 of FIG. This will be explained by replacing it with "calculation/display processing". In addition, the "accessory object ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is read as the "base calculation area 13128", and the "accessory object ratio calculation/display code 13135" is read as "base calculation/display code 13135", The description will be made by replacing "accessory object ratio calculation/display data 13136" with "base calculation/display data 13136."

FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, in order to calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle, the total number of prize balls is calculated using the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out pitches is directly updated using the number of out pitches (step S822).

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The gaming state is in the special prize mode when the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can win many prize balls, but even when the opening and ending times of the jackpot game are included, good. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing during one jackpot, the time from the closing of the big winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the conditional device is in operation, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Further, it may include all the time during which the right-handed batting instruction is being given.

Furthermore, in the starting prize openings 2002 and 2004, special prizes may include time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support, a predetermined period of time after the opening of the starting winning hole 2004 and closing (for example, the ball that entered the starting winning hole is detected as an out ball) The period up to the few seconds necessary for

The electrically operated accessories provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment are divided into two types from the viewpoint of base value calculation. As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special prize regarding the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during the operation of the conditional device (for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol fluctuation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated using the number of prize balls and out balls other than during special prizes, normal winnings (during so-called jackpots) in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, in the starting prize opening 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening/closing member, winning balls and prize balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, for some of the electrically operated accessories (big prize opening 2005, 2006), the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls are used to calculate the base value, regardless of the gaming state (whether or not there is a special prize). For other accessories (starting prize opening 2004), whether or not to use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be switched depending on the game status (whether or not there is a special prize). It will be done. Not using the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls to calculate the base value means that the paid out prize balls are not counted as in (the number of prize balls other than the special prize, which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value). This also includes not creating edge information for paying out prize balls based on the winning signal even if the winning signal is input.

Moreover, the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened even when the conditional device does not operate (as a so-called small win). Generally, a small hit occurs during a short time period, and since the game ball is open for a short time, there is a low possibility that the game ball will win, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small win may be generated other than during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during a time when there is a high possibility that the game ball will win. In this case, winning balls and prize balls into the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in small wins that occur outside of the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small win other than during the special prize. In other words, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to base value standards, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

If the game state is in special prize, the base calculation area update process is ended without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls, since the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already-transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and may be the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of the payout. This variation will be explained using FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls. In addition, even if a game ball enters the starting winning hole 2002 or 2004, the hold is at the upper limit, and the winning ball will be paid out even if the winning into the starting winning hole is not held, so the total number of winning balls will be updated. Ru. In addition, in a gaming state where a prize ball does not occur even if a game ball enters the winning slot (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning will not occur and the number of prize balls to be obtained will be reduced. Since it is 0, the total number of awarded pitches is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out pitches is updated so that the acquired number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the ejected ball sensor 1020, the ejected ball sensor 3060, etc., and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal from the sensor, it is determined that the number of out balls is out. Get the number of pitches = 1. The total number of out pitches is recorded in the total number of out pitches storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out pitches used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out pitch is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process to update the total number of out pitches, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (Figure 40), so the base value can be displayed without delay. It is possible to determine whether the base is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may also execute the base value calculation process. In this case, a command for notifying the base may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for notifying the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511. may be sent.

In addition, in one timer interrupt processing, even if information on both balls entered into the winning slot and out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the example described later). The number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (or the number of out pitches buffer in the embodiment described later). In addition, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winnings from multiple winning slots is acquired, the total number of prize balls resulting from multiple winnings is stored in the total prize ball number (or in the example described later, in the prize ball number buffer). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 5 prize balls and the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls will be sent to the total prize ball number. (or the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the firing of game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning balls detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the fired ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer). It also detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680, and detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 is operating (furthermore, when the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 stops operating). Only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of winning balls or the number of winning balls buffer. Further, when the player is operating the firing handle, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that a palm or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is calculated as the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the award ball count buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality in detecting a prize ball before the game ball has been shot or fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate base value from being displayed. Further, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, there is no need to newly provide a sensor for detecting the firing of game balls, so an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the base was calculated excluding the number of prize balls and the number of out balls during the special prize, but even during the special prize, the number of prize balls that entered the general winning hole and the starting winning hole were counted. However, the base value may be calculated by counting the number of out pitches excluding the number of pitches that entered the jackpot.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Note that when the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not need to be calculated. Furthermore, if an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, if the total number of pitches awarded is greater than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value must not be calculated. Good too. When expressing the base value as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of awarded pitches divided by the total number of out pitches by 100. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217.

The predetermined number by which the total number of prize balls stored in the division input register A131216 is multiplied controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value will be calculated up to the 1's digit in 100ths, and fractions below the decimal point will not be calculated. Furthermore, if this predetermined number is 10,000, the base value is calculated as a 100th fraction to two decimal places. That is, by dividing the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit by 100, the base value of the 100th fraction with two decimal places can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that during the wait time of 32 clocks from writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to reading data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 can perform other processing even if it waits without performing any processing. You may do so. For example, the random number for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won may be updated between writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and reading data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, since the hard random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 are updated at the timing of the clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311, the wait time The hard random numbers are also updated.

That is, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. Other processing related to the game includes at least processing for updating random numbers for determining wins and losses. Further, during the calculation (division) process in the calculation circuit 13121, the random number that affects the result of the game is updated one or more times.

Further, if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. The base notification command may be one that simply reports the base value or one that reports an abnormality in the base value. An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges.

There are various methods for base notification, and one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more methods may be combined. For example, the base value may be notified constantly or at a predetermined timing using the base display (7 segment LED) 1317, liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like. By notifying the player of the base value, the player may be able to check the condition of the pachinko machine. At that time, the display mode described in terms of the accessory ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage on the above-mentioned display or display device. Note that the value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying images such as the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, or 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You can.

When displaying the base value on the base display 1317 configured with 7-segment LEDs, the main control MPU 1311 inputs display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data to be set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as a base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the digits for displaying numerical values in D15 to D8 with "data n setting" and sets the data whose display contents are specified in D7 to D0. is generated and written to the shift register 3171.

Furthermore, when displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, it is recommended to set a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%, etc.) for the base value, and change the display mode when the reference value is exceeded. . For example, the numerical value may be displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green for normal times, red for times exceeding the standard, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. The display may be divided into a plurality of stages and the emitted light color may be changed at each stage, such as white, blue, or yellow. Additionally, self-deprecating comments may be displayed at each stage when the base value is low, such as ``I'm doing great,'' ``I'm getting worse,'' ``It's not bad,'' and ``In a sense, it's amazing.'' If the base value exceeds the standard value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud is being committed. For this reason, it is desirable to display the warning in a manner such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to a weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, "similar" means that at least one of display, lamp, and sound is the same.

Further, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.) may be notified using various lamps, a liquid crystal display device, sound, or the like. Further, if the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command may be generated to display a message indicating that base notification is not possible on the liquid crystal display device. By sending the notification command to the sub-board that generated it, the performance device controlled by the sub-board can notify the status of the base, which allows for a wider variety of notifications than the main board, and reduces the load on the main board. It can be reduced. Furthermore, by notifying that the base display is not possible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between a failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of a base value to display. Furthermore, by displaying the abnormality in the base value on the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to know the abnormality in the base value without looking at the back side of the game board where the base display 1317 is provided.

Function display unit 1400 may also serve as base display 1317. In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 may be used to provide constant notification. Further, it is preferable to notify at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variation display game is not being executed, at the timing when the special symbol variation display game ends).

Base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. In this case, if the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls, for each predetermined number of out pitches), as in the base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, etc.) described later, good.

The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary signal (high, low) indicating whether the calculated base value is higher or lower than a predetermined threshold value. Alternatively, a signal having a length that roughly represents the calculated base value may be output (for example, if the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%, a 30 millisecond pulse). Further, a number of continuous pulses representing an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, three continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

Note that the base notification command may be generated even when the base value is not updated, and the base notification command does not need to be generated when the base value is not updated. Even if a base notification command is not generated, the base value continues to be displayed.

In addition, as will be described later in FIG. 56, it determines whether the calculated base value is abnormal, generates a base notification command to notify the abnormality of the base value, and informs players and hall employees of the abnormality of the base. You may notify.

Further, whether or not to notify the player of the base may be determined depending on the gaming state (gaming situation). This is because if players are constantly informed of the base value, they may become less attentive to the performance of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original fun of pachinko machines, and the players' awareness may become dispersed. It is.

Furthermore, based on the calculated base value, the performance of the special symbol variation display game that is currently being executed or will be executed in the future may be changed. For example, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of display selection tables and select effects from different display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) depending on the base value.

Further, during the special symbol variation display game, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold (for example, 30%). For this reason, when the threshold value is exceeded or lowered during the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. The presentation may be changed in the same manner or may be changed in different manners when the base value rises and falls beyond a predetermined threshold.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls is updated in the base calculation area updating process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation/display process in step S89.

For this reason, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening. The prize ball number buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). Thereafter, the base value is updated in a base ratio calculation/display process (step S89), and a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in an output data setting process (step S90).

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. Note that the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is not necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. do not have. On the other hand, when the main control board 1310 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout, but the payout command reception confirmation is sent to the main control board 1310. There's no need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the status of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, abnormalities in the gaming machine can be detected early. For example, when determining that the base is abnormal if the base value is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol fluctuation display game, and if it straddles the predetermined threshold and goes up or down, it becomes abnormal. Even if it is determined that it is, the game is not stopped and the calculation process of the base value is continuously executed regardless of the determination of abnormality. For example, special symbol fluctuation display games include short-time ones such as normal fluctuations, and long-term ones such as reach fluctuations, and the base value is calculated from the start to the end of one special symbol fluctuation display game. If the condition is satisfied multiple times, it is recommended to calculate the base value each time and update and display the base value each time. This means that if you limit the calculation of the base value during the special symbol fluctuation display game (for example, calculate and update the base value only once at the end of the fluctuation display), the change in the base value may take a long time depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because the player may not be aware of the time, and the information necessary for hall operation may not be output at an appropriate timing, which may cause trouble to the hall.

Further, if the fired game ball does not enter the starting prize opening or the general prize opening, the base value will decrease. In this state, the player is in a loss, so for example, an additional effect is added to the effect being performed on the LCD (for example, an effect related to winning or losing that is not related to a change in the base value, or an effect that appears in conjunction with a change in the base value). Adding a special performance that has a high expectation of a jackpot (among performances that are not related to changes in the base value, a preview performance that has a high degree of expectation such as the next preview performance, or a preview performance that has a high expectation of a jackpot) Among the specific effects that will appear, a preview effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, displaying the base value in a rainbow display) may be performed. Thereby, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning the starting hole or the general winning hole, and can be motivated to continue playing the game.

On the other hand, if many of the fired game balls enter the starting prize opening or the general prize opening (if they win more than the average number of past winnings), the base value increases. In this state, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the player will feel less disappointed because the player has received a payout of more game balls than usual. The presentation of the variable display game may be changed to a presentation with low expectations.

[9-2. Variations in update timing of prize pitch count and base value calculation timing]
Next, variations in the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be explained using FIGS. 42 to 44. An overview of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Figure 41: Calculate the number of prize balls → Update the number of prize balls → Calculate the base value → Send the payout command ・Figure 42: Calculate the number of prize balls → Update the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Calculate the base value ・Figure 43: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send payout command → Update number of prize balls → Calculate base value ・Figure 44: Calculate number of prize balls → Send payout command → Confirm command reception → Update number of prize balls → Calculate base value ・Figure 45: Calculate number of prize balls → Send payout command → Payout completion notification → Update number of prize balls → Base value calculation The variations shown in FIGS. 41 to 44 above include not only the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39 and the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. It is applicable to any base calculation area update process and base calculation/display process.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update process (step S81) is executed at the illustrated position, and the base ratio calculation is performed after the output data setting process (step S90). - Execute display processing (step S89).

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and uses the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. Thereafter, a payout command is sent to the payout control board 951 in an output data setting process (step S90), and a base value is updated in a base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. As mentioned above, depending on whether the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the completion of ball payout may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after the output data setting processing (step S90), the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89) are performed. Execute.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each prize opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and performs the output data setting process. (Step S90) A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. After that, in base calculation area update processing (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and base ratio calculation/ The base value is updated in display processing (step S89). Note that the prize ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been sent) instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command.

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. As mentioned above, depending on whether the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the completion of ball payout may be omitted.

Note that the timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830, so the base calculation area update process ( The order of step S81) and base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, base calculation area update processing (step S81) and base ratio calculation/display processing (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each prize opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and performs the output data setting process. (Step S90) A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, data on the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951 so that the data on the number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost when a power outage occurs. For this reason, although it is necessary to confirm receipt of the command from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the notification of completion of ball payout may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, base calculation area update processing (step S81) and base ratio calculation/display processing are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each prize opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and performs the output data setting process. (Step S90) A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

After storing the received payout command in memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, it notifies the main control board 1310 that the ball payout is complete.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or in the embodiment described later) The base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

In addition, in the procedure shown in FIG. 44, in order to prevent data on the number of unpaid prize balls from being lost when a power outage occurs, data on the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up on the main control board 1310. For this reason, although it is necessary to notify the completion of ball payout from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used for calculating the base value, when predetermined conditions are met. For example, in the process shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the winning hole sensor detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 43, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout command is transmitted. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 44, when the reception of the payout command is confirmed, the number of prize balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of prize balls is completed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls in the special prize cannot be accurately counted due to the lag between the timing of determining whether the game state is in the special prize and the update timing of the number of prize balls. The problem becomes particularly serious when it takes a long time to update the number of prize balls after a prize is entered into the prize opening. For this reason, a flag is attached to the winning prize during the special prize, and the flag is carried over to the number of prize balls, payout command, reception confirmation, and payout completion notification resulting from the winning. Then, using the flag, it is determined whether the ball is a prize ball that is being awarded a special prize at each stage. In this way, even if it takes a long time from entering the winning slot to updating the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated at these opportunities, and the base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known for a single game machine, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and inspection process can be shortened, and the game machine can be manufactured efficiently.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out prize balls, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 maintains the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning hole sensor detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning hole in which winning is detected is stored. Add to the number of pitched balls. Note that although a predetermined upper limit may be set for this number of unpaid balls, it is not necessary to set an upper limit. In this case, each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated, it is preferable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total number of prize balls for calculating the base value. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after transmitting the payout command from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning hole sensor detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning hole in which winning is detected. A payout command is sent to the payout control board 951. Even when the pachinko machine is out of balls and cannot pay out prize balls, a payout command is sent, and the number of unpaid balls is held in the payout control board 951. In this case, it is preferable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the payout command is transmitted.

Furthermore, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, it may update the number of prize balls for calculating the base value. Note that although a predetermined upper limit may be set for this number of prize balls, it is not necessary to set an upper limit. Furthermore, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

In addition, as will be described later in FIG. 47, without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1, every time a prize is won a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), , steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

As explained above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings, but when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay, and the base value is displayed in real time on the base display 1317. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated and displayed at predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be explained using FIGS. 46 to 51. An overview of the base value calculation timing for each variation is as follows.
・Figures 39 and 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 46 and 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of awarded pitches ・Figures 48 and 49: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out pitches Calculation/Figures 50 and 51: When either the number of award pitches or the number of out pitches reaches a predetermined number, the base value is updated.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). Note that in FIG. 46, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 39) described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls, since the ball is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, whether the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). In addition, each time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, or when the number of prize balls, which will be described later, exceeds a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls means that a large number of prize balls are received in a predetermined period of time other than during special prizes (e.g., considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the starting prize opening, this corresponds to 10 or more winning balls per minute). This is the case when a ball (prize ball) is obtained. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the number of prize balls from the reference value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. Furthermore, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize pitches, it is not necessary to add the acquired number of prize pitches to the prize pitch number buffer in step S813, and instead subtract the number of prize pitches added to the prize pitch number buffer in step S813. Good too.

As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player and hall employees that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sound, etc. Further, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Further, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal may not be used for calculating the base value. In this case, prize balls may be paid out to the player. In addition, if the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and the notification is made by the above-mentioned notification means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display, information output from the external terminal board 784, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal will be notified. May be used for base value calculations. Furthermore, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all data in the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, the game is started by checking the operation in the initial state. Another method of stopping the game is to temporarily stop the game (for example, stop the variable display of special symbols), and then return to the original state after stopping the error notification and restart the game. Therefore, even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, it outputs a power failure detection signal, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. After the error notification ends, the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area and the game is resumed. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 in that state, so the interrupted game is resumed by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, there is a possibility that 100 game balls (i.e., out balls) will be fired into the game area 5a, and all the game balls will enter the general winning slot or the starting winning slot, so it is important to check for abnormalities in the number of winning balls. It is desirable that the notification be made in a quiet manner (for example, a lower volume or lower light intensity than a normal error notification) that is less urgent than a normal error (magnetic sensor error, etc.). Further, the display time may be the same as that for a normal error, or may be a short time. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 seconds and no notification may be made.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out pitches is updated so that the acquired number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S817 has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S825). In addition, in step S824, the end of the notification was determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined period of time, but the end of the notification was determined so that the prize ball abnormality would be notified for a predetermined number of fired balls. You can. Alternatively, the abnormality may continue to be reported until the hall employee confirms it.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, it is determined in step S985 whether there is an abnormality in the number of awarded pitches, but after obtaining the number of out pitches, there is an abnormality in the number of awarded pitches in comparison with the number of out pitches. (In other words, whether there is an abnormality in the base value) may be determined. For example, if the number of prize balls exceeds the number of out balls in a predetermined period of time, or if the number of prize balls in the general winning slot or starting winning slot is considered, a high percentage of out balls (for example, 50% or more) win the prize. For example, if you are

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 47, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 40) described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the buffer value for the number of prize balls may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of prize balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of prize balls may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more). In addition, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), the judgment result of comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold Th1 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 47), the value of the prize ball number buffer is It may be determined whether or not is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold Th1.

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation/display process is ended.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). In other words, if the game situation is such that the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1), the fractional part of the number of prize balls is calculated. (leave the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the award pitch count buffer in the award pitch count buffer), store the other part in memory (add the threshold Th1 to the total award pitch count buffer), and use it to calculate the base value. Execute the processing to be performed. Specifically, when the threshold Th1 is 100 balls, the prize ball number buffer value is 99 balls, and when 5 prize balls are generated by entering the general winning slot, the prize ball number buffer value is 104 balls. However, 100 balls are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for calculating the base value, and the remaining four balls are left in the number of prize balls buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls left in the prize ball number buffer is used to calculate the base value the next time the prize ball number buffer value becomes equal to or greater than the threshold Th1. Furthermore, although the description has been made using the threshold value Th1=100 pieces, other numerical values such as 1000 pieces may be used. However, if a large threshold value Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a jackpot is obtained, the discovery of fraud may be delayed. If there is a jackpot (for example, a 4th round jackpot and an 8th round jackpot), it is preferable to set it to a value below the minimum number of prize balls for the jackpot. Also, from the perspective of early detection of fraud, it is recommended to update the base value frequently. For example, it is preferable to have 10 thresholds Th1 instead of 100 because the base value is updated frequently.

Note that steps S891 and S892 may be executed every time a predetermined number of wins (for example, 10 times) are won without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. Furthermore, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311, or may be measured by the output of an RTC (real-time clock).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error (or undefined), so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Further, in addition to the case where the total number of out pitches is 0, when the calculated base value is an abnormal value, it is not necessary to calculate the base value and update the base calculation area 13128. For example, if the total number of out balls is less than the total number of prize balls, the base value will be 100% or more, and the number of prize balls equal to or more than the number of fired balls (out balls) has been obtained, and the game is being played normally. Therefore, there is no need to store numerical values in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and calculate the base value. Further, when the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Furthermore, an abnormality in the base value may be determined using 1500% as a threshold value. The theoretical upper limit of the base value of a pachinko machine with a maximum number of prize balls per winning opening of 15 is 1500%, so a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value and indicates that the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. In this case as well, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, or it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the threshold value for determining whether the base value is abnormal may be any other value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in normal operation of the pachinko machine is determined, and if it is outside the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is filled with the value read from the division result register A131218. It is not necessary to update the display of the base value.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

Note that the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are the cumulative numbers since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, as will be described later in FIG. It may be initialized at timing (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls or every predetermined number of out pitches).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

As explained above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment determines whether the number of prize balls is abnormal each time it acquires the number of prize balls, so that fraudulent activity can be detected early. This is because during a normal game, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of fired balls) do not win in the general winning hole 2001 or the starting winning hole 2002, 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, abnormalities in winnings to the winning openings that are always open (general winning opening 2001 and starting winning openings 2002, 2004) are determined and notified.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition, so that the accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number, so the amount of calculation required to calculate the base value (e.g. The load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base broadcast command is generated to broadcast the calculated base value and the new base value is broadcast, but until then, the previous base value will be broadcast. be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, the number of out pitches is recorded in the out pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). Note that in FIG. 48, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, as a result of the determination in step S812, if there is a prize ball, the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818). The acquired number of out pitches is added to the number of out pitches buffer (step S819).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. For this reason, for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize opening and it is decided to generate a look-ahead effect, and the display mode of the pending display is different from normal (blinking display, red pending, etc.), , the player expects the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the pre-read pending to be a jackpot, but if the special symbol variation display game is a loss, the player is disappointed. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls as in this embodiment, the player's disappointment as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the timing when the prize ball is generated, so a higher base value is reported due to the prize ball that has entered the starting slot. In other words, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed when a prize is won in the starting winning hole, even if the number of prize balls paid out when winning in the starting winning hole is added, the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1 = 100 pieces) ), the base value is not updated. In other words, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should increase (due to the number of displayed digits, only the lower numbers change, and the display may not change). For this reason, even if the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is a failure, the player thinks that the base value will increase later (that is, the player is doing well), and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In other words, even if it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th1). Furthermore, if it is determined that a look-ahead effect is to be executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the next prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number. .

Note that the player may be allowed to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate it without delay. For example, the selection can be made using the operation button 220C at the start of the game. Further, the calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Furthermore, when it is decided to perform a look-ahead effect, it is preferable to perform a effect that can notify of a delay in base value calculation. It should be noted that if the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery will not be executed even if a prize is won in the starting winning slot. Even in this case, the prize balls are paid out as the prize enters the starting winning hole, so the number of prize balls is counted and used to calculate the base value. In addition, in the event of a specific error, even if a winning ball enters the starting winning slot or general winning slot, it will be treated as if there was no winning and no prize balls will be paid out.The number of winning balls will not be counted, and depending on the winning slot, the base Value is not updated.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 49, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out pitch count buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the number of out pitches may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out pitches (specifically, the storage area for the number of out pitches may be configured with 8 bits). , if the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more). In addition, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 48), the determination result of comparing the number of out pitches with the threshold Th2 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation/display process (FIG. 49), the number of out pitches is determined by the flag. It may be determined whether the threshold value Th2 is greater than or equal to the threshold value Th2.

Then, if the out pitch count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation/display process is ended.

On the other hand, if the out pitch count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch count buffer (step S900). Note that steps S899 and S900 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out pitch count buffer value and the threshold value Th2.

Thereafter, a base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Note that the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative numbers since the pachinko machine 1 started operating, but the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are calculated at the same timing (for example, when a predetermined prize is given). It may be initialized for each number of pitches or for each predetermined number of out pitches).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. The base notification command may be one that simply reports the base value, one that reports the base value with a specific effect, or one that reports an abnormality in the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out balls (number of fired balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. Furthermore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more interesting.

In addition, each time a prize ball is received (detection of prize winning, transmission of payout command, arrival of payout command, completion of payout of prize balls, etc.), the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. This is because if it is checked whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball) when adding up the number of prize balls, the base value may not be calculated correctly. For example, even if the ball is not fired for a predetermined period of time (approximately 1 minute), the slinging condition that occurs when the game ball gets caught on a nail placed in the game area will be resolved, and the game ball will arrive at the prize opening after a delay. This is because you may win a prize. For this reason, it is desirable to update the number of awarded pitches regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

If both the number of out pitches and the buffer value of the number of out pitches are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the buffer value of the number of out pitches is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the buffer value of the number of out pitches may be displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, so it takes more time to calculate the base value than when calculating the base value every time an out ball is detected. The amount of calculations (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base broadcast command is generated to broadcast the calculated base value and the new base value is broadcast, but until then, the previous base value will be broadcast. be done.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 50 records the number of prize pitches in the prize pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. , records the number of out pitches in the out pitch count buffer. Note that in FIG. 50, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of out pitches is added to the out pitch number buffer (step S819).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 51, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the number of out pitches buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the out pitch number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total award pitch number (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. The base notification command may be one that simply reports the base value or one that reports an abnormality in the base value. Note that a base notification command may be generated each time a base value is calculated, or a base notification command may not be generated even if a base value is calculated.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. That is, unless the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded pitches or the total number of out pitches is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

The data of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches in the base calculation area 13128 are stored in the base calculation area update processing and base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 39, 46, 47, 48, 49, FIG. 51, etc.), and read out in the base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 40, 47, 49, 51, etc.). In addition, the data of the award pitch count buffer and the out pitch count buffer of the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311. - Read out during display processing (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Therefore, the base calculation area update process and base calculation/display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (gaming control program), and the program for accessory ratio calculation/display process can be shared among gaming machines with different specifications. can.

FIG. 52(A) shows an example of the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(A), a prize pitch number buffer, a total prize pitch number, an out pitch number buffer, a winning pitch number buffer, a specific winning pitch number buffer, a total number of out pitches, and a base are stored. The prize ball count buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to players other than during special prizes, and is based on the number of prize balls when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls). used to calculate. The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out pitch count buffer is the number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the number of out pitches meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of out pitches). It will be done. The winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of winning balls in the general winning hole and the starting winning hole. The specific number of winning balls buffer temporarily stores the number of balls that have won in a specific general winning hole or starting winning hole. The winning pitch count buffer is used when counting the number of out pitches based on the number of pitches passing through the out mouth (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific number of winning balls buffer is used when correcting the number of out balls by the number of winning balls into the specific general winning hole (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out balls is the total number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize. The base is calculated as the total number of awarded pitches divided by the total number of out pitches x 100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, and is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation/display processing.

Of the work area structure shown in FIG. 52(A), the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches correspond to each area of the total cumulative total in FIG. 52(B), which will be described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. It can store numbers up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since this data will not be deleted unless something goes wrong with the data, a large storage area should be prepared to store the data for a long period of time. Furthermore, the base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total sum of bases in FIG. 52(B), which will be described later, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation. Note that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded in decimal numbers may be allocated.

FIG. 52(B) shows another example of the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), a prize pitch number buffer, a total prize pitch number, an out pitch number buffer, a winning pitch number buffer, a specific winning pitch number buffer, a total number of out pitches, and a base are stored. Each data item is the same as the explanation in FIG. 52(A). The storage area for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (or every predetermined number of out pitches, or every predetermined time) (for example, every 6000 prize balls). It is composed of a ring buffer with n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all data moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. . After data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. Note that the write pointer may be moved when data other than the number of prized pitches (number of out pitches, predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data strings moves every predetermined number of prize balls. Further, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the base value is calculated using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the base cumulative value is the cumulative total of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches. It is a value calculated from the value, and when one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data after the ring buffer goes through the cycle, the cumulative value is calculated by excluding the data in the cleared area. will be recalculated. The total cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of all data collected in the past, and the base total value calculated from the cumulative total value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data in one cycle, the total cumulative value is calculated including the original data in the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), the total number of winning pitches and the total number of out pitches in the ring buffer each have a 2-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 65535 in decimal notation. Since the cumulative total is the sum of data for 6000 prize balls x n (60000 prize balls if n=10), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches each have a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation. Since the total will not be erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area will be provided to store long-term data. Furthermore, the base cumulative total and total cumulative total each have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation. Note that a capacity that allows the base value to be recorded in decimal numbers may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52(A), the stored data is not deleted, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted every predetermined period (for example, 1 day, 1 week, 1 month, etc.) good. Similarly, the total cumulative total shown in FIG. 52(B) may be deleted every predetermined period.

Further, if the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Furthermore, it may be reported that the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated again after checking the data in the backup area using the check code and copying the normal data in the backup area to the main area.

[9-4. Display of base value]
The base value calculated as described above may continue to be displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 may be visually checked. Since this is not possible, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. Naturally, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation/display process (step S89) are executed.

Further, the base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a pushbutton switch, is pressed, the base value starts to be displayed, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, the display is turned off. Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the base value may be displayed on the base display 1317. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

When the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display is made to confirm the normal operation of the base display 1317 (FIG. 36(E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. , it is better to reduce the power consumption of gaming machines. This base non-display state is in the same manner as after the initial setting is completed (FIG. 36(B)), but may be in a different manner as long as it is distinguishable from the displayed base value.

The base display 1317 may also be used as the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the gaming status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display on the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may continue. By continuing the progress of the game, the base display can be quickly switched to the game state display when the main body frame 4 is closed. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened during a special symbol fluctuation display game, the base value is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time has elapsed, a variable display for the remaining time can be performed. . Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol stops at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol on the functional display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it can be configured so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Further, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-mentioned embodiment, the accessory ratio) may be displayed on the base display (accessory ratio display) 1317. In this way, the base value (accessory object ratio) can be checked without opening the main body frame 4, so that a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open. Furthermore, in an island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the body frame 4 of one pachinko machine is opened, the back side of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such gaming machines, by opening the main body frame 4 of one of the pachinko machines, the bases (accessories ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back can be confirmed. In addition, when displaying the base value even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value may be displayed in a form that the player can recognize (for example, on a display device that displays the effects of a special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). It is recommended to display . This is because the base value can be used as a barometer representing the performance of the pachinko machine, and is valuable for players to see. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the base value is calculated by the payout control board 951, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via a relay board.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the amount of light (brightness) of the base display 1317 does not change even if it shifts to the energy saving mode. This is because if the light intensity of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it becomes difficult to confirm the base value using the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine outside of opening hours.

Specifically, the gaming machine of this embodiment enters a standby state when a predetermined period of time elapses after a game ball does not enter any of the winning holes and the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. . In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs BGM that is output with so-called normal fluctuations. Further, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the standby state, the state shifts to the demonstration state. In the demo state, a video is played that shows the motif of the gaming machine, and an explanation of the gaming machine is provided. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the demo state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, the amount of light from the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced in order to suppress power consumption. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (function display unit 1400 and base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is necessary to reduce the light intensity of these display devices. Good too. Further, unless the light intensity of the function display unit 1400 is reduced, a player who wants to play on an empty machine can easily see the result of the previous lottery.

In addition, even if the game ball does not enter the starting prize opening or the general prize opening, when the game ball is fired towards the gaming area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value will be recalculated and updated. there is a possibility. Even if game balls are fired and the number of out balls increases, if the number of prize balls does not increase, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players are eager for revenge.

By notifying such a player of the game status through the function display unit 1400 which also serves as the base display 1317, it is possible to revive the interest in the game. In other words, even if the player enters the demo mode or energy saving mode, the display format of the display that displays the base value may be maintained at the same level as before the transition to the demo mode or energy saving mode, or the light intensity may be increased. It would be good to be able to check the base value properly.

In this way, we have explained how to maintain or increase the light intensity of the display that displays the base value, but with an emphasis on reducing energy consumption, it is also possible to lower or turn off the light intensity of the display that displays the base value. good. For example, during energy saving mode, certain operations (a firing stop button that forcibly stops firing, a performance operation button that changes the performance that appears, a RAM clear button that clears the contents of RAM, a button that changes the power to the gaming machine) It is preferable to reduce the amount of light on the display on which the base value is displayed when detecting an operation of an operating means provided on the game machine, such as a supply adjustment button for switching between supply and non-supply. Furthermore, not only in energy saving mode, but when you perform the above-mentioned prescribed operations, the light intensity of both the lamp, etc. that reduces power consumption and the display that displays the base value will be reduced or turned off during energy saving mode. Good too.

When reducing or turning off the light intensity of both the lamp, etc. and the display that displays the base value, reduce the light intensity of the lamp, etc. that reduces power consumption during energy saving mode before the display that displays the base value. In this case, the light amount of a lamp or the like that consumes a large amount of power is first reduced, resulting in a significant reduction in power consumption. In addition, the light intensity of the display device that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off before the lamp etc. In this case, the gorgeousness of the gaming machine can be maintained even in the energy saving mode. be effective. Additionally, during energy saving mode, the lamps etc. that reduce power consumption and the display that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time. In this case, the amount of reduction in power consumption can be increased and the energy saving effect is high. . Note that the terms "before and after" in these descriptions (meaning "first" and "same time") also include the order of timing of internal processing and the order of appearance from the player's perspective.

Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be set in multiple stages, and the display mode at each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. The display device for displaying the base value may be constructed of multi-color LEDs, and the luminescent color may be changed to white, blue, or yellow at each stage. In addition, the display device that displays the base value is configured with a liquid crystal display device, and at each stage, the base value is low. Sometimes self-deprecating comments may be displayed. Furthermore, without changing the display mode of the display device that displays the base value, it is also possible to perform an effect of adding a comment as described above to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 where the decorative pattern is displayed.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of pitches passing through the out mouth]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described using FIGS. 53 to 56. In the process described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out pitches is calculated using the number of winning pitches and the number of pitches passing through the out mouth, and a base value is calculated. An overview of the base value calculation timing for each variation is as follows.
・Figures 54 and 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 55 and 56: Calculate the base value for each number of prescribed award pitches and for each number of out pitches The base value is calculated for each number of prescribed award pitches Although explanations of the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out pitches will be omitted, they can be realized by combining FIGS. 54 to 56.

If out balls are detected by the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out exit 1111, there is a problem in that the number of out balls cannot be accurately counted. This is because the game ball launched toward the gaming area 5a flows out of the gaming area 5a via the out opening 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the starting winning opening 2002, and the big winning opening 2005, 2006. For this reason, the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls fired toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out exit, and the base value is accurately calculated.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has almost the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. An out-outlet passing ball sensor 1021 is provided to detect the number of balls passing through the outlet. The out exit passing ball sensor 1021 is preferably installed at a position where the player can see it through the out exit 1111. By installing the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out exit 1111, it is possible to make the player aware that out balls are being counted, that is, the base is being calculated.

Further, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed in a position that is not seen by the player, such as in a gathering gutter where game balls flowing down from the gaming area 5a through the out-port 1111 are lined up. If it is installed in a position where the player cannot see it, the player does not need to be conscious of counting out balls. In addition, by providing the exit exit passing ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the exit exit 1111, sufficient space can be secured for placing the liquid crystal display device and accessories (movable objects), improving the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5. can. In addition, in order to prevent double counting of game balls, the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 are placed on the rolling surface so that they do not bounce back. It is best to make it sloped or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54 acquires the number of winning balls, the number of balls passing through the outside exit, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls passing through the outside exit every timer interrupt cycle. Note that in FIG. 54, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than those in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated. Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls.

Thereafter, the number of balls passing through the out mouth is obtained (step S818), and the number of winning balls is obtained (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of pitches passing through the out hole and the number of winning pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used to calculate the base value is updated every time an out ball or winning ball is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. Ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 records the number of prize pitches in the prize pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. , the number of balls passing through the out hole is recorded in the out pitch number buffer, and the number of winning pitches is recorded in the winning pitch number buffer. Note that in FIG. 55, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

Thereafter, the number of pitches passing through the out mouth is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of pitches passing through the out mouth is added to the out pitch number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning pitches is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning pitches is added to the winning pitch number buffer (step S821).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of balls passing through the out mouth and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 Now, the acquired number of pitches passing through the exit and the number of winning pitches are added to separate storage areas (number of out pitches buffer, number of winning pitches buffer). In this way, the number of balls passing through the exit and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in separate storage areas.

In addition, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls are recorded in separate storage areas, the number of out balls increases by 1 when entering the winning hole. The counting of the number of balls passing through the out hole and the counting of the number of winning balls are executed simultaneously (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after both the number of out pitches buffer and the number of winning balls buffer are updated. At that time, if both the out pitch count buffer and winning pitch count buffer cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, should the number of balls passing through the out mouth be given priority in counting, or the number of winning pitches should be given priority in counting? It is better to determine this in advance, instead of deciding it by random drawing. At this time, if the process related to the prize ball is prioritized over other processes, the payout process for the prize ball can be executed quickly, but this may be determined as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 56, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the sum of the number of pitches passing through the out opening stored in the number of out pitches buffer and the number of winning pitches stored in the number of winning pitches buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S896 ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out pitches is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out pitches is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of award pitches (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), the winning pitch number buffer is set to 0, the winning pitch number buffer value is added to the out pitch number buffer, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted (step S901). . Note that steps S896 to S901 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the number of out pitches (buffer value of number of out pitches + buffer value of winning pitches) and the threshold value Th2.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. That is, unless the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded pitches or the total number of out pitches is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls to the number of balls passing through the out mouth, so the number of out balls can be accurately counted and the base value can be calculated accurately. can. Furthermore, by checking the base value in the manufacturing process and inspection process of the gaming machine, it can be confirmed whether the winning opening switch, the base display 1317, and the process for calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Base abnormality notification]
The process described above is for generating a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process for determining an abnormality in the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
・Figure 57: Calculate the base value every time for each timer interrupt cycle ・Figure 58: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of award pitches and for each predetermined number of out pitches The pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of award pitches, the predetermined Although the explanation of the pattern for calculating the base value for each number of out pitches is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIG. 57 and FIG. 58.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process ends. The method for notifying the abnormality of the base can be the same as the method for notifying the base described above.

For example, one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, the base display (7 segment LED) 1317, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, etc. may be used to notify abnormalities in the base value. If a player is notified of an abnormality in the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality in the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be expressed as a percentage and displayed on the above-mentioned display or display device to notify abnormalities in the base value. Note that the value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying images such as the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, or 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You can.

Further, when displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, the numerical value may be displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green for normal times, red for abnormal conditions, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. The display may be divided into a plurality of stages and the emitted light color may be changed at each stage, such as white, blue, or yellow.

Further, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.) may be notified using various lamps, a liquid crystal display device, sound, or the like. The function display unit 1400 may notify an abnormality in the base value. Furthermore, information on abnormalities in the base may be outputted from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall.

Note that the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 57 calculates the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches at the timing when the number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches satisfy a predetermined condition, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, for example. It is recommended to use this function in combination with the base calculation area update process to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition. Note that in FIG. 58, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the number of out pitches buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the out pitch number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total award pitch number (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process ends.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. That is, unless the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded pitches or the total number of out pitches is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

Note that the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 58 directly updates the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches using the acquired number of awarded pitches and number of out pitches, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 54, for example. It is recommended to use this function in combination with the base calculation area update process.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, if the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so the player can know the status of the gaming machine, and the pachinko machine can notify the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is possible to know the possibility of unauthorized operation of the gaming machine. Furthermore, it is possible to detect and notify abnormalities in gaming machines that cannot be detected using conventional error detection methods.

[9-7. Notification of base change]
Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine that notifies changes in the calculated base value will be described.

The base value calculated by a pachinko machine naturally fluctuates up and down. Since the base value represents the performance of the gaming machine, players who are playing the game are concerned about changes in the base value as well as the base value itself. For this reason, it is desirable to notify players of changes in the base value. When a display indicating the upper or lower value of the base value appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 59, the history of calculated base values is recorded in order to compare the current base value and the history of past base values. Note that in FIG. 59, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the number of out pitches buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the out pitch number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total award pitch number (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out pitches (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the base value management timer has timed up (step S904). If the base value management timer has not timed out, it is not the timing to store the base value in the base history, and the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the base value management timer has timed up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record the base value every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history every time the base value management timer times out. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or multiple base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When storing a plurality of base histories in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128 to store, for example, 10 base values for a predetermined period of time. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer for the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, the number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches for a predetermined time x n are stored, A base value may be calculated if necessary.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display selection processing. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the most recent past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. (Step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the base value decrease by referring to the base decrease duration measurement timer. (Step S10302). If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the base drop, the effect table whose base is being lowered is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the base drop, the effect table whose base is continuing to drop is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller than the current base value (equal to or greater than), the base lowering continuation time measurement timer is reset (step S10305), and a display selection table for base increasing is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, it was determined in step S10301 whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value, but the current base value and the base history value are compared to determine whether it is greater, equal, or smaller. You may. The base value is generally a decimal value because it is determined by division. For this reason, it is preferable to determine whether the base history value and the current base value are equal, taking into consideration a predetermined tolerance range (for example, 3%).

64 to 68 are diagrams showing examples of display selection tables. These display selection tables are used to select the effects of the special symbol variation display game based on random numbers selected in response to a winning in the starting winning hole (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). Display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is increasing or there is no change in the base value, and display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected when the base value is decreasing. selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

Each display selection table includes items such as performance number, performance content, variation time, notes, and distribution. The performance number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the performance selected in the display selection table. The performance content is the name of the performance. The variation time is the time from when the variation of the special symbol starts to when it ends due to the performance. The notes are information that describes the outline of the performance so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is the probability that the performance will be selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

Display selection table 1 (loss) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss and the base value is increasing or there is no change, and display selection table 1 (win 1) shown in FIG. 65 is selected. is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot that does not lead to a variable probability state, and the base value is increasing or remains unchanged. Display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variable jackpot that derives a probability variable state, and the base value is increasing or remains unchanged.

Display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value continues to decrease even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started decreasing.

As shown in the figure, display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2, which are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effect is selected with a high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the effect is determined.

In addition, if the base value is still decreasing even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the base value started decreasing, the display selection table 3 is used to select the effect and the selected effect is applied. You may switch.

Further, whether or not to display a specific effect to notify of a change in the base value may be determined depending on the gaming state (gaming situation). This is because if players are constantly notified of changes in the base value, they may become less focused on the performance of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original fun of pachinko machines, and the players' awareness may become dispersed. This is because there is.

For example, when a special symbol fluctuation display game is being executed (a gaming situation where the result of a jackpot lottery is not shown), the performance of the special symbol fluctuation display game is executed with priority, and when it is not fluctuating, the base value increases. It is preferable to display a specific effect (effect that indicates the change in the base value) when the base value changes.

The particular performance may be displayed at a timing when the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined period of time. This is because if the specific performance is displayed immediately after the special symbol variation display game ends, the player's sense of tension will continue and fatigue will accumulate. When a game ball enters a starting winning hole while the specific performance is being displayed, the display of the specific performance is stopped and the performance of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because the jackpot lottery is held and the special symbol variation display game starts when a prize is won in the starting prize opening, so it is better to have the player pay attention to the special symbol variation display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of award balls has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th1) or a situation where the number of out pitches has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th2). Furthermore, the specific performance may be displayed depending on the result of the lottery, but it may also be configured so that it is always executed if the same conditions are met.

Further, it is preferable that the specific effect is not displayed when the base value increases, but is displayed only when the base value decreases. This is because when players are informed of an increase in the base value, their expectations increase, and if the base value does not increase to the extent that the players expect, there is a possibility that the players will be disappointed due to the gap between their expectations. be. On the other hand, this is because when players are notified of a decrease in the base value, some players increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display selection table is changed depending on whether the base value is decreasing or not (increasing or steady), but the display is divided into three states: while the base value is decreasing, steady, and increasing. A selection table may be defined to notify the player when the base is rising. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the base value is steady (whether the base history value and the current base value are equal) by considering a predetermined tolerance range (for example, 3%).

Further, the particular performance may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, the base value is more likely to decrease when displayed outside the special symbol variation display game than when displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

In addition, in a state where the game ball does not enter the starting winning hole and the special symbol variation display game is not performed, the base value usually decreases. Furthermore, if the special symbol variation display game is not played for a predetermined period of time, a demonstration screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69(A) is a display example of normal reach, in which the left and right symbols are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 69(B) is a display example of special reach 1, in which the left and right symbols displayed at the top left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, a player and an opponent are playing rock, paper, scissors, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the rock, paper, scissors. FIG. 69(C) is a display example of Special Reach 2, in which the left and right symbols displayed at the top left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, a player and an opponent are competing against each other, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the competition.

Figure 69 (D) is a display example of freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered in a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern (for example, at the bottom right of the screen). Display a recognizable display. FIG. 69(E) is a display example of freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value decrease is placed in a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern (for example, at the bottom of the screen). Provide a recognizable indication of continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be placed at any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Further, the display indicating a decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. For example, the display may pop up in the center of the display screen.

Although the example in which the degree of change in the base value is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may also be changed. Furthermore, instead of the upward and downward trend of the base value, changes in the base value may be displayed numerically.

The change in the displayed base value can be the result of comparing the base value calculated in the time interval before the predetermined time with the base value calculated in the current time interval, or the change in the base value calculated before the predetermined time. It may also be a comparison result between the total value and the latest base value.

[9-8. Base calculation considering specific general winning slots]
Next, a process for accurately calculating the base value in consideration of winnings in a specific general winning hole will be described.

In pachinko machines, players aim to win a prize in a specific winning hole where the game ball is likely to win during a jackpot (for example, the opened big winning hole 2005, 2006). Adjust the strength of the shot. Even during a jackpot, you can aim for the big winning hole 2005 by firing the game ball at the same spot as when hitting normally, or you can aim for the big winning hole 2006 by hitting the ball to the right, which increases the strength of the shot to the maximum. There are variations. Among these variations, a game board may be designed such that a starting prize hole or a general prize hole is arranged downstream of the big prize hole to pick up balls that spill from the big prize hole.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of a pachinko machine that allows players to hit right during a jackpot will be explained in detail. During the jackpot, the player hits the ball to the right in order to win the game ball into the opened jackpot. Many of the game balls fired toward the game area win in the grand prize opening 2006 which is currently open. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. When a prize is not won in the grand prize opening 2006, a prize is entered in this general prize opening 2001. That is, it can be said that the general winning hole 2001 on the right side of the big winning hole 2005 wins only when the game ball hit right does not enter the open big winning hole 2006.

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the starting prize hole and the general prize hole when 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a (i.e., for the number of out balls of 100 balls). In order to show the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out (the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out), we fire game balls that have flowed into the gaming area but are unlikely to enter the starting slot or general prize opening (or have a high possibility of entering the grand prize opening). When counted as a number (number of out pitches), it is assumed that when calculated as a base value, it will deviate from the actual base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 2001 on the right side of the big winning hole 2005 is defined as a specific general winning hole, and the number of balls that entered the specific general winning hole during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. Calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning hole is as follows.
・Figures 70 and 40: Calculate the base value every time for each timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 71 and 72: Calculate the base value for each number of prescribed award pitches and for each number of out pitches The base value is calculated for each number of prescribed award pitches Although explanations of the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out pitches will be omitted, they can be realized by combining FIGS. 70 to 72.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. Obtain the number of pitches and the number of specific winning pitches. Note that in FIG. 70, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than those in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated. Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls into a specific general winning hole (specific winning ball number) is acquired (step S820). Then, the value obtained by subtracting the number of specific winning pitches from the number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used to calculate the base value is updated every time an out ball or winning ball is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. Ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 71 records the number of prize pitches in the prize pitch number buffer and calculates the base value at the timing when the number of prize pitches and the number of out pitches satisfy a predetermined condition. Record the number in the out pitch count buffer. Note that in FIG. 71, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for notification of prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

Thereafter, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of out pitches is added to the out pitch number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether the winning hole corresponding to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning hole, and the number of winning balls into the specific general winning hole is obtained (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls into the specific general winning hole is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display process (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific winning pitch number recorded in the specific winning pitch number buffer. Note that in FIG. 72, the same steps as those in the base calculation/display processing described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process advances to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of out pitches (step S893), and the out pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the sum of the number of pitches passing through the out opening stored in the number of out pitches buffer and the number of winning pitches stored in the number of winning pitches buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895 ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out pitches is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total number of out pitches, and the process advances to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out pitches is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the award pitch number buffer value is added to the total number of award pitches (step S897), and the award pitch number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific number of winning pitches is subtracted from the total number of out pitches and a threshold Th2 is added (step S899), the winning pitch number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out pitch number buffer (step S900).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award pitches by the total number of out pitches (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out pitches is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it is not necessary to store it in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). An abnormality in the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to players and hall employees. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process ends.

In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches are not updated. In other words, if the total number of award pitches and total number of out pitches are not updated, the same value will be calculated as the base value, the base value will maintain the same value, and if the total number of award pitches or total number of out pitches is updated, The base value is updated to a different value. Note that the base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of awarded pitches and the total number of out pitches is updated, or the base value may be calculated at the timing when both are updated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated by excluding game balls that have entered the game area but are unlikely to enter the starting hole or the general winning hole, so there is no deviation from the actual base value. A small number of base values can be calculated accurately.

In addition, although the case has been described in which there is a general winning hole 2001 downstream of the big winning hole 2006 in a pachinko machine where you hit right during a jackpot, the invention according to this embodiment aims at the big winning hole 2005 with a normal hit during a jackpot. The present invention can be applied to pachinko machines as well as gaming machines in which a starting opening or a general winning opening is provided downstream of the big winning opening 2005.

Further, in the gaming area 5a, there are provided jackpots 2005 and 2006 which do not normally accept gaming balls, but can accept gaming balls depending on the jackpot lottery results. Prize balls that are won into the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball enters the starting prize opening 2002, 2004, the special symbol fluctuation display game starts, and from the time the special symbol is determined until the opening of the major prize opening 2005, 2006 (jackpot opening), the game starts winning the big prize. The period from when the mouths 2005 and 2006 are closed until the start of the next special symbol variation display game (jackpot ending) is regarded as a special prize, and detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In this way, the number of prized balls and the number of out pitches during the special prize can be counted without determining whether the special prize is being won in step S810 in FIG. 39 or the like. In addition, when the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed due to one jackpot, the time from the closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 to the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. That is, during the special prize, it means that the conditional device is in operation, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Further, it may include all the time during which the right-handed batting instruction is being given. Furthermore, in the starting prize openings 2002 and 2004, special prizes may include time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support, a predetermined period of time after the opening of the starting winning hole 2004 and closing (for example, the ball that entered the starting winning hole is detected as an out ball) The period up to the few seconds necessary for

Further, a second starting port 2004 is arranged in the gaming area 5a, which normally does not accept game balls, but can accept game balls depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol. The prize ball that is won into the second starting hole 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate part 2003, a normal symbol is drawn, the normal symbol fluctuation display game starts, and from the time when the normal symbol is determined until the opening (opening), the second starting port 2004 The period from when the game closes until the start of the next normal symbol variation display game (ending) is considered to be a special prize, and detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In addition, when the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time from the closing of the second starting port 2004 to the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. In this way, not only the time saving period but also all winnings to the second starting opening 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value.

By doing as described above, it is possible to accurately count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than special prizes (jackpot, time saving, etc.) without determining whether a special prize is being won in step S810 of FIG. 39 or the like.

In this way, the base value can be accurately calculated by accurately excluding the number of out pitches and the number of winning pitches while the player is batting right-handed.

Furthermore, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game with the left hand when there is no jackpot or time saving (so-called normal state), and to play the game with the right hand when there is a jackpot or time saving. Such a gaming machine is provided with a general winning hole 2001 and a first starting hole 2002 that win when playing left-handed, and a general winning hole 2001 and a second starting hole 2004 that win when playing right-handed. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning openings from the left side to the center of the gaming area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting the left) and the right side of the gaming area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting the right) The rate of balls entering each winning hole differs depending on the placement and position of the nails. In other words, the base value when hitting left-handed and the base value when hitting right-handed are different.

The base value of a pachinko machine is set assuming that a player plays left-handed in a normal state. However, as mentioned above, if the base value is different when hitting left-handed and right-handed (for example, the base value when hitting right-handed in normal conditions is designed to be lower than when hitting left-handed). , if the player hits right in the normal state, a low base value is calculated.

The hall assumes that a pachinko machine with a low base value is abnormal and inspects it, or determines that the machine has poor ball payout performance. Even in pachinko machines where the ball payout performance is determined to be poor (lower than the expected base), the hole determines that the player is hitting the player left-handed, so the starting prize opening that acts on the base when hitting left-handed. Adjustments will be made to increase the entry rate of the general winning slot. Then, adjust the nails with abnormalities to increase the base value. If you hit left-handed with a game machine adjusted in this way, you can get a lot of prize balls even under normal conditions. In other words, you can receive many lottery tickets for a small amount of money. In other words, even if the base when hitting left-handed is not different from what the hole expected, Hall misunderstands and makes adjustments to increase the probability of the ball entering the winning opening or general winning opening when hitting left-handed. Since there is a possibility that the hole may be disadvantageous due to such malice of the player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value when the player is hitting left-handed and the base value when hitting right-handed.

By the way, in a pachinko machine that allows you to play right-handed while saving time, the second starting port 2004 that opens and closes depending on the gaming state, and the gate part 2003 that performs the normal symbol lottery to open the second starting port 2004, It is placed in the area where the game balls roll. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 by hitting right in the normal state, even if the normal symbol lottery is performed, the probability of winning the common symbol is extremely low so that the second starting port 2004 does not open, or the normal symbol is drawn. Even if a symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting hole 2004 is shortened to make it difficult to win a prize through the second starting hole 2004 under normal conditions.

Here, in order to increase the base value when the ball is hit right in the normal state, the rate of ball entry into the second starting port 2004 must be increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the rate of ball entry into the second starting port 2004 will reduce the profit of the hole. Therefore, when counting the game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 in the normal state and calculating the base value, it is preferable to calculate a corrected base value using the number of balls that have passed through the gate section 2003.

Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls hit toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. By reducing the number of out pitches, a higher calculated base value can be obtained. For example, if a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate section 2003, an extremely high base value will be calculated. Note that the degree of correction processing may be determined as appropriate based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the passage of the gate section 2003 is monitored, and when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 (such as when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls pass through the gate section 2003 without entering the starting gate), (conditions may be added), it is not necessary to use the number of out pitches counted in a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots after (or before and after) passing through the gate section 2003 for calculating the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate section 2003 is detected, a display or sound such as "Please return to left-handed batting" may be output without actively notifying the player that it will not be reflected in the calculation result of the base value. Furthermore, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the hole may be notified that the ball is being hit to the right. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or a message indicating that the player is playing right-handed may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall.

As explained above, by excluding the number of balls that pass through the gate section 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right-handed) from the number of out balls, it is possible to increase the number of balls that hit right-handed in the normal state. The base value of time can be corrected to a larger value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent variations in the calculated base value due to the player's gaming style.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
Considering the role of the base value to confirm the operating status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be retained for a long period of time. Further, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. Therefore, the base calculation/display data 13136 is erased under conditions different from the erase conditions for the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. This allows accurate data on the number of prize balls to be maintained and accurate calculation of the ratio of bonus balls.

Specifically, the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation) does not erase the base calculation/display data 13136, but cuts off the backup power supply supplied to the main control MPU 1311 and turns off the power supply of the pachinko machine 1. By the second operation of shutting down, all data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased. The second operation may be performed by installing a single switch to realize this operation, or by having an employee of the game parlor remove the connector of the backup power line that is supplied to the main control board 1310 to connect the pachinko machine to the The power may be cut off.

In other words, two operations are prepared to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. The first operation erases only the data related to the progress of the game, but the second operation erases the calculated base value. Erase all data, including data related to game progress.

With this configuration, the base calculation/display data 13136 will not be erased due to an erroneous operation by a game hall attendant, increasing the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio and preventing concealment of a high accessory ratio. .

[9-10. Base calculation taking into account winning abnormalities]
FIGS. 73 and 74 are flowcharts of base calculation area update processing that takes into account winning abnormalities.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, a winning abnormality may be detected. For example, when a winning is detected other than when the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to a jackpot being derived in a special symbol fluctuation display game, or when a winning opening is detected as a result of a winning being derived in a normal symbol fluctuation display game. If a winning is detected while 2004 is not open, it is a winning abnormality. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and mainly occurs when a large number of prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, a winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a winning in a state where winning is impossible or a case where a large number of winnings are detected in a predetermined time.

Since the winning ball due to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to correct this amount and accurately calculate the base. For this reason, in the base calculation area update process that takes the winning abnormality into account, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

Normally, prizes are entered into the grand prize openings 2005, 2006 and the starting prize opening 2004 only during special prizes, so winning balls into these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base. There is no need to consider winning abnormalities.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, similar to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. The total number of awarded pitches is directly updated using the number of award pitches calculated in step S814, and the total number of out pitches is directly updated using the number of out pitches (step S822). Note that in FIG. 73, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded.

If the game state is in special prize, the base calculation area update process is ended without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls, since the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already-transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and may be the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of the payout. This variation has already been explained using FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). Note that it is possible to determine whether there are any prize balls and, if there are no prize balls, to skip the process of updating the total number of prize balls. In addition, even if a game ball enters the starting winning hole 2002 or 2004, the hold is at the upper limit, and the winning ball will be paid out even if the winning into the starting winning hole is not held, so the total number of winning balls will be updated. Ru. In addition, in a gaming state where a prize ball does not occur even if a game ball enters the winning slot (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning will not occur and the number of prize balls to be obtained will be reduced. Since it is 0, the total number of awarded pitches is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

After that, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818). Then, it is determined whether a winning abnormality has been detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827). Specifically, as mentioned above, when a winning is detected in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 other than during the special winning (conditional device is in operation) that occurs due to a jackpot being derived in the special symbol fluctuation display game, If a win is detected in the starting winning hole 2004 even though it is not open due to a win being derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined that there is a winning abnormality.

A winning abnormality may be determined when one winning ball that has a winning abnormality is detected, or a winning abnormality may be determined when a predetermined number of winning balls that have a winning abnormality are detected. Furthermore, if a predetermined number of winning balls with a winning abnormality are detected consecutively, it may be determined that a winning abnormality has occurred, or if a predetermined number of winning balls with a winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined that a winning abnormality has occurred. You may.

Then, the total number of out pitches is updated so that the acquired number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the fired ball sensor 1020, the ejected ball sensor 3060, etc., and is obtained by reading the detection signals of these sensors in the switch input process of step S74. At this time, the value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls related to winning abnormality from the number of out pitches obtained may be added to the total number of out pitches, or after adding the number of acquired out pitches to the total number of out pitches, The number of winning pitches due to an abnormality may be subtracted from the total number of out pitches. The total number of out pitches is recorded in the total number of out pitches storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out pitches used for calculating the base value is updated every time an out pitch is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process to update the total number of out pitches, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (Figure 40), so the base value can be displayed without delay. It is possible to determine whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 74) described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may also execute the base value calculation process. In this case, a command for notifying the base may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for notifying the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511. may be sent.

In addition, in one timer interrupt processing, even if information on both balls entered into the winning slot and out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the example described later). The number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches (or the number of out pitches buffer in the embodiment described later). In addition, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winnings from multiple winning slots is acquired, the total number of prize balls resulting from multiple winnings is stored in the total prize ball number (or in the example described later, in the prize ball number buffer). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 5 prize balls and the winning hole sensor of a winning hole with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls will be sent to the total prize ball number. (or the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when the firing of game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning balls detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the fired ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer). It also detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680, and detects the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 is operating (furthermore, when the launch control unit 953 or the ball launch device 680 stops operating). Only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of winning balls or the number of winning balls buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the player is operating the firing handle. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when a hand or finger is detected to be touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is calculated as the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the award ball count buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality in detecting a prize ball before the game ball has been shot or fraudulent activity, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate base value from being displayed. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, there is no need to newly provide a sensor for detecting the firing of game balls, so an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the number of out pitches is recorded in the out pitch number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out pitches satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). Note that in FIG. 74, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update process described above are given the same step numbers, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize balls is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If the result of the determination in step S812 is that there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). . That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, each time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

After that, the number of out pitches is obtained (step S818). The acquired number of out pitches is added to the number of out pitches buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether a winning abnormality has been detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is obtained (step S827).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out balls are corrected by the number of all winning balls related to the winning abnormality, but the out balls are corrected for the winning balls related to a specific type of winning abnormality, and the out balls are corrected by the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality. There is no need to correct out balls for winning balls that have a specific type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of winning ball involved in the winning abnormality, the winning ball may or may not be paid out for the winning ball. It is preferable that whether or not to pay out prize balls in response to this winning abnormality is determined for each winning hole. In this case, for winning abnormalities in which no prize balls are paid out, the winning balls should not be counted as the total out balls and should not be used in calculating the base value. On the other hand, regarding the winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, it is preferable to count the winning balls as the total number of out balls, and also count the prize balls that are paid out as the total number of prize balls, and use these to calculate the base value. Note that even in the case of a winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, the winning balls are not counted as the total number of out balls, the prize balls that are paid out are not counted as the total number of prize balls, and they do not need to be used in calculating the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance on a malfunctioning gaming machine (such as clearing jammed balls), a hall employee may manually put a gaming ball into the starting prize slot and compensate the player for the ball being released so that the player does not lose money. In this case, prize balls will be paid out in response to winnings in the starting winning hole. A winning into this starting winning hole is detected as a winning abnormality, but the winning ball is paid out. When a prize ball is paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, so it is better not to determine it as a winning abnormality. In this case, the prize balls are paid out in the winning openings (starting winning openings 2002, 2004) that are reflected in the calculation of the base value, the winning abnormality is not determined, and the winning balls are paid out in the other winning openings (big winning openings 2005, 2006). It is better to determine whether there is a winning abnormality without paying out the winnings. A winning hole that determines a winning abnormality is one that pays out fewer prize balls due to winning than a winning hole that does not determine a winning abnormality (3 winning balls for the starting winning hole and 15 winning balls for the main winning hole). . For this reason, although abnormal winnings are determined in the large winning opening, even if abnormal winnings are not determined in the starting winning opening, it does not become a major security hole from the viewpoint of protection against fraudulent activities. In this manner, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent mismatch between the number of out balls and the number of winning balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls using the number of winning balls related to winning abnormalities that do not generate prize balls, it is possible to match the number of winning balls with the out balls that cause the winning balls.

As mentioned above, winning abnormalities can be determined in various winning holes, but a specific example of implementation in a pachinko machine will be described.

First, a winning abnormality may not be determined in the general winning hole 2001, but a winning abnormality may be determined in a winning hole other than the general winning hole 2001 (big winning hole 2005, 2006, starting winning hole 2002, 2004). Since it is difficult to win a prize with multiple game balls at the same time, general winning holes are electrically operated accessories that open and close, such as the grand winning hole 2005, 2006 and the starting winning hole 2002, while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent activities. The player can be compensated for the ball going out by entering the ball into the general winning holes 2001 (total of 4), which are provided in a larger number (total of 3). In addition, since the general winning hole 2001 can be easily identified by a hall employee, it is easy to operate the pachinko machine 1 for maintenance and ball compensation. The reason why hall employees can easily identify the general winning openings 2001 is that the general winning openings 2001 are often arranged together (in separate areas) in the gaming area, and that electric accessories (grand winning openings) 2005, 2006, starting prize openings 2002, 2004) and the decorative members (appearance) are different. Furthermore, when the number of prize balls for each winning ball in the general winning hole is small, there is an effect of improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent activities. Note that winning abnormality may not be determined only with a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), but winning abnormality may be determined with other general winning openings.

In addition, winning abnormality is not determined in the large winning holes 2005 and 2006 with a large number of prize balls, and in the winning holes other than the large winning holes 2005 and 2006 (general winning hole 2001 with a small number of prize balls, starting winning hole 2002, 2004). A winning abnormality may be determined. Since the large prize opening has a large number of prize balls per winning ball, the base value changes greatly even with a small number of winning balls. Therefore, it is convenient because changes in the base value can be easily inspected when inspecting a pachinko machine. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only in a specific big winning hole (for example, the big winning hole 2005 in which it is easy to insert a game ball by hand), but in other big winning holes (for example, 2006). .

Moreover, winning abnormalities may not be determined in the starting winning holes 2002 and 2004, but winning abnormalities may be determined in winning holes other than the starting winning holes 2002 and 2004 (general winning holes 2001, big winning holes 2005 and 2006). Since the number of prize balls for each winning ball in the starting winning hole is smaller than that in the big winning hole, it is possible to compensate the player for the ball being played while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against goths. In addition, a winning abnormality is not determined only with a specific starting winning hole (for example, the starting winning hole 2002 provided in the center of the game board is easy to find), but a winning abnormality is determined with other starting winning holes 2004. Good too.

Furthermore, in the case of a big winning opening or a starting winning opening, the opening/closing member of the opening/closing opening is located in a position that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening/closing member of the opening/closing opening can be easily operated by the pachinko machine. Instead, a winning abnormality may be determined for a winning opening where the opening/closing member of the winning opening is located in a position that cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening/closing member is difficult for a hall employee to operate. For example, a winning opening (so-called electric tulip) in which the opening/closing member, which is vertically located in the closed state, is tilted to an oblique position so that the opening/closing member picks up game balls (so-called electric tulip) can be easily operated by a hall employee. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning hole is blocked by a flat plate-like member, and when the flat plate-like member is retracted, the entrance to the winning hole opens. is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only for the winning hole used to compensate players for hitting the ball, so it is easy for hall employees to understand and the security resistance of the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method for notifying an abnormality in prize winning may be the same as the method for notifying an abnormality in the number of winning balls (for example, outputting a security signal to an external terminal board, displaying a warning on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, or displaying a warning on a game board or frame). It is preferable that the notification of prize winning abnormalities be made more relaxed than the notification of other abnormalities (such as lighting or flashing of decorative lamps, output of audio, sound effects, warning sounds, etc.). Specifically, the abnormality notification time is short, the abnormality notification characters are small, the lamp does not light up when an abnormality is notified, and the abnormality notification sound is lowered (suppressed) than the volume of the notification sound during other abnormalities. ).

In addition, in the notification of a winning abnormality, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after the winning abnormality is detected, and even if a winning abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the predetermined time will not be extended and the notification will be continued for the first time. It is preferable to end the notification after a predetermined time or change the mode of notification. In this way, if the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is performing maintenance on the gaming machine rather than a fraudulent act by the player. Therefore, by notifying the winning abnormality for a predetermined period of time and not continuing the notification after that, it is possible to improve the work efficiency without interfering with the maintenance work of the gaming machine by the hall. Furthermore, by changing the mode of notification after a predetermined period of time, it can be seen that the maintenance work of the game machine is not disturbed and the work continues to be performed correctly. Specifically, although the display device and lamp continue to provide notification, it is preferable to stop the audio notification (or reduce the volume).

In summary, the gaming machine of this embodiment has a correction means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correction means divides a plurality of winning holes into a plurality of types (starting winning hole, big winning hole). For winning holes of the first type, the number of out balls is corrected based on winning balls detected while the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (during special prize), and for winning holes of the second type, the number of out balls is corrected based on The number of out pitches will not be corrected based on the winning balls detected while the above conditions are not met (during the special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent deviations in the number of out pitches when compensating the player due to maintenance of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately calculate the number of out pitches. Furthermore, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the base value can be adjusted as maintenance. This allows accurate base values to be calculated and displayed.

Up to this point, we have explained the detection of a winning abnormality and the exceptional handling of the detection of a winning abnormality (when it is not detected). Since there is a high possibility that the ball will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is preferable that winning balls determined to have a winning abnormality not be reflected in the number of out balls and not used for calculating the base value.

Further, winning abnormalities detected in the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the fraud detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, a winning abnormality display command is created with the winning abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). This winning abnormality notification may be performed when one winning ball affected by a winning abnormality is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of winning balls affected by a winning abnormality are detected. In addition, a winning abnormality may be notified when a predetermined number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality are detected in a row, or when a predetermined number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time. You may also make a notification.

Further, the notification of winning abnormality may be terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be terminated when the winning opening is opened next (conditional device is activated).

Note that it is not necessary to notify the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base value calculation process that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division process for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processes, rather than when the CPU 13111 executes the division using a program. The base calculation processing described so far does not take advantage of this characteristic.

That is, in connection with the calculation of the base value, in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23), the detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the ejected ball sensor 1020 are read in the switch input processing (step S74), and the number of out balls is calculated. is counted, and in the prize ball control process (step S80), the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated. Thereafter, in base calculation area update processing (step S98), the number of prize pitches and the number of out pitches in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

After that, in base calculation/display processing (step S89), a base value is calculated by referring to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals, but the predetermined processing must be completed for each timer interrupt. Therefore, in slow division processing by a program, time-consuming processing must be included in the timer interrupt processing. That is, it is difficult to include multiple base calculation processes in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required to calculate the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

Further, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing from writing values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 until reading the operation result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the dividend and divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively utilized, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the dividend and divisor and the output timing of the quotient are different, the degree of freedom in the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) except for the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98), so a description of the same process will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, the number of out balls is determined by reading the detection signal from the sensor that detects winning balls, the detection signal from the switch that detects cheating, the detection signal from the ejected ball sensor 3060, and the ejected ball sensor 1020. Count.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 1 (step S97). In base calculation process 1, the total number of out pitches is updated using the number of out pitches counted in step S74, and a base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later using FIGS. 76 and 78.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer update process (step S76) and a random number update process 1 (step S78).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Furthermore, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 2 (step S98). In base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and a base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later using FIGS. 77 and 79.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing. Control processing (step S88) is executed. Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value to the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches. The number of out pitches is updated (step S9705). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

Thereafter, similarly to step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710) to notify players and hall employees of the base (base value or abnormality in the base value). The base notification command is a display command for the peripheral control unit 1511 when the base value is notified by the display device (liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244) or speaker 921 controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. and sound output commands. In addition, when making a notification using the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs or LED lamps, the base notification command is sent to the LED element. This is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by a driver, the base notification command is a drive signal that includes a character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver). Further, when the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the gaming state is in the special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). Note that if the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9812). Note that when the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not need to be calculated. Further, if the total number of awarded pitches is greater than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not need to be calculated. Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and is used as a base value (step S9813).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed every time the timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that base calculation processing 1 and base calculation processing 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt processing, but may be executed for each predetermined time (for example, one minute, which is a longer cycle than the timer interrupt processing). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the amount of calculation required to calculate the base value (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced compared to the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be explained using FIGS. 78 to 79. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out pitches and for each predetermined number of prize pitches.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the number of out pitches detected is added to the out pitch count buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9703). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out pitches is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the buffer value for the number of out pitches may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out pitches (specifically, the storage area for the number of out pitches may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

Then, if the out pitch count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, if the out pitch count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total out pitch count is updated so that the out pitch count buffer value is added to the total out pitch count (step S9705), and the out pitch count buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9706).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the prize ball count is added to the prize ball number buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and hall employees that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 in FIG. 46 may be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls is, for example, when a large number of prize balls are received in a predetermined time period other than during special prizes (e.g., considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the starting prize opening, this corresponds to 10 or more winning balls per minute). This is the case when a ball (prize ball) is obtained. Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the number of prize balls from the reference value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the buffer value for the number of prize balls may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of prize balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of prize balls may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value.

On the other hand, if the award pitch buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total award pitch count is updated so that the award pitch buffer value is added to the total award pitch count (step S9809), and the award pitch buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9810).

In addition, each time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, or when the number of prize balls, which will be described later, exceeds a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217. It is stored (step S9812). Then, after a predetermined period of time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prized pitches divided by total number of out pitches) is read from the division result register A131218 and is used as a base value (step S9813).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S9807 has timed out (step S9815). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S9816). Note that in step S9815, the end of the notification was determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined period of time, but the end of the notification was determined so that the prize ball abnormality would be notified for a predetermined number of fired balls. You can. Alternatively, the abnormality may continue to be reported until the hall employee confirms it.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the timer interrupt processing described above (FIGS. 23 and 75) except for the base calculation processing (steps S93 and S94) and the base display processing (step S95), so the same processing will be explained. is omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, the number of out balls is counted by reading detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the ejected ball sensor 1020.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 3 (step S93). In base calculation processing 3, the total number of out pitches is updated using the number of out pitches counted in step S74, and parameters for calculating the base value are written into the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later using FIGS. 81 and 84.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer update process (step S76) and a random number update process 1 (step S78).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Furthermore, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls counted in step S80, and parameters for calculating the base value are written into the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later using FIGS. 82 and 85.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing. Control processing (step S88) is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base display process that reads out the command from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and generates a command for notifying the base (step S95).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value to the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to be cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 3 (step S93). Base calculation processing 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing steps after step S9709 from base calculation processing 1 shown in FIG. 76.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches. The number of out pitches is updated (step S9705). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 3 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 4 (step S94). Base calculation processing 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing steps after step S9813 from base calculation processing 2 shown in FIG. 77.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). Note that if the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be ended immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of awarded pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

Note that in step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. The total number of out pitches may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of base display processing (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of awarded pitches/total number of out pitches) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display processing shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed for each predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) during the timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described using FIGS. 84 and 85. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out pitches and for each predetermined number of prize pitches.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). Base calculation processing 3 shown in FIG. 84 is obtained by removing steps after step S9709 from base calculation processing 1 shown in FIG. 78.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is a special prize, the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base, since the ball is out, which is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out pitches detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the number of out pitches detected is added to the out pitch count buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9703). Note that if the number of out pitches cannot be obtained or the number of out pitches obtained is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. In this way, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of out pitches stored in the out pitch number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out pitches is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the buffer value for the number of out pitches may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out pitches (specifically, the storage area for the number of out pitches may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

Then, if the out pitch count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 is ended.

On the other hand, if the out pitch count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total out pitch count is updated so that the out pitch count buffer value is added to the total out pitch count (step S9705), and the out pitch count buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9706).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the total number of out pitches is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). Base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing steps after step S9813 from base calculation process 2 shown in FIG. 79.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as explained with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether a special prize is being awarded. If the gaming state is a special prize, the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process advances to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer. The pitch count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and hall employees that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 in FIG. 46 may be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls is, for example, when a large number of prize balls are won in a predetermined time period other than during special prizes (for example, 10 or more prize balls are won per minute, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the starting prize opening). For example, if the Note that the degree of abnormality may be determined in multiple stages based on the degree of deviation of the number of prize balls from the reference value by providing a plurality of tolerance ranges.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the buffer value for the number of prize balls may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of prize balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of prize balls may be determined using 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out pitches is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value.

On the other hand, if the award pitch buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total award pitch count is updated so that the award pitch buffer value is added to the total award pitch count (step S9809), and the award pitch buffer is set to 0. settings (step S9810).

In addition, each time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, or when the number of prize balls, which will be described later, exceeds a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out pitches is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out pitches is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of awarded pitches by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

Note that in step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out pitches is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. The total number of out pitches may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of awarded pitches/total number of out pitches) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S9807 of base calculation process 4 has timed out (step S8903). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S8904). Note that in step S8903, the end of the notification was determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined period of time, but the end of the notification was determined so that the prize ball abnormality would be notified for a predetermined number of fired balls. Good too. Alternatively, the abnormality may continue to be reported until the hall employee confirms it.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, the arithmetic circuit The input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 are written at the timing when the division result can be read from the arithmetic circuit 13121. Specifically, the timing of writing the input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is in the first half of the timer interrupt processing, before the random number update processing (step S78), or before the special symbol or normal symbol. Preferably before the control processing (steps S86 and S88).

Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute the process of calculating the base value based on the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole, it may be switched whether the number of prize balls or the number of out balls is used for calculating the base value. For example, the prize ball of the winning hole that gives the maximum prize ball to one winning ball does not need to be used for calculating the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one winning ball) to be awarded when a game medium determined for each winning hole provided in the gaming area wins is 1, 3, If there are three types, 5 and 5, the maximum number of five prize balls and the corresponding number of out pitches need not be used in calculating the base value. This is because if a winning ball with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the change in the calculated base value will be large, and the lower digits of the calculated base value will be rounded by processing means (rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc.). ), the displayed value may change frequently. In such a case, it becomes difficult for the hole to determine whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether the pachinko machine is achieving the set ball payout rate).

Furthermore, it is not necessary to use the minimum number of one award pitch and the corresponding number of out pitches for calculating the base value. This is because the change in the base value due to winning with a small number of prize balls is small, so even if the single prize ball is not used for calculating the base value, the lower digits of the base value calculated by the processing method are rounded. This is because the displayed base value may not change if it is displayed (rounded off, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), so processing that does not contribute to changes in display may be omitted.

Moreover, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the minimum is explained, the number of prize balls with an intermediate value between the maximum and the minimum number does not have to be used for calculating the base value. In this case, the maximum and minimum number of prize balls are used to calculate the base value, so by averaging the maximum and minimum numbers, the number of prize balls and number of out balls that represent the operation of the entire pachinko machine is shown, and the appropriate Base value can be indicated.

Although the explanation has been given using three types of prize ball number patterns, the present invention is not limited to three types, and other types of prize ball number patterns such as five types or seven types may be used.

Furthermore, if a particular type of winning ball (such as the minimum value of 1 ball, intermediate value of 3 balls, maximum value of 5 balls, etc.) is not used to calculate the base value, the winning ball will be All winnings in the gaming state at the time of detection do not need to be used for calculating the base value. For example, if a win to a winning slot that awards 5 prize balls is not used for calculating the base value, in a gaming state where a winning to the winning slot is detected, the winning slot will not be used until the end of the gaming state. Winnings in the winning slot or other winning openings are not used to calculate the base value. Further, even after the start of the gaming state, winnings in the winning hole and other winning holes are not retroactively used in calculating the base value.

In addition, if the gaming state when the winning is detected occurs again, the winning does not need to be used for calculating the base value, and the gaming state when the winning is detected will transition to another gaming state. It is not necessary to use the winnings up to this point in calculating the base value. By not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the game state where the calculated base value has a large change in the calculation of the base value, it is possible to check whether the pachinko machine is normal (for example, whether the ball output rate is as per the set ball output rate). This is to eliminate the possibility that the decision will be delayed.

Note that when the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state, the prize ball that is the maximum (or minimum, or intermediate) for one winning ball does not need to be used for calculating the base value.

Next, a specific process will be described in which the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are not used in calculating the base value based on the number of game media (prize balls) described above.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning hole sensor is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether the winning is to be used for calculating the base value. . For winnings that are determined not to be used for calculating the base value, the total number of awarded pitches and total number of out pitches for calculating the base value are not updated, or the base value calculation process is not executed. do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0, and the number of winning balls is excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation is performed. In process 2 (step S98), it is preferable to set the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value to 0 and not add it to the total number of prize balls. Further, if all the detected winnings are not used for calculating the base value, it is not necessary to execute base calculation process 1 (step S97) and base calculation process 2 (step S98) in FIG. 75.

In addition, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from base value calculation is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and base calculation process 4 (step S94) In this case, it is preferable to set the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value to 0 and not add it to the total number of prize balls. In addition, if all detected winnings are not used to calculate the base value, the base calculation process 3 (step S93), base calculation process 4 (step S94), and base display process (step S95) in FIG. 80 are not executed. You can.

A method similar to the method for correcting out balls due to abnormal winnings described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74 may be adopted as a method for excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used for calculating the base value from the number of out balls.

In this case, since it is determined from the number of winning pitches whether the detected winnings are to be used for calculating the base value, base calculation processing 1 (step S97), base calculation processing 2 (step S98), and base calculation processing 3 ( In step S93) and base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether there is a special prize.

In this way, by excluding the number of out pitches and the number of winning pitches required for a given prize winning from the calculation of the base value, the process is executed without skipping, making it easy to check whether the process is being executed accurately, especially at the development stage. can be confirmed. In addition, by not updating the base value without executing the process of calculating the base value, the processing of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processes (such as lottery processing and processing for determining fluctuation patterns) can be executed accurately. can.

In other words, even if there are multiple awards with different degrees of advantage, even if the largest award is awarded to the player, it will not be used for calculating the base value, and the base value will be displayed without changing due to the awarding of the award. Ru. Further, the calculated base value is displayed unchanged until at least the gaming state in which the maximum prize was awarded ends.

[9-12. Another configuration of the gaming machine that displays the base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 4. Note that either one of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

As described above, the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 that detects the game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided at the lower part of the gaming area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and then to the main control MPU 1311, as will be described later with reference to FIG. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the starting port sensors 2104, 2551, and the number of game balls detected by the various winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557. The total number of out pitches is the number of out pitches.

As described above, the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port that discharges the game balls flowing out of the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

When both the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B are provided, the counting results of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the counting result of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B are compared, and the two counting results are obtained. An error may be notified if a difference of more than a predetermined value occurs. Furthermore, an error may be notified if two counting results within a predetermined period of time differ by a predetermined amount or more.

Note that in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an essential component, and the display contents of the base display 1317 (temporary section display and confirmed section display) are switched at predetermined time intervals as described later. (see FIG. 99), the base value may be displayed or the display contents may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

The configuration other than those described above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 17.

FIGS. 88 and 89 are diagrams showing the arrangement of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls are arranged in one line in a ball channel 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board, and the out balls are counted by one frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B. . The game balls rolling in the game area 5a flow into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, and the big winning ports 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that causes the ejected game balls to flow down to the right side when viewed from the front and to be arranged in one line. The frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls aligned in one line.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls aligned in a ball channel 960 provided on the back side of the game board are caused to flow down in two lines and counted by a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060. The game balls rolling in the game area 5a flow into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, the starting winning ports 2002, 2004, and the big winning ports 2005, 2006. . The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that allows the ejected game balls to flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and to be arranged in two strips. Each of the two frame-side ejected ball sensors 3060B counts the game balls aligned in each strip.

Although the frame-side ejection bulb sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. 53, 88, and 89, it may be formed into a unit together with the bulb flow path 960 and configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4. Further, the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of the connection between the discharge bulb sensor and the main control board.

The output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected to a connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via a relay board, and the output signal of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected to a connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected is provided on the main control board 1310. It is recommended that it be installed below the .

A connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and a connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected are provided separately, but as shown by the broken line, the board-side discharge ball sensor The output line of 3060A and the output line of frame-side ejection bulb sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

Note that the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without going through the relay board. The output line of the frame-side discharged bulb sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or relay board, connect it to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. You may.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311, as will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and particularly shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided on the game board 5.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects illegal magnetism within the gaming area 5a, and is located near the sensor that detects winnings in various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (positions marked with stars in the figure). established in The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5, and the detection range is partially overlapped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided near the outlet 1111. This is to prevent incorrect base value calculation. That is, when the player brings a magnet close to the out port 1111 and operates the ejected ball sensor 3060, the number of out balls is counted higher than the actual number, and the base value decreases. For this reason, the game parlor may perform maintenance work on the pachinko machine 1 to return the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine that has undergone maintenance work based on a base value that is different from the actual value, the number of balls in the normal state will increase, allowing the player to play the game in a more advantageous state than usual and obtain more balls in the game. A magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent such fraudulent payout of balls. Note that the magnetic detection sensor 1030 may be provided in locations other than the vicinity of the out port 1111 where the ejected ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

As illustrated, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the outlet 1111 preferably has a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when detecting an out ball with a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060, magnetism is detected in a sufficient range that can cover the plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060. Further, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 may include other winning ports (for example, the large winning port 2005 provided above the out port 1111).

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the configuration of main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes an ejection ball sensor 3060 and winning hole sensors (general winning hole sensor 3015, first starting hole sensor 2104, second starting hole sensor 2551, first big winning hole sensor 2114, second big winning hole sensor sensor 2554, second lower large prize opening sensor 2557, etc.), and the output signals of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are received and input to the main control MPU 1311.

Main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 converts the level of signals input from various sensors, shapes them (for example, removes chattering), and outputs the signals. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at a timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311.

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, and the signal that has been level-converted and shaped by the interface circuit 1331 is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, and is sent to the buffer. It is input to any one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. Thereby, the detection results from each sensor are taken into the main control MPU 1311.

Interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the inputs of the A1 to A8 terminals, and detects whether the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 4 V) or at a predetermined threshold (for example, the power supply voltage - 0.1V), it detects a break in the connection wire to the switch or a short circuit in the switch, and if the input to any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold, an abnormality signal E is generated. At the same time, signals at a level at which each sensor is OFF are output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and outputs an abnormality signal E when the power supply voltage becomes a level lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 12V-20%) and detects an abnormality in the power supply. At the same time, signals at a level at which each sensor is OFF are output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals. In other words, even if an ON level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit in response to the input becomes OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine the signal output from the sensor as valid (the output of the sensor is invalidated). This eliminates the need for the main control MPU 1311 to determine whether or not to process input signals depending on whether or not the power of the switch has decreased, reducing the processing load and reducing the output signals of Y1 to Y8. Regardless of the states of the input signals A1 to A8, it is possible to output a signal at a level that turns off each sensor.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, it does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). The interface circuit 1331 receives input signals from sensors used to calculate the base value (number of ejected balls, number of prized balls) and signals from sensors not used to calculate the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.). . The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in a sensor unrelated to the base calculation, the base calculation will not be executed and the display contents of the base display 1317 will be maintained and unchanged.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signals from the sensors used for calculating the base value and the signals from the sensors not used for calculating the base value, and if either signal becomes abnormal, Outputs an abnormal signal to stop base calculation.

93, FIG. 94, and FIG. 95 are diagrams showing examples of mounting the main control board 1310. 93(A) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93(B) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to one An example of connection to a driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317, and the main control board 1310. 95(A) is a front view of the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, FIG. 95(B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95(C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93(A) and 93(B), the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

In the example shown in FIG. 93(A), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Display data is then output from the different driver circuits 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIG. 93(B), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into one latch circuit 1333. Then, display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, a reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. It is preferable that the signal line for outputting display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 from the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so as not to intersect with the signal line for the reset signal or clock signal.

The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected, and is preferably provided above the main control board 1310. The connector 13101 is connected not only to the output line from the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A but also to the output line from other winning opening sensors 3015, 2104, etc., and the magnetic detection sensor 1030. The connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame-side ejected bulb sensor 3060B is connected, and is preferably provided on the lower side of the main control board 1310. Signals from the ejected bulb sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 are input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of components placed between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 on the main control board 1310. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the printed circuit board constituting the main control board 1310 from the back side, where the solid line is the pattern on the back side, the broken line is the pattern on the component side, and the dotted line is the component mounted on the component side of the printed circuit board. shows. Note that illustration of the ground pattern and power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333), and are connected to the cathode-side segment of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 2 (1334). Connected to the terminal.

In addition, a part of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 1 (1333), and are passed through the driver 1 (1334) to each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. Connected to the common terminal on the anode side of the

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a chip select signal that controls the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) is output at the timing when the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311 is input. Then, data for controlling the blinking of each segment is taken in from the data lines (D1 to D8). Furthermore, the latch circuit 1 (1333) takes in data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

A reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311 . The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333, and the latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data in response to the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines for the reset signal and clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines for the reset signal and clock signal.

This is because in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, so a pulse signal is transmitted in the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 and The level of the data line between the base display 1317 changes frequently. In particular, a large current necessary to drive the LED elements flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (especially between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) becomes a source of noise. If the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 intersects with the signal line for the reset signal or clock signal, noise will be added to the signal line for the reset signal or clock signal, causing the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction. there's a possibility that. This intersection of signal lines can also occur when the wiring patterns on the front and back sides of the printed circuit board intersect, or when the wiring patterns on the inner layer and the surface layer (front and back sides) intersect.

Specifically, by inputting a reset signal to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that should not normally occur, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset during the game, causing the game to stop or the gaming state to be erased. . In addition, if the gaming state is erased at a timing that should not occur in the first place, the normal power outage process will not be executed and will be reset, so the data stored in the RAM 1312 will be cleared and the jackpot will end or the variable display game will not start. The game may end midway, or the suspension of the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game may be deleted.

The main control board box 1320 has parts that are low in height and other parts that are high depending on the height of the parts attached to the main control board 1310 and interference with other parts when assembled. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, the height of the main control MPU 1311 is high, so the height of the main control board box 1320 is high at the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and the location where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area to the left of , the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and components such as relatively tall electrolytic capacitors are mounted thereon. On the other hand, in the area to the right of where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low, and short components such as ICs are mounted (tall components cannot be placed). Note that the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and areas where tall components can be mounted are indicated by hatching. In addition, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height that is equal to or less than the surface on which the mating connector is inserted and removed (preferably the same height as the board surface), and other It is best to ensure that there is no problem in inserting and removing the cable (connector) that connects to the board.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 in accordance with the height of the components mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress fraudulent attempts to attach unauthorized components (circuits) on the main control board. can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is placed at the upper right of the main control board 1310, but even if the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance reasons, the base display 1317 is placed in a position where it is difficult for the player to see the displayed content. It is preferable to arrange a display 1317. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance during business hours (to check whether there are game balls in the supply tank), if the player can see the display content on the base display 1317, the player Since players often do not correctly understand how to read the display on the base display 1317, players may request an explanation of the display content on the base display 1317. In addition, it is preferable to place the base display 1317 in a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed content. Further, by arranging the base display 1317 in this manner, inquiries from players can be suppressed. In other words, the base display 1317 displays the base value for a maximum of 52,000 out pitches, but this is different from the base value for a short game played by the player, so complaints about the ball exit rate may arise. There is. By arranging the base display 1317 in this manner, complaints from players can be suppressed. The above is the same for the accessory ratio display 1317 described above, and it is preferable to arrange the accessory ratio display 1317 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed content.

As illustrated, the base display (7 segment LED) 1317 is low in height, so it is mounted in a low height area of the main control board box 1320.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314, and shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, as shown in FIG. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are composed of light emitting diodes (LEDs), but they may be composed of lamps (bulbs) or other light emitting elements. The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. do.

As mentioned above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

The latch circuit 1333 takes in input data at the timing of a clock signal, holds it until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs it. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the input signals, and outputs the power supply voltage (+12V) that is input to the VCC terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 takes in the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK, and outputs it to the driver circuit 1334 from the Q1 to Q8 terminals, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the signals input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltages of the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. Outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LED forming the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

For example, in order to light up the 7-segment LED (7seg1) in the first digit of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) receives the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). Furthermore, the driving timing of the 7 segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (7seg1) in the first digit of base display 1317 becomes HIGH. Driven.

In addition, in order to light up the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) transfers the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 3 (1333) at the rising timing of CS2 to the segment data (low when lit). ). Further, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LEDs of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 are of the common anode type, current flows from driver 1 to driver 2 through the 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, the outputs of drivers 1 and 4 are VCC (+12V) when the segment is lit, and the outputs of drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

Note that latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus as is to the Q1 to Q8 terminals, but latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and are connected to the data bus. A signal may be output from any one of the terminals Q1 to Q8 according to the binary data obtained from the terminal.

Next, the output timing of signals when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 as shown in FIG. 93(A) and FIG. 96 will be described.

Segment data sent from driver 2 (1334) to base display 1317 and common data sent from driver 1 (1334) to base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt process. Furthermore, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt process. That is, since the common data and segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 via separate signal lines, both the display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 are Output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, common data for selecting the next digit (LED group) is output, and segment data for controlling lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

The display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 are generated in different processes within the timer interrupt process, and output at different timings in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the base display 1317 by executing the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the function display unit 1400 by executing the game control code 13131 in the game control area. These data will be generated by another program (code) and output at different timings.

Next, a modification of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

Segment data sent from driver 2 (1334) to base display 1317 and common data sent from driver 1 (1334) to base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt process. Similarly, the segment data sent from driver 3 (1334) to function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from driver 4 (1334) to function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317 may be executed at a different timing from the timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be executed subsequently.

The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to programs (game control code 13131, base calculation/display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but the same program is executed. In order to prevent common signals from being transmitted at different timings, control data that is common to the two codes may be used to control the common signal transmission timings so that they do not overlap. For example, a common counter that is commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 is provided, and for example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400, and the common counter is controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317 when the value is 4 to 7.

The process of outputting the common signal and the process of outputting the segment signal may be configured separately or in one subroutine. A game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting data sent to the function display unit 1400, and a base calculation/display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting the data sent to the base display 1317, respectively. It is preferable to call the subroutine at a timing determined by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317. In this case, the output of data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of data to be sent to the base display 1317 are not performed within the same timer interrupt process. Although the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 are executed in one timer interrupt process, the subroutines are called in different timer interrupt processes.

As shown in FIG. 93(A) and FIG. 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, the display (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310 Even if noise is mixed in from the main control board 1310, the influence on the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. 93(B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram of an example in which The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. do.

As mentioned above, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334. Since the configuration of the circuit included in the main control I/O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, differences from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be explained below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. Common.

In order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) converts the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 3 (1333) at the rising timing of CS2 as segment data (LOW when lit). Output. Further, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

In this way, by using a common driver circuit between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the circuit scale can be reduced. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate is reduced, the size of the board can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily downsized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (printed board with three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board that has patterns only on the front and back sides. For this reason, even if it is possible to physically arrange components on the main control board 1310, which is composed of a two-layer board, it is not possible to secure an area for routing wiring patterns, and the board is forced to be larger than a multi-layer board with three or more layers. Therefore, miniaturization by reducing the number of parts is important.

FIG. 98 is a timing diagram of the configuration example of the main control I/O port 1314 shown in FIG. 97. In FIG. 98, a dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates a break in timer interrupt processing (start timing of timer interrupt processing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. Latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 takes in D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and driver 1 (1334) takes in common data (during driving) corresponding to the digit specified by D1 to D4. outputs HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit in the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. Latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and driver 3 (1334) receives the segment data (LOW when lit) instructed by D1 to D8. The 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is turned on.

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit on the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS1. Latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS1, and driver 2 (1334) receives the segment data (LOW when lit) instructed by D1 to D8. output, and the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 lights up.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1, and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, repeats the above-described process, and outputs the digit selection data and display data. In this way, the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share the common side driver circuit, output the segment data in a time-sharing manner, and use the common common data to connect the base display 1317 and the function The LED elements of the display unit 1400 can be lit.

As shown in FIG. 93(B) and FIG. 97, since the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334, the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced, and high-density mounting (e.g. Components can be easily mounted on the main control board 1310, where it is impossible to use a multilayer board or place components close to each other.

In addition, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 using common common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are 1317, the segment data is output at different timings. Therefore, while both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are controlled by a common common data line, the display of both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be controlled within one timer interrupt process. .

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of chip select (CS2, CS1), and is erased at the rising timing of chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erase data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, if the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is the display time of the base display 1317. becomes longer. This is by increasing the lighting time in one cycle of the LED of the function display unit 1400 placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing the brightness, thereby reducing visibility from being directly illuminated by hall lighting. This is to prevent it. Furthermore, since the base display 1317 is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, which is darker than the front side, even if the LED emits light at low brightness, the visibility of the base display 1317 is less affected. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a first LED and a second LED that are controlled by the main control MPU 1311, and the luminance of the first LED is set higher than the luminance of the second LED.

Note that, contrary to the above, the display data of the base display 1317 is outputted first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is outputted later, and the display time of the base display 1317 is changed to the display time of the function display unit 1400. It may be longer than the time.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in states (intervals) related to base value calculation.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a provisional section display and a confirmed section display are switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). In the provisional section display, the base value of the section under measurement is displayed. Specifically, the first two digits display "bA." to indicate that the base value A is displayed, and the bottom two digits display the base value A being measured as a two-digit percentage. Note that when the integer part of the percentage of base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of digits displayed on the base display 1317 is two digits, it can be displayed so that it can be seen whether the base value A is 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the temporary interval display, if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6,000), the first two digits (or all four digits) will be displayed blinking, making it difficult to measure the accurate base value. Indicates that it is not. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is a predetermined number (for example, 6,000) or more, the first two digits are lit to indicate that an accurate base value can be measured.

In the confirmed interval display, the base value of the previous interval is displayed. Specifically, "bb." is lit in the first two digits to indicate that base value B is displayed, and the bottom two digits are the base value of the previous interval (the lower part of the previous period). The base value B), which is a two-digit final value, is displayed as a two-digit percentage by lighting. Note that when the integer part of the percentage of base value B is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of digits displayed on the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that it can be seen whether the base value B is 0% or 100%.

Note that in the first section, since the previous section is a test section, no base value is measured. Therefore, in the confirmed section display, "bb." is blinking in the first two digits, and "--" is blinking in the bottom two digits.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 256) of fewer than 500 out balls from the initial power-on is treated as a test period and the base value is not calculated. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is fired a predetermined number of times after it is powered on for the first time, the ball launch may vary within the range of the probability distribution, and the base value will not be stable, making it impossible to measure a meaningful base value. . Therefore, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317 during the test section. Specifically, in the provisional section display, "bA." is displayed in the first two digits and "--" is displayed in the last one digit, and in the confirmed section display, "bb." is displayed in the first two digits. , "--" is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, all the digits on the base display 1317 are displayed blinking to indicate that the accurate base value cannot be measured.

Here, the first time the power is turned on means the first time the power is turned on after completion of Pachinko machine 1, or the time immediately after the base calculation work area is initialized (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108). state. In addition, the power-on time generally used in this specification refers to a power-on time other than the initial power-on time.

Note that when an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is erased in the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the total number of out balls in all game states (during jackpot, normal play, time saving, non-time saving, high probability, low probability, etc.) reaches 52,000, the next section will start. , and measure a new base value. Note that the number of out pitches in one section is not 52,000, but may be any other number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the pachinko machine 1 operates for 10 hours a day, 60,000, which is the daily operation (number of out balls), may be adopted as the number of out balls in one section. A round number such as 50,000 or 100,000 may be used.

Note that the configuration may be such that the number of out pitches in one section can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is preferable that a setting switch (such as a DIP switch or a rotary switch) is provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out pitches in one section is set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 or on another board connected to the main control board 1310. Furthermore, if you change the settings of the switch, you can initialize the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) in the RAM 1312 and restart base value calculation from the test section, or restart from the beginning of the current section. good. Immediately after a pachinko machine is introduced as a new machine, it is often operated, so the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and after the operating period has passed, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a setting means that can set the operation that determines the length of the section that is the unit of calculation of the base value, and when the power is turned on for the first time, the operation is set based on the operation set by the setting means. The length of one section is set.

In this way, the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of the immediately preceding section are switched and displayed on the base display 1317 at predetermined time intervals. Furthermore, a display that allows distinguishing the display contents is displayed on a part of the base display 1317, and a measured base value is displayed on the other part.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a 7-segment LED with multiple digits (for example, 4 digits), and displays numbers and characters by lighting or blinking the segment of each digit. The numbers 0 to 9 can be displayed, and the letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and the - sign can also be displayed. Additionally, the decimal point can be displayed at the same time as numbers and letters. A case where the number 6 is displayed at the same time as the decimal point and a case where the number 9 is displayed are illustrated.

101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of the initialization process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The initialization process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 is compared with the initialization process described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, and the check code calculation process (step S50) and check code storage process (step S52) are deleted. Therefore, the check code calculation for the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. Note that the same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and checks whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, data in areas other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24 Proceed to. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power outage flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30). , proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag has been set, the power outage flag is cleared and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are processed in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( (other than the base calculation area 13128) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased and step S24 Proceed to.

Next, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the cases where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized are when the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18) and when the power outage flag is abnormal (step S20) where the power outage flag is not set. , a RAM abnormality in which the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Among these, as shown in the figure, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or if there is a power outage flag abnormality or a RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (gaming work area and gaming stack area) The base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is cleared, but the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike what is shown in the figure, in the case of a power outage flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, or base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed. You may also clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the gaming status will be lost and normal processing will not be possible.If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation are It is best to initialize only Additionally, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. No need to clear.

Note that when one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, backup areas 1 and 2 are , N, and copy the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal first to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased under different conditions for each type of data (gaming control area 13126 and base calculation area 13128). do. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. If the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at any timing. Therefore, the backed-up base calculation area 13128 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, preventing erasure of the base calculation area 13128 by the operation of a game hall attendant, and hiding an abnormal base value. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a gaming machine that has been modified to have a high base value or a low base value.

When the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 performs an initial setting process (step S28) for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111), and peripheral control board 1510 is executed (step S32), and execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S34). Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power outage warning signal (step S36), and determines whether the power outage warning signal is ON (step S38). If the power outage notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), random number updating processing is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power outage process (power outage setting means). In the power-off processing, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), output ports are cleared, and operations of devices controlled by outputs from each port are stopped (step S44). Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been properly retained (step S46), and checks the RAM 1312 using the checksum calculation result. It is stored in the thumb area (step S48).

Subsequently, data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated) during the base calculation process, instead of during the main board side power-off process. In this way, by storing the data used to calculate the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for base calculation and the calculated base value can be stored even when the power is cut off. can be maintained and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

Note that the check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in a modification described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Furthermore, a value indicating that the backup has been successfully performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power outage flag (step S56), and writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S56). S58), waits until recovery from power outage (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26(A) is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is constituted by a part of the RAM 1312, and as described above, is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game area).

The base calculation area 13128 includes storage areas for a base value A, a base value B, a section counter, the total number of out pitches, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out pitches, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving award pitches.

The base value A storage area is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value of the temporary section currently being measured. The base value B storage area is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value measured in the interval immediately before the provisional interval. The storage area of the section counter consists of 1 byte, and stores a value indicating the section in which the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated every time the section is switched, and is used to control different display contents depending on the section. Note that the section counter is preferably controlled to have a value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, to not exceed 2. Specifically, in the test section, the section counter = 0, in the first section, the section counter = 1, and after the second section, the section counter = 2. Further, the section counter may be controlled to have a value from 0 to 255 so that it does not become larger than 255, and after the second section, the section counter becomes equal to or greater than 2.

The storage area for the total number of out pitches is composed of 2 bytes, and stores the total number of out pitches regardless of the gaming state (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). The total number of pitches out is used to determine interval switching, which is the base unit of measurement. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value in each section is measured with approximately one day of operation as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area for the total number of out pitches. As mentioned above, the total number of out pitches is a storage area for counting all the number of out pitches for each section regardless of the game state, and the total number of out pitches in the above-mentioned example (the number of out pitches in the special prize) This is different from the total value since the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1).

The storage area for the low probability/non-time-saving number of out pitches consists of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes) and stores the number of out pitches (the number of out pitches in game states other than the special prize) for calculating the base value. Store. The storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls consists of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and stores the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls in game states other than special prize) for calculating the base value. Store. Note that the storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches and the storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving winning pitches should be 2 bytes or more, but considering the calculation process of the base value, they should be the same number of bytes. It is preferable to do so.

The storage capacity (number of bytes) of each storage area described above is merely an example, and may be determined according to the number of out pitches in one section.

Furthermore, when providing a main area and a backup area of the base calculation area 13128, storage areas with the same configuration are provided in the RAM 1312.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. The object ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. Note that the same steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG. 23 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1 and switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the base calculation area 13128 ( (see FIG. 103) and calculates the base value (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later using FIGS. 105 and 106. The base calculation process (step S801) can be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it is better to execute it in an early order to ensure that it is executed every timer interrupt. .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing (step S86). Step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

In this way, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is measured by the timer interrupt process, so the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts illustrating an example of base calculation processing.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as mentioned above, the winning hole sensors (general winning hole sensor 3015, first starting hole sensor 2104, second starting hole sensor 2551, first big winning hole sensor 2114, second big winning hole sensor 2554, second If there is an abnormality in the lower large prize opening sensor 2557, etc.) or ejected ball sensor (board side ejected ball sensor 3060A, frame side ejected ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated based on the abnormality signal output from the interface circuit 1331. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be performed. In addition, if it is determined that fraudulent activity is being carried out (for example, a magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, a vibration detection sensor detects vibration, or a radio wave detection sensor detects radio waves), the base value will be accurately calculated. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be calculated. If it is determined that this error has occurred, the display on the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, an error that causes a game stop (e.g., magnetic, vibration, radio wave error, etc.) is determined to be an error (YES), and an error that does not involve a game stop (e.g., prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.) For failures that are not directly related to calculation (out of supply, full tank error, etc.), it may be determined that they are not errors (NO). In other words, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process even if there is some abnormality among the plurality of types of abnormal conditions, but not to execute the base calculation process if there are other abnormalities.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the number of out pitches (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the ejected ball sensor 1020, the ejected ball sensor 3060, etc., and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal from the sensor, it is determined that the number of out balls is out. Get the number of pitches = 1. When out balls are detected by a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060, the total value of the number detected by each sensor is obtained as the number of out balls. That is, a plurality of out balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the number of prize balls (step S8015). As the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process of step S80 is obtained. The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the already-transmitted payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and may be the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) for which the payout control board 951 has received a report of completion of the payout. This variation is as explained using FIGS. 41 to 44.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether an out ball has been detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If an out ball has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S8022 without executing processing related to an out ball. On the other hand, if an out pitch is detected, the detected number of out pitches is added to the total number of out pitches stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the initial power-on of the pachinko machine (or the initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is an initial value of 0. It has become. Therefore, if the section counter value is 0, it can be determined that it is a test section. If it is a test section, there is no need to calculate the base value, so the process advances to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not the test period, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a special prize (step S8019). Determination as to whether a special prize is being awarded can be made in the same manner as in step S810 of FIG. 39 described above. When the game status is in the special prize mode, it means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to a jackpot and the player can win many prize balls, but it does not include the opening and ending times of the jackpot game. You can. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing during one jackpot, the time from the closing of the big winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the conditional device is in operation, for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Further, it may include all the time during which the right-handed batting instruction is being given.

Furthermore, in the starting prize openings 2002 and 2004, special prizes may include time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support. Furthermore, in game states other than time saving, probability changing (ST), and electric support, a predetermined period of time after the opening of the starting winning hole 2004 and closing (for example, the ball that entered the starting winning hole is detected as an out ball) The period up to the few seconds necessary for In addition, the so-called "hidden gaming state" which is a high probability gaming state but does not become a time saving mode (during electric support) is not included in the special prize, and is not included in the special prize. The base value may be calculated using the number of awarded pitches or the number of out pitches. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, and the base value may be displayed in a manner that allows identification of which base is being displayed.

A latent gaming state is a gaming state in which the player is not aware that it is a high probability state even if the probability is high, but if the latent gaming state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, if the slot is released during business hours. In some cases, a player may look at the base indicator 1317 and recognize that he is in a latent gaming state (ie, high probability). That is, when a hall employee takes care of a ball in the winning hole or sends a ball to the out hole with the slot open, the player can know the gaming status by seeing whether the base display changes. Such problems can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state.

On the other hand, in the business of a hall, there are cases where it is necessary to manage the base value in low probability/non-time saving states, and if the base value is calculated including the latent gaming state, it may not be possible to manage it according to the business form of the hall. . Such problems can be avoided by calculating the base value excluding latent gaming states. A similar problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state. In other words, since the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state are different gaming states to begin with, depending on the operating format of the hall, it may be desirable to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each gaming state. .

In addition, when calculating the base value separately for the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, even if the base value is calculated using a dedicated calculation process for each gaming state, the base value is calculated using a common calculation process. You may. By calculating the base value using common calculation processing, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced, and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessories provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment are divided into two types from the viewpoint of base value calculation. As mentioned above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special prize regarding the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during the operation of the conditional device (for example, from the confirmation of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol fluctuation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated using the number of prize balls and out balls other than during special prizes, normal winnings (during so-called jackpots) in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, in the starting prize opening 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening/closing member, winning balls and prize balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, for some of the electrically operated accessories (big prize opening 2005, 2006), the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls are used to calculate the base value, regardless of the gaming state (whether or not there is a special prize). For other accessories (starting prize opening 2004), whether or not to use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be switched depending on the game status (whether or not there is a special prize). It will be done.

Moreover, the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened even when the conditional device does not operate (as a so-called small win). Generally, a small hit occurs during a short time period, and since the game ball is open for a short time, there is a low possibility that the game ball will win, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small win may be generated other than during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during a time when there is a high possibility that the game ball will win. In this case, winning balls and prize balls into the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in small wins that occur outside of the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small win other than during the special prize. In other words, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to base value standards, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

If the gaming state is a special prize, the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the low-probability/non-time-saving out ball count since the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize state, the number of out balls detected in step S8014 should be used for calculating the base, so it is detected as the number of low probability/non-time-saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128. The number of out pitches received is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 when an out ball or prize ball other than the special prize is detected each time the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is executed, and indicates the timing at which the base value should be calculated (steps S8026 to S8027 reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a prize ball has been detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If the prize ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8026 without executing the process related to the prize ball. On the other hand, if a prize ball is detected, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether a special prize is being awarded may be the same as step S8019.

If the gaming state is a special prize, the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low-probability/non-time-saving prize ball count, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 should be used for calculating the base, so it is detected as the number of low probability/non-time-saving prize balls stored in the base calculation area 13128. The number of awarded balls is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). If the update flag is 1, an out ball or prize ball other than a special prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), so the number of low probability/non-time-saving award balls is changed to a low-probability/non-time-saving out ball. A base value is calculated by dividing by a number and stored in the base value A storage area of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether the test section is in progress (step S8028). Then, if the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is a test section, it is determined whether it is time to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including initialization of the base calculation area 13128) is a predetermined value of less than 500, and the section counter indicates that it is a test section; If the total number of out pitches is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is time to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 in order to continue the test section. On the other hand, if the test section is in progress and the timing is to end the test section, the process advances to step S8032 in order to transition from the test section to the first section. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The section counter changes from 0 representing the test section to 1 representing the first section. Then, the total number of out pitches, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out pitches, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving award pitches are initialized to 0 (step S8033). With this process, the test section is ended and the process moves to the first section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8028 that the section counter value is not 0 and the test section is not in progress, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total number of out pitches is 52,000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out pitches is less than 52,000, the process advances to step S8034 to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the total number of out pitches is 52,000 or more, the section ends, and processing for starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area in the base calculation area 13128, and writes it into the base value B storage area (step S8031). Thereafter, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As mentioned above, the interval counter is controlled to have a value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, not to be larger than 2, so if the interval counter value is 2, adding 1 to the interval counter does not The interval counter value does not increase and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out pitches, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out pitches, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize pitches are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process moves to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). If the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later using FIG. 107. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch and display the provisional section display and the final section display explained with reference to FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time period for switching between the provisional section display and the confirmed section display is the period of the blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 in FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability/non-time-short out pitches in each section is less than 6000. It is better to make the time sufficiently longer. This is because if the frequency of blinking and display switching is the same, it will be difficult to tell whether the blinking display (i.e., whether the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than 6,000), so it is difficult to tell whether the display is blinking or not. This is to make it easier to understand whether it is a changeover.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). The check code calculation method uses the same calculation method as the check code calculation process in step S50 of the initialization process (FIG. 22). In addition, if you want to use a fixed value without calculating the check code, it is recommended to use a multiple-byte value in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, if it is 2 bytes, such as A55AH (1010010101011010B)) ). Further, instead of setting fixed values in continuous areas, they may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored in the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code is a fixed value, it is preferable to configure it with a larger number of bytes than the check data obtained by calculating the checksum to improve the possibility of determining a RAM abnormality.

As described above, according to the base calculation process of this embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so the base value can be calculated without delay ( (in real time), and it is possible to judge without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal. Note that the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is the storage area used for base calculation, is extremely small compared to the capacity of the game control area 13126, so a check code is written at the end of each base calculation process. Even if calculated, there is little effect on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311.

In addition, when the base value of prize balls is calculated and displayed using the scheduled number of prize balls to be paid out based on the generated winning signal, the timing at which the base value is calculated and displayed and the timing at which the prize balls are paid out may differ. are different. In other words, there is a problem with the payout device and the prize balls are not paid out (out of supply, the upper tray is full, a failure of the payout number counting sensor installed in the prize ball passage, a failure of the payout motor, etc.) The base value is calculated and displayed even if the system is stopped (such as when the system is stopped).

Note that in the base calculation process described above, the base value was calculated using the number of out pitches detected in the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls each time the base calculation process was called from the timer interrupt process. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called multiple times, and the base value is calculated multiple times. In this way, even if the timing for switching the interval described above (the number of out pitches is 52,000) arrives during one base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which interval should be calculated as the base value. , can display accurate base values in real time.

Also, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , the prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is may be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display data generation processing.

The base display data generation process is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation process.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt processing described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499, so when the display switching counter is between 0 and 1249, the processes of steps S8042 to S8045 are executed, and when the display switching counter is between 1250 and 2499, the processing of steps S8042 to S8045 is executed. executes the processing of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." in the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not a test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

If it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying "bb." in the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8046). Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is a test section or the first section (step S8047). In the test section or the first section, since the base value has not been measured in the past confirmed section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the most recent confirmed section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the low-probability/non-time-saving out pitch count is smaller than 6000 (step S8050 ). If the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is less than 6000, the number of active pitches (number of out pitches) after starting base value measurement in the relevant section is small, so the base value may not be stable. The display on the base display 1317 is controlled to blink (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches is 6000 or more, control is performed so that the display on the base display 1317 is lit without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the display switching counter is not initialized and the process advances to step S8055. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, one repetition has been completed, so the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

In this way, in the timer interrupt processing (base calculation processing) executed at predetermined intervals, by switching the display contents on the base display 1317 using the display switching counter that is updated regularly, the current The base value A currently being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the confirmed interval can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, since the base value is displayed blinking in the range where it is not stable in each section, it can be easily confirmed whether the base value is in the stable range or in the unstable range by the display on the base display 1317.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a modification of the base calculation process. The modification shown in FIG. 108 is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105, except that the base calculation work check process (steps S8012 and S8013) is added. Note that in FIG. 108, the steps up to the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) in the base calculation process will be explained, but the processes from steps S8028 to S8038 are the same as those in FIG. 106 described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S8012). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

Note that when one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, backup areas 1 and 2 are , N, and copy the data in the backup area that is determined to be normal first to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). After determining whether 13128 is normal (step S8012) and performing necessary processing based on the determination result, it may be determined whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

The subsequent processes (from step S8014) are the same as those in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, so their description will be omitted.

In the base calculation process shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal or not every timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds), so an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected quickly, display of base values can be suppressed.

Next, a method for determining an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be explained. The value used for calculating the base value and the calculated base value are stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the “accessory ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is the “base calculation area 13128”). It is determined whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. There are the following variations regarding which processing (timing) to perform this normality/abnormality determination step and check code calculation step.
- Figures 101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
・Figures 21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization processing).
- Figures 106 and 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(A case in which the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and determined when the power is turned on)
First, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) when the power is turned on will be described using FIGS. 101 and 106.

If the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 105 and 106), the base calculation area 13128 A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data.

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased, the state related to base value calculation is initialized, so the calculated base value is cleared and base value calculation starts from the test period.

Note that when one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code, and if the main area is determined to be abnormal, backup areas 1 and 2 are , N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal may be copied to the main area to restore the data in the base calculation area 13128. After that, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In this case, the frequency of check code determination is low, and the consumption of calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a process of determining a check code calculated at power-off at power-on (initialization process) will be described.

When the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power-off process in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (eg, checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

Furthermore, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of check code calculation and determination is low, and the consumption of calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated and judged by timer interrupt processing)
Next, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) using the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be explained using FIGS. 106 and 108.

When the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128.

Further, in step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area in steps S24 and S26 is normal may be omitted.

In this case, an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

Note that when a fixed value is used for the check code instead of a checksum, the timing for setting and determining the check code may be the same as the timing for calculating and determining the checksum. Furthermore, the determination may be made using both a checksum and a fixed value as the check code.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing calculation of the base value when the gaming state is switched.

One game ball wins while the starting prize opening 2004 (electric tulip) is opened, and then a predetermined number of variable display games are completed, the time saving state is completed, and the normal state is returned. After that, in the normal state, it is further assumed that a game ball wins in the opening winning opening 2004.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display in accordance with the winning in the starting winning hole 2004. That is, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to any winning to the starting winning hole 2004 shown in the figure.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the out ball in the special prize is not used for the base calculation, so the first winning ball into the starting winning hole 2004 is not added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball number. , the second winning ball will be added to the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out pitches.

In the above, the explanation was given regarding the end of the time saving state, but the same applies to the end of the probability change due to ST.

In addition to when the above-mentioned time saving state ends, a similar phenomenon occurs when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol variation display game. Assume that in the normal state, one game ball wins while the starting prize opening 2004 (electric tulip) is open, a jackpot state starts after that, and then a game ball wins in the starting prize opening 2004 while it is open. do.

Also in this case, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to winnings in any of the starting winning holes 2004. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball in the starting winning hole 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball count, but the second winning ball is low. It is not added to the probability/non-time-shortened out pitch count.

Furthermore, a similar phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In the normal state, one game ball wins while the starting winning hole 2004 (electric tulip) is open, a specific error occurs after that, and a game ball wins the starting winning hole 2004 while it is open. Suppose. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error that prevents accurate calculation of the base value based on the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), the Do not use the sphere for base calculations.

Also in this case, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in relation to winnings in any of the starting winning holes 2004. On the other hand, since out balls in which a specific error has occurred are not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball in the starting winning hole 2004 is added to the low probability/non-time saving out ball count, but the second winning ball is added to the number of low probability/non-time-saving out balls. Pitches are not counted in the number of low-probability/non-time-shortened out pitches.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, under specific conditions (such as when the time shortening ends, when a jackpot occurs in a special symbol variable display game, when a specific error occurs, etc.), a plurality of game balls that have won a prize while the electric accessory is activated There are cases in which it is used for calculating the base value and cases in which it is not used in the calculation of the base value, and the special drawing can start to fluctuate in any winning.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, regarding the look-ahead performance of the special symbol variation display game that is on hold, the first prize entered into the starting prize opening 2004 in a time-saving state is not subject to the look-ahead performance, and the normal state is The second prize won in the above may be subject to a look-ahead presentation. On the contrary, the first prize won in the starting prize opening 2004 in a time-saving state may be the target of the pre-read effect, and the second prize won in the normal state may not be the subject of the pre-read effect.

Note that although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the variable probability state (ST) or the electric support state to the normal state.

[10. Recording of gaming history]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game history will be described.

[10-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that records gaming history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines a performance that matches the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 from among a plurality of prepared performances, and displays the determined performance on the liquid crystal display. 1600. At this time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines to display a specific effect among the plurality of prepared effects (for example, two types of specific effects among the three types of super reach), the peripheral control unit 1511 starts from the switching of the gaming state. The number of times the special symbol variation display game has been played and the specific effect has appeared (in other words, the number of times the effect has appeared) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 along with the progress of the game. indicate.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 110, Super Reach 1 appeared on the 34th spin at 10:25, the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a loss, and the game turned on on the 127th spin at 10:54. Super Reach 2 appeared, and the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a loss, and Super Reach 2 appeared at the 428th spin at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a sure-fire jackpot. The following message is displayed.

The display of the jackpot history (for example, a jackpot on the 15th spin and a jackpot on the 50th spin) can be confirmed on the data display installed in the hall, but the specific performance that appeared before the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players determine whether the pachinko machine 1 is doing well or not based on the extent to which a particular effect appears (for example, if Super Reach 2 appears within 50 revolutions after the end of the jackpot, they think that they will win the jackpot in a short time). In order to meet the expectations of such players, the degree of appearance of the performance is displayed in a visible manner. In addition, since the game ball is not fired when the player is checking the degree of appearance of the effect, if the display shows the degree of appearance of all of the multiple effects prepared, the player can It takes time to confirm the extent of the appearance of the problem, and the operation of the game machine may decrease. For this reason, it is preferable to display only a specific reach effect (a reach effect with high expectations for a jackpot) among the reach effects. Furthermore, the appearance history for each performance may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (such as the performance operation button 220C).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it stores information on the number of variations and the effect that has appeared. Furthermore, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the number of fluctuations and the information on the effect that has appeared based on the received fluctuation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (such as the performance operation button 220C) is operated, the number of fluctuations required for a limited specific performance to appear is added and displayed, instead of all the performances that have appeared. All you have to do is to do the following processing.

Further, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 that is in operation, error information is output from the pachinko machine 1 and notified to the employees of the hall. The form of this notification is to display the error screen shown in FIG. 111(A) on the liquid crystal display device 1600 or display the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 111(B) on the liquid crystal display device 1600 to notify the cause of the error. , outputs an alarm sound, and outputs an error signal shown in FIG. 112 from the external terminal board 784. Further, typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 113, 114, and 115. An error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is reported outside the pachinko machine 1 so that an employee of the hall can know the cause. For example, a code determined for each type of error may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, if there is a poor connection of the cable between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, "0" is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and the LED in the middle right of the door is Lights up in blue.

However, errors occur due to various causes, such as minor malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, disconnected connectors), severe malfunctions that require parts replacement, and fraudulent acts.

The pachinko machine 1 in which an error has occurred must find the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate. Searching for the cause of the error requires time and cost, and stopping the operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error results in a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hall can know detailed information about the error that has occurred, it can quickly resolve the error and shorten the time during which the Pachinko machine 1 stops operating.

More specifically, the hall uses a hall computer to determine the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on the signal output from the external terminal board 784. However, in order to investigate the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, it is desirable to use the following information: Game history information such as "number" is required. If there is a malfunction in Pachinko machine 1, it is not a big problem as it can be resolved by repair or replacing parts, but if game balls are acquired through fraudulent acts, chances for normal players to earn profits will be reduced, and the This may interfere with the operations of the hall, and ultimately, the hall may find itself in financial difficulties.

If such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of connector terminals used in the external terminal board 784 will increase, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 will increase. Furthermore, since events such as "winning in the general prize opening", "winning in the grand prize opening", "passing through the gate", and "normal symbols change" occur frequently, when all data is output from the pachinko machine 1, the data A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze the information, which increases the burden on halls.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment stores data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748 inside the pachinko machine 1, and makes the stored data referable later. This makes it possible to check the details of the circumstances leading up to the occurrence of the error.

In addition, the occurrence times of events that occurred in the process leading up to the occurrence of these errors (number of wins in the general winning opening, number of winnings in the big winning opening, number of gates passed, number of normal symbol changes, etc.) are recorded, so you can find out how much time has passed. You can see how many events have occurred. For example, abnormalities such as the number of winnings in the general winning slot being 50 per minute can be detected.

Note that recording the date and time of occurrence for each event increases the amount of data used to find the cause of error occurrence, and it takes time to find the cause of error occurrence. Therefore, if a predetermined number or more of events occur within a predetermined period of time (for example, one minute), it may be output as error information and notified.

For example, it is possible to enter the general winning slot in any gaming state, so if there are more than a predetermined number of wins in a predetermined time, it would be a good idea to output error information and notify you, but it is possible to enter the big winning slot only during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is preferable to set a predetermined time period from the start to the end of the jackpot game, and to output and notify error information when a predetermined number or more of jackpots are won in the predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine described below, a peripheral control unit 1511 records a game history and outputs it as data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of this embodiment. The peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 116 includes a game history recording process (step S1023) added to the peripheral control unit power-on process described above with reference to FIG.

In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310, if the received command is a predetermined command. The game history is recorded as the date and time of event occurrence, for example, in a format as shown in FIG. 118. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be a DRAM, but in order to retain the stored contents even when the power is cut off, it is preferable to record the game history in an SRAM that does not require a refresh operation and has low power consumption.

The game history recording process (step S1023) is preferably executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing game history recording processing at an early stage of peripheral control unit steady processing, the game history can be accurately recorded even if processing related to game control is stopped midway and some performances are not executed. In other words, even if some performances are not executed (even if all performances are not executed), the results of the lottery that have already been performed on the main control board 1310 will not change, and the benefits given to the player will also change. Since there is no such thing, the gaming history is recorded with priority over the performance. Furthermore, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to game control, the game history recording process can be shared among multiple types of pachinko machines.

Next, a process will be described when the memory capacity of recorded game history reaches the upper limit. If the amount of data of the game history to be recorded has reached the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not need to be updated. In other words, the information stored in memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free space status of the memory for recording the game history, and each time the peripheral control unit 1511 processing can be reduced.

Further, when the memory capacity of the game history to be recorded has reached the upper limit, a game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to erase the oldest game history and record the latest game history. Even in this case, there is no need to check the free space of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing by the peripheral control unit 1511 can be reduced each time.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the execution of wasteful processes. Control, sound control) can be reliably executed, and the free processing time can be used to start new processing (for example, processing that is executed across multiple peripheral control unit steady processes due to lack of processing time). Alternatively, a process that does not need to be executed every time and is executed once every several peripheral control unit steady processes (for example, a process for switching the selection table) may be executed.

Note that the received command may be analyzed (step S1022) immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table. The game history recording condition setting table includes commands to be recorded as a game history among commands that the peripheral control unit 1511 receives from the main control board 1310. Register the type, that is, the event recorded as the game history.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the generation conditions of the commands and the purpose of recording as the game history are as follows.

For example, the starting opening 1 winning command and the starting opening 2 winning command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a winning of a game ball is detected in the starting winning opening 2002 and starting winning opening 2004, respectively. , the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each starting winning hole. In addition, the special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are respectively sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the special symbols start changing, and the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the special symbols 1 and 2. Can count the number of changes.

Further, a power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the power is turned on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can obtain a ram clear operation and the like. The state command at the start of variation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the time the special symbol starts to fluctuate. There are four states that can be distinguished by the state command at the start of fluctuation: low probability/time saving, low probability/non-time saving, high probability/time saving, and high probability/non-time saving.Changes in state can be obtained and the state starts in each state. The number of fluctuations that occurred can be counted. Here, low probability is a state in which the probability of a jackpot in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol fluctuation display game is the normal probability, and high probability is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol fluctuation display game is a state where the probability of a jackpot is derived is the normal probability. This is a state in which the probability that is derived is higher than normal. Time saving means that the probability that the second starting port door member 2549 will be in the open (or enlarged) state is higher than that of non-time saving, or the time from when the normal symbol starts changing to when it is fixed. This is a state in which the second starting port door member 2549 is in an open (or expanded) state more frequently than in a non-time saving state, such as when the time is shortened. Accordingly, the probability that a performance with a short time for one special symbol variation display game will be selected increases.

The grand prize opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the great winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball enters the grand prize opening 2005 and the grand prize opening 2006, respectively. The command is sent, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each big winning hole.

Big winning opening 1 winning command (below the stipulated prize) and Big winning opening 2 winning command (below the stipulating winning) command is for the big winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively, where only the specified number of game balls can be won by the end of the round. If not, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing of each big prize opening (for example, from 1 second until the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 It is possible to obtain the winning status in one round for each big winning opening. The big winning opening 1 winning command (larger than the stipulated winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the stipulating winning) are used when a game ball exceeding the specified number wins in the big winning opening 2005 and big winning opening 2006, respectively. When the opening is completed, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing of each big prize opening (for example, from 1 second until the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 It is possible to obtain the status of winnings in one round for each big winning opening. Note that this command is sent after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing of each grand prize opening 2005, 2006, when a specified number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls) determined in one round are detected and the grand prize opening is When the game ball is closed, there is a possibility that an undetected game ball is present in the grand prize opening, and this is to accurately grasp the winning situation even in such a case of over-winning.

The jackpot OP command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is activated or the accessory continuous activation device is activated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires the change to the jackpot state. You can count the number of jackpots. The transfer destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the end of the jackpot state, so that the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the end of the jackpot state and the situation after the jackpot.

The small win OP command is used when the big prize opening is opened for a relatively short time (for example, one opening time is 1.8 seconds, or the total opening time of multiple openings is less than 1.8 seconds). When there is a hit in which the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (a so-called small win), a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small wins.

The normal symbol stop command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control section 1511 when the normal symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control section 1511 can acquire the stopped symbol of the normal symbol and count the number of variations in the normal symbol. The common figure gate passage command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control section 1511 when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, and the peripheral control section 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003.

Even if a special symbol or a normal symbol is not drawn even if you enter the starting prize opening or pass through the gate (such as when there is an overflow or there is no memory), the main control board 1310 instructs the peripheral control unit 1511 to select the starting opening 1. Sends the winning command, starting gate 2 winning command, and common map gate passage command. Therefore, the peripheral control section 1511 can count the number of winning balls that enter the starting port and the number of balls that pass through the gate section.

The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can obtain the timing of error occurrence and count the number of errors.

The general winning hole 1 winning command, the general winning hole 2 winning command, and the general winning hole 3 winning command are commands that are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a game ball enters each general winning hole 2001, and the peripheral The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each general winning hole 2001. In addition, it is preferable that the general winning hole winning commands are determined by the number of general winning holes 2001 provided in the gaming area 5a, and the case where three general winning holes 2001 are provided is illustrated above. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with four general winning holes 2001, so four types of general winning holes can be entered, from the general winning hole 1 winning command to the general winning hole 4 winning command. Commands are defined.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the game history recorded in the memory.

The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in the order of event occurrence time. The event occurrence date and time may be recorded as the time at which the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command from the main control board 1310, or the time at which the main control board 1310 detects the occurrence of the event may be recorded to the peripheral control unit 1511. The peripheral control board 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the event occurrence date and time are recorded down to the minute, but may be recorded down to the second.

By analyzing the gaming history in the format shown in FIG. 118, it is possible to know details of events that occur in connection with commands sent from the main control board 1310 (for example, changes in gaming status, results of variable display games, etc.) . For example, the power-on command with history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, and the contents of the command indicate that the RAM was cleared and the game started in a low-probability, non-time-saving state. I understand. In other words, the hall opened for business at 3:30 p.m., the Pachinko machine 1 was turned on, the player started playing after a while (for example, after lighting a cigarette), and won a prize in General Winning Port 2001. I understand. In addition, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start event with history number 4 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and from the contents of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol), the special symbol fluctuation start event You can see the results of the displayed game. The special symbol 1 fluctuation start event with history number 6 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol fluctuation display game was started based on the contents of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol). You can see the result. Although the results of the special symbol fluctuation display game are not shown in FIG. 118, each special symbol fluctuation display game is determined by the numerical value indicating the result of the fluctuation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the special symbol fluctuation. The results of the variable display game (loss, normal 4th round, high probability 4th round, high probability 16th round, etc.) may be recorded as a game history.

Next, a method for the hole to refer to the information (gaming history) recorded in the memory will be explained.

First, a history output interface 1590 is provided to output information recorded in the memory from the peripheral control unit 1511. Then, upon receiving the history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

Further, a data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1, and upon receiving a history reference command from the data collection terminal, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be configured with a history output terminal provided in the peripheral control section 1511, or may be provided separately from the peripheral control section 1511. The data collection terminal is preferably owned by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range wireless (eg, Bluetooth (registered trademark)).

The command that triggers the peripheral control unit 1511 to output the game history may be a history reference command dedicated to outputting the game history, or a command that is not sent when the pachinko machine 1 is playing a normal game after it is powered on (Fig. 117 The history reference command may be a command when a special condition (operation) is performed under a command (not defined in ). The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Further, even if a command is sent during a normal game, a history reference command may be sent under conditions of an event that cannot occur (or is unlikely to occur). For example, if 50 prizes are won in the starting slot or the general winning slot in one minute. Furthermore, the game history may be output when commands used for game control are received in a special order that is normally impossible.

Note that an operation panel (keyboard) and a display (liquid crystal display) may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (in a place that cannot be seen by the player) to display the game history.

FIG. 119 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the peripheral control board and its surroundings.

The peripheral control board 1510 performs production control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and also communicates control commands and various information (various data) with the production display drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Performs drawing control of the communicating peripheral control unit 1511, game board side effect display device 1600, and door frame side effect display device 460, and controls sounds such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has a liquid crystal display control section 1512 and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control section 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day, and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second.

As shown in FIG. 119, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs production control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that control the performance operations to be executed, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a V blank from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control section 1512, which will be described later. Various information that continues beyond the routine processing of the peripheral control unit that is executed every time a signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc.) Peripheral control RAM 1511c stores information for managing prescribed schedule data, etc.), and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of jackpot game states and special effects). A peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing flags, etc.) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. ).

The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when the power is cut off for a long time (in the case of a long-term power outage), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d has a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. By supplying backup power through an electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"), stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is no longer supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d retains the stored contents. It becomes impossible to do so and loses its content.

In addition, power is supplied to a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d by a backup power supply 1513 that is different from the backup power supply supplied from the power supply board 931. A game history is recorded in the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is supplied with power by the backup power source 1513, and is configured so that the stored contents can be retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is configured with a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and preferably has a power supply capability capable of retaining data in at least a portion of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for a period of several weeks to about one month.

FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured in a separate package from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured together with the peripheral control MPU in the package of the peripheral control CPU.

FIG. 120(A) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which has an area for storing game history in a package separate from the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power source 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the gaming history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power source 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. It will be done.

When operating the RAM clear switch to reset the pachinko machine 1, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (area for performance control) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the data in the peripheral control SRAM (gaming history storage area) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. data in the area) 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 120(B) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which constitutes an area for storing game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, both an effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power source 1513 and a game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power source 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 120(B), when the RAM clear switch is operated to reset the pachinko machine 1, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control Data in the peripheral control SRAM (gaming history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. For this reason, the effect control area and the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are preferably configured to be physically separated.

Note that the area for storing the game history in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be configured with a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be held even in the pachinko machine 1 to which no power is supplied without providing a backup power source 1513.

In either form of FIGS. 120(A) and 120(B), the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be initialized using any method that is different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the Pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. good. For example, a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch, and when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored gaming state information and the gaming history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, if you turn on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch, and if you continue to operate the RAM clear switch for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on, both the stored gaming state information and gaming history will be initialized. may be converted into

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from the normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, the main control board 1310 continues to send power-on commands to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on commands a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. or when power-on commands are received continuously, the gaming history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (gaming history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing a means for initializing the data in the gaming history storage area in this manner, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed even if the gaming machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, for example.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer times out, it is reset by hardware. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer times up) to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, it restarts the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is performed.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. provided on the lamp is sent from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data is sent to the drive board 4170 and is used to output drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. Door-side motor drive data is sent from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, and is used to drive frame decoration to output drive signals to the electrical drive source provided in the door frame 3. Sends data from the serial I/O port for the amplifier board motor to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and to the multiple LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board from the serial I/O port for the LED through the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Send it to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch provided in the production operation unit 400 for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation section 401 and a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation section 405 is transmitted. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and this serialized production operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for detecting the production operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized movable object detection data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and is input from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

As explained above, in the game machine of this embodiment, events that occur during a game are recorded as a game history according to commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Events can be analyzed later (for example, after the hall has closed) to understand the performance and malfunctions of gaming machines. Furthermore, since the gaming history is stored in a non-volatile memory (SRAM to which backup power is input), the gaming history can be checked even after restarting the gaming machine.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, various information is recorded together with the time of occurrence, as shown in FIGS. 117, 118, etc. For example, if you enter the starting winning slot 1, (1) the fact that you entered the starting winning slot 1, (2) the time you entered the starting winning slot 1, (3) before you entered the starting winning slot 1. More information, such as events that have occurred, is stored inside the pachinko machine 1 than the information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. 112. This means that when a prize is won in the starting winning slot, the minimum necessary information (information indicating the fact that the winning opening has been won in (1) above) is output from the external terminal board 784, and in special cases (for example, an error occurs). This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be checked when investigating the cause of the error. This is because if all of the information stored internally is output from the external terminal board 784 when a prize is entered into the starting prize opening, the amount of information regarding the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will increase, which may place a burden on the hall. It is from. In other words, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and a part of the information recorded inside is transmitted to the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal board 784. The information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be checked in special cases by outputting the information to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

[10-2. Compact proposal 1]
Next, a modification of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game history will be described. Note that some of the modified examples described below partially change the embodiment described above, and form a part of the embodiment.

In the embodiment described above, the event (command type) that occurred and the date and time of event occurrence were recorded for a predetermined command among the commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is limited, and it is difficult to record all of the huge amount of events that occur during the game over a long period of time. For this reason, in modification 1 (compact plan 1), changes in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events occurring in the state are recorded.

FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table of Modification 1.

In the game history recording condition setting table of modification 1, commands to be recorded as the game history are defined separately into commands for counting and commands that trigger state changes, and commands for which attributes of both are set are defined. There is also. Note that the countable information column and the obtainable state change column are provided for the convenience of explanation; if the game history recording condition setting table is implemented in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is sufficient. .

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute to be counted is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered the issuance of the command as a result of command analysis. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the state of the game history recorded in the memory as a result of command analysis, and creates a record for counting the number of events. Add.

For example, the power-on command, the status command at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot OP command, the destination command at the end of the jackpot operation, and the error display command are commands that are issued depending on the state change. It can be grasped as a change in state such as the start of a jackpot state, the end of a jackpot state, and the occurrence of an error state.

Also, using a counting command, the number of events that triggered the issuing of the counting command is counted. Specifically, with the starting opening 1 winning command and the starting opening 2 winning command, the number of winning balls to each starting opening can be counted. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of changes in each special symbol. The grand prize opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the grand winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) can count the number of winning balls into each grand prize opening. The grand prize opening 1 winning command (less than the specified number of prizes) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (less than the specified number of winnings) can count the number of rounds that ended with the specified number of winnings or less. The big prize opening 1 winning command (larger than the stipulated winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the stipulated winning) can count the number of rounds that have ended in excess of the stipulated number of winnings (that is, over-winning).

The small hit OP command can count the number of small wins. The normal symbol stop command can count the number of variations in the normal symbol. The general game gate passage command can obtain the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section. The error display command can count the number of errors that have occurred. The general winning hole 1 winning command, the general winning hole 2 winning command, and the general winning hole 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls into each general winning hole.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 1.

The game history of modification 1 includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurred, and the state from a predetermined starting point. This includes the cumulative number of count events detected until the end of the event (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (from the previous state change event to the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the time point at which the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is initialized. The counting events are recorded separately in five states: low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/no time saving state, high probability/non time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. The status may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 1 will be explained. In the game history shown in FIG. 122, the counting events include the number of winnings in starting hole 1, the number of winnings in starting hole 2, the number of changes in special symbol 1, the number of changes in special symbol 2, the number of wins in general winning hole 1, the number of wins in general winning hole 2, The number of wins in the general winning hole 3, the number of wins in the big winning hole 1, the number of wins in the big winning hole 2, the number of gate passes, and the number of normal symbol changes are recorded. Note that the number of events other than those shown may be counted.

Two bytes are sufficient for storing the cumulative number of each counting event. In particular, data that is not derived very frequently and whose cumulative number does not increase (for example, the number of winnings from general winning openings) may be 1 byte, and other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the data in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or in the order of 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing 1 byte data and 2 byte data.

Furthermore, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. The counting event after the state change is then recorded in a new record.

Note that the counting results of the counting events in the current state are preferably recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state changes. Note that a new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created in response to a state change, but a new record may be created at the start of a period in which counting events are counted. In this case, even if no data is stored in the created new record while the counting event is being counted, 0 may be stored as the initial value. Also, a new record may be created at the end of the period in which counting events are counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting results of counting events for the relevant period are stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and the data recorded in the work area is stored. The numerical values are added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, if the number of counting events detected during the relevant state (from the previous state change event to the relevant state change event) is recorded as the game history, the counted value of the counting event is stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in history storage area.

That is, each time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up in the event of a power outage. , will be initialized by a normal RAM clear operation. Specifically, for example, in a low probability/non-time-saving state, the game history information in which the number of winnings in the starting winning hole 1 is 50 is recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko game of modification 1. In machine 1, after the gaming state changes, it is recorded in the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. In other words, unless the gaming state changes, no gaming history is recorded in the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and the RAM is cleared while the probability is low and the time is not saved, the number of winnings of 50 will be initialized to 0.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written into the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the counted value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Furthermore, even if the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is preferable to execute the game history recording process. In this case, it is not necessary to continue recording the game history in the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current state, and store the cumulative number of counted events from the peripheral control RAM 1511c to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Alternatively, the game history (cumulative number of counting events) in the oldest state may be deleted and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately previous state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free space status of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced each time. can. Furthermore, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the most recent game history can be checked.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the execution of wasteful processes and reduce the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511.

As explained above, in the first modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (number of winnings, number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state between the switching is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification is characterized in that more information is recorded internally than the information output from the external terminal board 784.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state, and if the game state does not change, the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is Information (gaming history) is not written. In other words, if fraud is committed in a state where no new record is created in the gaming history storage area (while the same gaming state continues), it may be difficult to discover the fraud. As mentioned above, in order to analyze the information (gaming history) written in the memory, the hall can check the information written in the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, but in the pachinko machine 1 of modification example 1, Since information is not written to the gaming history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d unless the gaming state changes, the current state information (gaming history) cannot be confirmed even if the information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Even in such cases, a check function may be provided to detect fraud at an early stage.

Specifically, a first record (latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the gaming history of the most recent state is recorded and a second record (record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the gaming history of the current state is recorded. If the comparison result satisfies a predetermined condition, an error may be notified.

For example, in a pachinko machine 1 that performs a so-called right-handed game in which the game ball is fired in a rolling manner on the right side of the gaming area 5a in a high probability/time saving state or a jackpot gaming state, there is a transition from a high probability/time saving state to a jackpot gaming state. However, if the state changes to the high probability/time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, even if the state changes, the player is usually hitting the right hand, so the possibility of winning in the general prize opening on the left side of the game area 5a is low. Extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings in the general winning opening is compared between the jackpot game state and the subsequent high probability/time saving state, and if a difference is detected, an error may be notified. It is preferable that the allowable value of the difference in the number of winning balls entered into the general winning hole between states is one, and if a difference of two or more occurs, an error is reported. This is because if the player takes his hand off the shooting handle, the shooting force may become uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

Instead of error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from an external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. 112. The above-mentioned early fraud detection check function detects errors by predicting the game based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, it is likely to hit right because it is in a high probability/time saving state), so inexperienced players can There is a possibility that an error will be detected if you hit the ball in an unexpected manner. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, but only output a security signal from the external terminal board 784, without informing the player. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error from a distance from the pachinko machine 1 without the players noticing, and troubles with players can be prevented.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[10-3. Compact proposal 2]
In the above-mentioned modification 1, among the commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded in the state change event, and the number of counting events in each state during the switching is recorded. was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of state that repeatedly occurs. Therefore, in the second modification (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 121) as in the first modification.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 2.

As shown in FIG. 123, the game history of Modification 2 is composed of a state event history and the cumulative number of each counted event for each state. The state event history includes a state change event that triggered a state change of the pachinko machine 1, a state after the state change event, and a time when the state change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of the second modification, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states: low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. Ru. The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in Modification 2 include the number of winnings in starting opening 1 (starting opening 1 winning command), the number of starting opening 2 winnings (command when starting opening 2 winning), and the special Number of variations in symbol 1 (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of variations in special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 symbol type command), number of general winning openings 1 winnings (general winning opening 1 winning command), number of winnings in general winning opening 2 (general Winning slot 2 winning command), General winning slot 3 winnings command (General winning opening 3 winning command), Big winning slot 1 winning command (Big winning opening 1 winning command), Big winning slot 2 winning number (Big winning opening 2 winning command) ), the number of gate passages (normal pattern gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (normal pattern stop command).

Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are recorded separately may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be explained. In the game history shown in FIG. 123, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by a state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in nonvolatile memory, and the counting event described above is performed in accordance with the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state changes, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the relevant state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is preferable to add the recorded values and store them in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Therefore, the counting results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power outage, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written into the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As explained above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting events for each type of state (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) are recorded, so the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is Long gaming history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the device.

[10-4. Compact proposal 3]
In the above-mentioned modification 2, among the commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded as a state change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded. However, the timing of state switching may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each state type. Therefore, in modification 3 (compact plan 3), the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In the third modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 121) as in the first modification.

In the third modification, the same event as the event recorded in the first modification is recorded using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 3.

As shown in FIG. 124, the game history of Modification 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counted events in each state. Furthermore, the game history of Modification 3 includes the cumulative time of each state. The reason why the cumulative time is included is to enable the hole to estimate the number of occurrences of an event (for example, the number of jackpots, etc.) from the cumulative time. There are five states in which counting events are recorded separately: low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state, but they can be further subdivided. Counting events may also be recorded.

The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in Modification 3 are the number of winnings in starting opening 1 (starting opening 1 winning command), the number of starting opening 2 winnings (command when starting opening 2 winning), and the special Number of variations in symbol 1 (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of variations in special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 symbol type command), number of general winning openings 1 winnings (general winning opening 1 winning command), number of winnings in general winning opening 2 (general Winning slot 2 winning command), General winning slot 3 winnings command (General winning opening 3 winning command), Big winning slot 1 winning command (Big winning opening 1 winning command), Big winning slot 2 winning number (Big winning opening 2 winning command) ), the number of gate passages (normal pattern gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (normal pattern stop command). Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be explained. In the game history shown in FIG. 124, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of the aforementioned counting events is recorded in accordance with the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state changes, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the relevant state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is preferable to add the recorded values and store them in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power outage, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written into the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As explained above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting events for each type of state (number of winnings, number of changes, etc.) are recorded, so the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is Long gaming history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the device.

As explained above, in Modifications 1 to 3, when an event occurs by the game history recording process, it is recorded once in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c), and when the conditions for writing it in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are met. Then, the data in the work area is written to the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Further, in a normal RAM clear operation, the information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but the information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Let me briefly touch on hall operations here. In many cases, halls have set business hours, for example, opening time is 10:00 and closing time is 23:00. Therefore, during times when there are many players, such as when the store has just opened or in the evening, it may be difficult for store staff to monitor whether the players are playing illegally. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of players decreases, and if there is a pachinko machine in a high-probability, time-saving state just before closing time, the pachinko machine in a high-probability, time-saving state is initialized in preparation for the next day's operation, and the pachinko machine in a low-probability, time-saving state is initialized. It may be in a non-time saving state. In this case, since the number of players is small, it is possible to monitor pachinko machines that are in a high-probability/time-saving state, so it can be seen whether the most recent games have been fraudulent. In other words, considering the fact that there are some pachinko machines that do not require the most recent gaming history, it is possible to provide a more efficient gaming machine by allowing the clerk to choose whether to leave the most recent information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by performing a ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for events that occurred after the most recent event is erased, and the game history is stored for events that occurred before the most recent event. The game history stored in the area remains. In other words, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, the information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and the information recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The gaming history is recorded separately. By doing this, if you want to keep a record of all events recorded in the work area, the clerk only has to cause a change in the state of the pachinko machine, and if you want to erase the record of events recorded in the work area, The clerk only needs to perform the ram clear operation. The reason why we decided to use the RAM clear operation to delete only the gaming history stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the most recent event, rather than erasing all the gaming history, is because the RAM clear operation does not erase all gaming history. This is because the store staff has not seen the events that have occurred up to that point (because there are many players, they cannot see them).

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in addition to recording the information that a prize has been won in the starting prize opening, the winnings in the general prize opening that are unrelated to the lottery are also recorded in the work area. Even if the symbol (a symbol that starts fluctuating when it enters the starting winning slot and indicates the lottery result of winning or losing when the symbol stops) does not fluctuate, while the game ball is being launched into the gaming area 5a. is characterized by collecting gaming history. In other words, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed in response to a winning or losing lottery, but is a process that may be executed at all times while power is being supplied to the pachinko machine.

In addition, in a low probability/non-time-saving state, the game ball is fired so that the game ball enters the starting prize opening 2002, like so-called left-handed hitting or short-handed hitting. In such a case, a moderate amount of winnings should be made to the starting winning hole 2002 and the general winning hole 2001. However, there are cases where there is no (or very few) winnings in the general winning hole 2001 but many game balls are winning in the starting winning hole 2002, or conversely, there are no winnings in the starting winning hole 2002 (or, However, if many game balls are won in the general winning hole 2001, there is a possibility that fraud is being committed. Therefore, the first winning hole and the second winning hole where game balls win at the same time are set as monitoring targets, and the number of winnings in the first winning hole is a predetermined multiplier of the number of winnings in the second winning hole. An error may be reported when the limit exceeds the limit.

Further, instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784. With the above-mentioned detection method, there is a possibility that an error will be detected if an inexperienced player plays in an unexpected manner. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, but only output a security signal from the external terminal board 784, without informing the player. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error from a distance from the pachinko machine 1 without the players noticing, and troubles with players can be prevented.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is also characterized in that information accumulated over a plurality of games is collected as a game history. There is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded, so if you record every single game (one change), you won't be able to record many games (for a long time). There is.

[11. Game performance setting function]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has a setting function for changing the operating ratio of the condition device, for example, as a game performance.

[11-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 125 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section, FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having a setting section as seen from the back side with the door open, and FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126 viewed from the back side with the door closed, and FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a setting section of the Pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 125 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operating state of each switch and controls the display on the setting display 974.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 128(A), the setting board 970 includes a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting mode, a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value, and a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value. A setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the set value set, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected set value are provided. The settings board 970 functions as a settings change operation unit that accepts settings change operations.

In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control unit 952. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the payout control section 952. The finalized settings are transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310. Note that, as described later, the main control board 1310 may control components on the setting board 970.

The setting key 971 maintains the short-circuited or open state of the contacts by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and turning the key to the setting position, and generates a signal that triggers a change to the setting mode. This is a switch that outputs . Note that instead of providing the setting key 971, another switch may be used. In this case, by operating (holding down) the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer, the setting mode is started, and by holding down the setting change switch 972 during the setting mode, the setting mode is ended. Good too.

Further, the setting mode may be started and ended by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and then continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Furthermore, the setting mode may be ended by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 during the setting mode.

In this way, even an employee who does not have a key for the setting key 971 can change the settings, making it easier to handle the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation at the falling edge of the setting change switch 972.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select setting values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value increases by 1, and when the setting change switch 972 is operated when the set value=6, the set value becomes 1. Note that the setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. Note that the set value is not limited to 6 levels, but may be set to a smaller number (for example, 2 levels) or a larger number (eg, 8 levels).

Further, the setting change switch 972 may not be provided, and the setting key 971 may also serve as the setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three stages; in the neutral position (normal position), the key can be inserted and removed; turning it to the left is the operation to start the setting mode; turning it to the right is the setting value to be set. (When turned to the right, it functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation that can hold the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation that does not hold the right position (returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

The set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the winning probability of the special symbol), and the set value = 1 has a low winning probability, and the set value = 6 has a high winning probability. In addition, depending on the setting value, the percentage of variable jackpot, the percentage of time saving (ST) after jackpot, the number of time saving, the number of rounds and counts of jackpot, the probability of winning a regular pattern, general winning opening, starting winning opening, and big winning opening. The number of prize balls that the player can acquire may be changed by changing various parameters related to the game, such as the number of prize balls.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. It is preferable that the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 be configured with switches having different operating methods (operating directions) and shapes so as to avoid operating both switches by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be configured as a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured as a momentary type toggle switch.

Note that the selected setting may be confirmed by returning the setting key 971 to the normal position without providing the setting confirmation switch 973. Alternatively, the selected setting value may be determined based on the operation of other switches or sensors provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 caused by touching the handle lever 504, the operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, the operation of the performance operation button 220C, the operation of the ball rental The selected setting may be determined by operating a button, operating a return button, detecting winning of a game ball into the starting winning openings 2002, 2004, or the like. The operation unit substituting the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for playing games) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

In other words, in the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is provided with three switches (including a setting key) in order to set the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1, but the setting board 970 is provided with one or two switches. It is enough to set it up.

Further, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may not be provided, and the setting change operation may be performed only with the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and then continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch 972, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) during the setting mode, and instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, the RAM clear switch 954 The set value can be determined by operating (long press) for a predetermined time or longer. Further, the setting mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

The setting display 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and displays the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating the setting key 971). . Note that the setting display 974 may be configured with a settable number of LEDs instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type display by a 7-segment LED that displays the type of payout error, but this error type display and the setting display 974 are also used, The selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the error type display and the setting value display can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dot may be lit when displaying the setting value. Further, the error type may be displayed by a lighting display (not blinking), and the setting value may be displayed by a blinking display.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but it may be connected to a power board (not shown) in the power board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 alongside the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and power switch 932, which are operated when changing settings, are placed close together, making it easier to change settings. can be improved.

Further, as described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

In still another form, the setting board 970 may be configured not as an independent board but as a part of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on either the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 126, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, on the frame side, not on the game board 5), and as shown in FIG. When the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, at least a portion of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so it is difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. In this way, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971, obstructs insertion of the key into the keyhole of the setting key 971, and makes it difficult to change settings by making it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation unit). It functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting board 970 can be set while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (that is, while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5). By making it difficult to operate the board 970, it is possible to prevent players from cheating by changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

In the illustrated example, the member that faces the setting board 970 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5 (the means for making it difficult to change settings) is the right frame member 40, but it may be any other member. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 5 may be disposed at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5, the cover may be disposed at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. .

The setting change difficulty device configured by a member provided facing the setting board 970 may be a cover that covers the setting board 970. In this case, it is preferable to cover the setting key 971, which is the trigger for starting the setting mode, with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in a setting board case, and the setting board case includes a first cover that prevents careless operation of the setting key 971 and each switch 972, 973 (at least the setting key 971). A body (for example, a door-like lid body that can be opened during operation) is provided. Further, a second cover body is provided on the outer frame 5 to cover various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310. Note that the second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 2 to cover various control boards. In this way, it is possible to prevent the setting mode from being started due to careless operations, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent actions by unauthorized players who change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces members such as the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5 is the distance between the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head held during operation). ) should be shorter than the length of

It is preferable to arrange the setting board 970 near the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 operated when changing settings and the power switch 932 are arranged close to each other. In this way, the operability when starting the setting mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is provided with a power switch 932 for initializing the game control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided to clear the RAM. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game but can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are It is located in a position where it can be seen and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and setting confirmation switch 973) is provided in a position that is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated during the manufacturing process, so they are provided at a position where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, thereby suppressing fraudulent acts of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current setting values of the pachinko machine 1 are important information for the player to select a machine, it is desirable that the current settings are not known to the player. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 127, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 is also preferably opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Note that normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off to prevent the player from knowing the setting value. This is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility obscuring means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to see the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display section).

FIG. 128(B) is a top view of the setting board 970 with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, so the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, causing the setting key 971 to Key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not located in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971, and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1, and faces the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, so that it is viewed from the front by the player. It has become difficult to check the current settings of a pachinko machine.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a modification of the setting board 970.

In this modification, as in the above-described example, a setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. However, in this modification, the setting key 971 is arranged horizontally on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

Therefore, the setting board 970 of this modification is installed on the back side of the main body frame 4, not on the side side, so that the keyhole faces the side surface. As shown in FIG. 129(B), when viewing the setting board 970 from above, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the side surface (i.e., the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is located in the right frame member 40. Since the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

In the modification shown in FIG. 129, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as other boards, and even if the difficulty of board arrangement is reduced, the setting board 970 can be operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, a modification of a pachinko machine having a setting section will be described. In this modification, a setting board 970 is provided on the game board 5 instead of the main body frame 4, and is connected to the main control board 1310.

FIG. 130 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this modification, FIG. 131 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting section viewed from behind, and FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine equipped with the game board shown in FIG.

The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting board 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 128(A) or the one shown in FIG. 129(A).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 130, a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operating state of each switch. controls the display on the setting display 974.

The functions and configurations of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as in the embodiments described above, and common explanations will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. For this reason, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used, and the selected setting value and the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317. The base display 1317 normally displays the base value of the provisional section (the section currently being measured) and the base value of the confirmed section (straight section) while switching at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, in the setting mode, the selected (next set) setting value is displayed, and while the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 152), the current setting value is displayed.

In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, four digits are used to display the base value, but only one predetermined digit (eg, the rightmost digit) may be used to display the set value, and "-" may be displayed. Digits that are not used in displaying set values may be displayed with other numbers, letters, or symbols instead of "-" as long as they are not used in displaying base values. Furthermore, when displaying the set value, characters that are not used in displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the setting values are displayed in six alphabetical stages: A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Further, in the setting mode, it is preferable that the setting value be displayed blinking while the setting value is being selected, and that the set value that has been determined may be displayed lit. In addition, it is preferable to display the current set value by lighting it up. Furthermore, in the base display, the first two digits represent the type of display data, and no numbers are displayed. Therefore, the setting value may be displayed using the most significant digit. Note that when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the setting value is displayed with priority during the setting mode and during setting confirmation, so although the base value is being calculated, the base value is not displayed. . Thereafter, when the setting mode and setting value confirmation are completed, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base value.

In other words, even if the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is used also as the base display 1317, both cases fall within the scope of the invention described in this specification. In this way, by displaying the plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 in a way that is not confusing while checking the setting mode and setting values, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations or misidentification of setting values when changing settings.

Further, even if the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not used together, the base display 1317 may be turned off or turned on completely while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, when the setting mode and setting value confirmation are completed, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base value. By not displaying multiple displays on the main control board box 1320 while checking the setting mode or setting values, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations or misidentification of setting values when changing settings.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may be formed as a part of the main control board 1310 instead of being an independent board. That is, the main control board 1310 may include a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974.

The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes and cutouts for operating the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening/closing direction, differs depending on the orientation of the keyhole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted perpendicularly into the board from the front of the board, the main control board box 1320 is separated perpendicularly to the setting board 970 between the front and back sides of the setting board 970, or the main control board box 1320 is separated into a front side box ( Alternatively, the cover) and the backside box may be structured so that they can be opened and closed using a hinge on one side. On the other hand, when inserting the key 975 from the side in the direction in which the board extends, the main control board box 1320 is inserted in the direction in which the setting board 970 extends by using the front side box (or cover) and the back side box of the setting board 970. It is preferable to have a structure in which the key 975 is slid and separated in the direction in which the key 975 is inserted.

In this modification, operation signals of the setting key 971, setting change switch 972, and setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

As shown in FIG. 131, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side (left side in FIG. 131) of the game board 5 that constitutes the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. When the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, at least a portion of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the space between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the keys on the setting board 970 and The switch is difficult to operate. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the setting board 970 can be set while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (that is, while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5). Fraudulent acts such as changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the board 970 can be suppressed.

In the illustrated example, the member that faces the setting board 970 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5 (the means for making it difficult to change settings) is the right frame member 40, but it may be any other member. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 5 may be disposed at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5, the cover may be disposed at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. .

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces members such as the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5 is the distance between the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head held during operation). ) should be shorter than the length of

Further, as shown in FIG. 132, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is provided with a power switch 932 for initializing the game control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided to clear the RAM. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game but can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are It is located in a position where it can be seen and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and setting confirmation switch 973) is provided in a position that is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated during the manufacturing process, so they are provided at a position where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, thereby suppressing fraudulent acts of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current setting values of the pachinko machine 1 are important information for the player to select a machine, it is desirable that the current settings are not known to the player. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 132, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 is also preferably opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Note that normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off to prevent the player from knowing the setting value. This is desirable. In this manner, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility obscuring means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to see the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display section).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 130, a top view of the setting board 970 with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIG. 128(B) and FIG. 129(B). . In this state, the keyholes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 with a narrow interval, so the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1, and faces the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, so that it is viewed from the front by the player. It is no longer possible to check the current settings of the pachinko machine.

Next, processing related to setting changes will be explained.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. The initialization process shown in FIG. 133 is different from the initialization process described above in FIG. The difference is that setting change processing is performed in S28). Note that the same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIG. 21 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and checks whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the setting value data and the gaming state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, prize balls) (information related to) is left and other data is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, data in areas other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24 Proceed to. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power outage flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). , proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power outage flag has been set, the power outage flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 and the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power shutoff are used in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area ( (other than the base calculation area 13128) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased and step S24 Proceed to.

Next, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the cases where at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized include the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the setting of the power outage flag. There are an abnormality in the power failure flag that has not been executed (step S20), a RAM abnormality in which the checksum of the RAM does not match (step S22), and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Among these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the setting value and the gaming state are (For example, the probability change state, time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information regarding prize balls) are left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or if there is a power failure flag error or RAM error, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area is cleared. Area 13128 (including the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation) is not cleared. Further, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is cleared, but the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike what is shown in the figure, in the case of a power outage flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, or base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed. You may also clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the gaming status will be lost and normal processing will not be possible.If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation are It is best to initialize only Additionally, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. No need to clear.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is divided into data types (gaming control area 13126 (setting values, gaming state data), base calculation area 13126, Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the setting value is erased, but the setting value and base calculation area 13128 is not erased. This is because if the set values are erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set values each time the RAM clearing operation is performed, making maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall complicated. Therefore, the set values are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of a process (steps S50, S52) of calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

134 and 135 are flowcharts showing examples of setting change processing and setting display processing, and FIG. 134 shows a setting board 970 connected to a payout control board 951 (or configured integrally with a payout control board 951 FIG. 135 shows the process when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or is configured integrally with the main control board 1310).

First, a setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 134(A) cooperate will be described.

When the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the dispensing control unit 952 starts the setting mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permission state generating means. Conditions for starting the setting mode other than those described above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 caused by touching the handle lever 504, and insertion of a prepaid card into the CR unit (prepaid card ), the setting mode does not need to be started if there is a balance deposited in the cash sand. Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some sort of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting mode. These conditions may be determined by the main control MPU 1311 instead of the payout control unit 952 after receiving the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the pachinko parlor, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is about to perform a setting change operation, so it is better not to shift to the setting mode.

(2) When the setting mode starts, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change start command to the main control board 1310.

(3) Upon receiving the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing before setting change. The RAM clearing process before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), where the game status (for example, probability change status, time saving status, special symbol and normal symbol retention storage) , information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. Note that since the set value will be set to the initial value later in step (6), it is not necessary to clear it in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that it is in the setting mode. The notification during the setting mode includes performing the initial operation of the accessory and performing a predetermined display on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not need to perform the initial motion of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure and status of setting changes on the liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial movement of a role model is performed while the settings are being changed, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1600 will be partially hidden, and the setting change process will be delayed. This is because it interferes with

Moreover, in accordance with the notification of the setting mode by the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting mode. For example, the progress of the game may be stopped by displaying the function display unit 1400 in a special manner that does not appear during normal gaming (for example, all LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or turned on). . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, no base value is calculated in the configuration mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the firing permission signal, stops firing the game balls controlled by the firing control device, and functions as a firing disabling means, even when notifying the setting mode. good. When stopping the shooting of the game ball during the setting mode, the shooting of the game ball during the shooting stop period may be treated as an error, and an error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period.

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As mentioned above, the setting value can be selected between 1 and 6, and when the setting value is 0, no settings are made, and when the setting value is 0, the setting mode cannot be exited, and the game (game ball launch) is not possible. , variable display games, etc.) do not start.

(7) Thereafter, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Although opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in step (1) described above, the determination may be made at least once before determining whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permission state generating means that determines whether the conditions for setting change are met before the setting change is finalized.

(9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value is confirmed. is displayed on the setting display 974. The setting value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as a setting value (for example, 8), or may display a fixed setting value blinking for a predetermined period of time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting mode is ended, so the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. This setting change end command notifies the main control MPU 1311 of the finalized setting value.

(13) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, it ends the notification that the settings are being changed. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 is notifying that settings are being changed, this also ends.

Note that the notification (including stopping the game and stopping firing) may be canceled immediately after the setting mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered to be a simple notification to the outside (players, hall employees), it is preferable to cancel the notification immediately after the setting mode ends. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is viewed from the perspective of detecting fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting mode ends and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This is because when a setting change is made, a specified display is displayed for a specified period of time or the game stops, making it easier to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the firing of game balls is stopped for a predetermined period after the setting mode ends, the firing of game balls during the firing stop period is treated as an error, and if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period, an error is detected. You can.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing after the setting change. The RAM clearing process after this setting change is performed on the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the setting value and the game status (for example, probability variable status, time saving status, special symbol or normal symbol). (reservation memory, information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the gaming area) is not cleared. In other words, in the RAM clearing process after the settings are changed, the setting values are not initialized, unlike the RAM clearing process before the settings are changed.

Then, the setting mode is ended.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the payout control board 951) , the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate to execute the setting change process.

In addition, in the process described above, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may also determine. In this case, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 may be transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (pulses of a predetermined frequency a predetermined number of times), or a power supply voltage However, a signal at an intermediate potential other than the ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent unauthorized acts such as shorting the terminals of the setting key 971 and activating the setting mode, the control unit 952 sends a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 to the main control board using a signal that cannot be generated by shorting the terminals. This is because it is preferable to transmit to 1310.

Next, a setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 134(B) cooperate will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (power is on), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

(2) When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting value request command to the main control board 1310.

(3) Upon receiving the setting value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads the setting value stored in the main control RAM 1312, and transmits a setting value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout control unit 952 displays the setting value notified by the setting value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display 974.

Note that in the above, the setting values stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) are displayed on the setting display 974, but the payout control unit 952 stores the setting values, and the setting values are stored in the payout control unit 952. The set values may be displayed on the setting display 974.

Next, a setting change process by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 135(A) will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as a setting change permission state generating means. Whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch. The detection signal of the main body frame opening switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may transmit a main body frame open detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch. Moreover, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting mode. Conditions for starting the setting mode other than those described above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 caused by touching the handle lever 504, and insertion of a prepaid card into the CR unit (prepaid card ), the setting mode does not need to be started if there is a balance deposited in the cash sand. Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some sort of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting mode. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by the pachinko parlor, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is about to perform a setting change operation, so it is better not to shift to the setting mode.

(3) When the setting mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 receives a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, and executes RAM clear processing before setting change. The RAM clearing process before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the game status (for example, probability change status, time saving status, special symbol and normal symbol retention storage). , information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. Note that since the set value will be set to the initial value later in step (6), it is not necessary to clear it in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that it is in the setting mode. The notification during the setting mode includes performing the initial operation of the accessory and performing a predetermined display on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not need to perform the initial motion of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure and status of setting changes on the liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial movement of a role model is performed while the settings are being changed, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1600 will be partially hidden, and the setting change process will be delayed. This is because it interferes with

Moreover, in accordance with the notification of the setting mode by the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting mode. For example, the progress of the game may be stopped by displaying the function display unit 1400 in a special manner that does not appear during normal gaming (for example, turning off or lighting up all the LEDs for displaying special symbols). . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, no base value is calculated in the configuration mode. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the firing permission signal, stops firing the game balls controlled by the firing control device, and functions as a firing disabling means, even when notifying the setting mode. good. When stopping the shooting of the game ball during the setting mode, the shooting of the game ball during the shooting stop period may be treated as an error, and an error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period.

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As mentioned above, the setting value can be selected between 1 and 6, and when the setting value is 0, no settings are made, and when the setting value is 0, the setting mode cannot be exited, and the game (game ball launch) is not possible. , variable display games, etc.) do not start.

(7) Thereafter, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Although opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in step (1) described above, the determination may be made at least once before determining whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. In this way, the payout control unit 952 performs a setting change that determines whether the conditions for the setting change are met (in particular, whether the detection signal of the main body frame opening switch is input from the payout control board 951) before the setting change is finalized. It functions as a permissible state generating means.

(9) Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value is confirmed. Displayed on the setting display 974. The setting value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as a setting value (for example, 8), or may display a fixed setting value blinking for a predetermined period of time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting mode is ended, so the main control MPU 1311 sends a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, it ends the notification that the settings are being changed. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 is notifying that settings are being changed, this also ends.

Note that the notification (including stopping the game and stopping firing) may be canceled immediately after the setting mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered to be a simple notification to the outside (players, hall employees), it is preferable to cancel the notification immediately after the setting mode ends. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is viewed from the perspective of detecting fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting mode ends and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This is because when a setting change is made, a specified display is displayed for a specified period of time or the game stops, making it easier to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the firing of game balls is stopped for a predetermined period after the setting mode ends, the firing of game balls during the firing stop period is treated as an error, and if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period, an error is detected. You can.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing after the setting change. The RAM clearing process after this setting change is performed on the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the setting value and the game status (for example, probability variable status, time saving status, special symbol or normal symbol). (reservation memory, information regarding prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the gaming area) is not cleared. In other words, in the RAM clearing process after the settings are changed, the setting values are not initialized, unlike the RAM clearing process before the settings are changed.

Then, the setting mode is ended.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the main control board 1310) Since the main control board 1310 acquires the main body frame release switch detection signal from the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 alone cannot execute the setting change process, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate. The settings change process is being executed.

Next, a setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 135(B) cooperate will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (power is on), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Note that considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so the determination of whether the main body frame 4 is open may be omitted. .

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads the setting value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays it on the setting display 974.

In the setting change process described in FIGS. 134(A) and 135(A), if the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting mode, it is preferable to invalidate the setting mode and temporarily stop the setting mode. Then, by turning off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and turning it on again, the stopped setting mode is restarted. The setting mode may be restarted from the stage where it was stopped due to error detection, or from the beginning of the setting mode (setting value in a state where no setting value is selected = 0).

It is preferable to record a history of changes to set values a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the settings were finalized and the finalized setting values are stored in the main control RAM 1312 or the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511. When storing the history of setting values in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. Furthermore, the recorded history of setting value changes can be output. For example, the recorded history of setting value changes may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

When the set value is changed, the measurement interval of the base value may be changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of pitches out in the section in which the base value is currently being measured is less than 52,000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the gaming performance of the gaming machine changes depending on the setting value, by changing the interval by changing the setting value, it is possible to calculate a base value that does not mix different gaming performance, and it is possible to understand the change in the base value due to the change of the setting value. .

Furthermore, when the set value is changed, the interval in which the base value is currently being measured may be continued without changing the interval for measuring the base value. Although the set value changes the operating ratio of the conditioner, it is also possible to design the base value so that it does not change significantly by changing the set value. This is because in such a case, there is no need to change the interval for calculating the base value by changing the set value.

Furthermore, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting mode may be activated. Compared to turning on the RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971, considering the operation method and arrangement of the operating means, operating the setting key 971 is less likely to be accidentally operated, so starting the setting mode is This is because it is considered to be the intention of the operator. In addition, in the setting mode, the contents of the main control RAM 1312 other than the gaming state and base value are cleared, so even if you wish to clear the RAM, it is considered that starting the setting mode is sufficient.

On the other hand, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without starting the setting mode. This is because if both are being operated, it is considered that the operator wishes to at least clear the RAM. Furthermore, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to start the setting mode or clear the RAM. This is because from the viewpoint of file safety against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations for which the intention of the operator is not clear.

In clearing the RAM in steps (3) and (15) described above, the gaming state data is maintained, but the reserved memory of special symbols may be erased. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, the random number determination result of the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved memory of the special symbols and perform a new lottery.

On the other hand, the drawing of special symbols (extraction of winning random numbers) is carried out when the game ball enters the starting winning slot, but the judgment of the drawing result is carried out at the start of the variable display game, so the conditions after changing the setting value It is sufficient to judge the random value stored in the hold memory. For this reason, a reserved memory of special symbols may be maintained.

Furthermore, in the RAM clearing of steps (3) and (15) described above, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area that is erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clearing process during the setting mode, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the setting value is erased (also erasing gaming state data), but the setting value and base calculation area 13128 is not erased. Normally, settings changes are made between the time the hall closes and the next day's opening, so data on gaming conditions (variable probability state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, information about prize balls, etc.) will be erased. There is no need to maintain it without doing so.

[11-2. Effects on pachinko machines with setting functions]
[11-2-1. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
The details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described below. First, the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be explained. FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of special symbol and special electric accessory control processing. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 will also be collectively referred to as starting ports. In addition, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are collectively referred to simply as the big winning hole. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to simply as a special symbol.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, the acceptance of a game ball into the starting hole, that is, the starting prize is triggered (starting condition is met), and a jackpot is achieved for each starting memory information (starting information) where this starting condition is satisfied. A random number for determination is obtained, and it is determined whether this random number for determining a jackpot matches a jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on the lottery results, and if the random number for jackpot matches the jackpot judgment value (predetermined winning conditions are met), the normal To shift from a game state to a jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be explained along the flowchart shown in FIG. 136.

When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won in the big winning hole (step S100). When the game ball B wins in the grand prize opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a grand prize opening prize designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the starting hole (step S112). Whether or not a game ball has entered the starting hole is determined by checking the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002 or the second starting hole sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process. This is performed based on the input information read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Main control MPU1311, when the game ball wins in the starting hole (result of step S114 is "yes"), executes the starting hole winning process (step S116). In the starting hole winning process, you can set the starting hole winning command that is sent when a new game ball enters the starting hole, extract random numbers for jackpot determination, etc. and store them in a predetermined area, and create special symbols. It executes processing for executing a look-ahead effect.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a corresponding process based on the special symbol/electric accessory operation number, which is a game progress state variable that specifies the type of branch process to be executed according to the progress of the game (step S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process moves to a branch process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the branch process that has been moved is finished, special symbols and special electric accessories are controlled. Finish the process. Note that the values of game progress state variables and the like stored in the game progress state storage area are game information, so they are backed up in the main control side power-off processing.

In the process of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, branch processes include special symbol change waiting process (step S130), special symbol variation process (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), Special symbol missing stop process (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop process (step S138), interval process before opening the big winning hole (step S140), big winning hole opening process (step S142), big winning hole closing process (step S144) or the big winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), based on the fact that the game ball B enters the starting hole, processing for starting variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device, etc. is performed.

In the special symbol variation process (step S132), processing for controlling the variable display of the special symbol, etc. is performed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting hole, it is determined whether the special symbol that has been fixed and stopped will generate a jackpot game state.

In the special symbol deviation stop processing (step S136), when a jackpot game state is not to be generated, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol and notifying the effect is performed. In the special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), when a jackpot game state is to be generated, processing is performed to stop the variable display of the special symbol and notify that fact.

In the interval process before opening the jackpot opening (step S140), processing for generating a jackpot game state and notifying that the jackpot operation is started is performed. In the big winning hole opening process (step S142), processing related to the jackpot operation that makes it easy for game balls to enter each big winning hole by opening the big winning hole is performed.

In the big winning hole closing process (step S144), processing related to a jackpot operation that makes it difficult for game balls to enter each big winning hole by changing the big winning hole from an open state to a closed state is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the jackpot operation has ended, a process is performed to notify that fact.

[11-2-2. Special symbol change waiting process]
Next, details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be explained. FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of special symbol change waiting processing. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed in a state where the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, and if the variable display is on hold, preparations are made to start the variable display of the special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the variation of the special symbol is pending (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether the number of special symbol activated pending balls is not 0 or not. In addition, the number of special symbol activation reserved balls is stored for each starting port when a plurality of starting ports are provided. If the variation of the special symbol is not pending (the result of step S420 is "no"), the process ends because the display of the variation of the special symbol is not started.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets a command for designating the number of reserved balls as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol/flag setting processing (step S442). In the special symbol/flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on random numbers for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes special symbol variation pattern setting processing (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, the upper byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set as a command value (step S452). Furthermore, the variation pattern value stored in the variation pattern area is set as lower command data (step S458). Furthermore, the fluctuation type type value is acquired from the fluctuation type type area (step S460), and the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern command according to the fluctuation type is added to the command value set in the process of step S452. is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variable pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, a change state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created through the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved pitch number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-3. Special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be explained. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains the number of special symbol activation reserved balls (step S530). The number of special symbol activated pending balls is stored in the special symbol activated pending ball number buffer. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets a jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of special symbol activation pending balls and the jackpot flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern value extracted by the fluctuation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value is searched from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process for selecting a variation type defined in a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The fluctuation type type value acquired by the fluctuation type determination process is set (step S550).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 searches the variation time addition value data corresponding to the variation type type value from the variation time addition value data (step S552). The variation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time depending on the number of pseudo-runs. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the variation time addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference variation time value searched in the process of step S546, and obtains the final variation time (step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol/electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is ended.

[11-2-4. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment process]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols.

The main control MPU 1311 first obtains a variation information source table based on the variation table number (step S340). The variation table number is a value for selecting (obtaining) a variation information source table from the variation information source address table. The fluctuation information source table includes hit (hit fluctuation selection information state table), loss (loss fluctuation selection information state table), reach (reach fluctuation selection information state table), and reach probability (special symbol reach probability) depending on the gaming state etc. This is a data table in which table information for referring to a variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 obtains a winning determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). By determining whether the hit determination value matches the jackpot value, it is determined whether the jackpot has been won (step S350). If the jackpot is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type are acquired (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation information number search process based on the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, a variation information number for determining a winning variation pattern selection value data table is obtained from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 obtains the random number 1 for variation pattern from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the obtained variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 has not won the jackpot or the small jackpot (the result of step S350 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (step S350). S372).

When the reach is not generated in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for fluctuation pattern from the loss fluctuation selection information reservation table based on the number of reserved pitches (step S372). S376).

On the other hand, when generating a reach in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires random number 1 for fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information state table based on the status flag. (Step S382).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation information number search process based on the random number 1 for variation pattern acquired in the process of step S360, step S378, or step S382 (step S388). Then, a variation pattern selection value data table is obtained through the variation information number search process, and a variation pattern random number 2 is obtained from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, a variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and the process ends.

In this embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two stages using two types of random numbers: random number 1 for variation pattern (steps S360, S372, S378) and random number 2 for variation pattern (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern group such as ○○ series reach) is selected based on the random number 1 for variation patterns. Furthermore, a variation pattern to be finally displayed in a variable manner (a value set in a variation pattern command) is selected from a group of variation patterns selected by random number 1 for variation patterns based on random number 2 for variation patterns. Note that the method is not limited to the method of drawing lots in two stages, but may be a method of drawing drawings in three or more stages, or a variation pattern may be directly selected using one random number for variation patterns.

[11-3. [Explanation of effects on pachinko machines with setting functions]
Hereinafter, the performance in the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be explained. Specifically, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting will be explained. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the greater the number of game balls paid out for the number of special drawings. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot in the non-probability variable state (for example, setting 1:1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4:1/270 , setting 5:1/250, setting 6:1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 with the highest setting possible, the player's desire to play increases by installing the setting suggestion effect.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the main control MPU 1311 directly selects a variation pattern using one random number for variation patterns in the variation pattern selection determination process of step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, it is assumed that the main control MPU 1311 executes the following process in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current gaming state (whether it is a time-saving state (a state in which time-saving control is being executed) or a normal state other than the time-saving state) and the result of the special lottery (if you have won the jackpot) (or not) and select a variation pattern table depending on the result. If the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number for a fluctuation pattern, and based on the acquired random number for a fluctuation pattern and the distribution of each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table, It is assumed that a variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a failure, it is further determined whether a reach has occurred, obtaining a random number for a variation pattern, and distributing the obtained random number for a variation pattern and each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table. A variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table based on .

FIG. 140(A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. FIG. 140(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.

The variation pattern table is stored in the main control ROM 1313, for example. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding performance content column, and a random number distribution column for determining a variation pattern. The variation pattern type column stores information specifying the type for identifying variation patterns in the table. The variation time column stores information specifying the variation time in the corresponding variation pattern type. The corresponding performance content column stores information specifying the performance content to be executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for determining fluctuation patterns stores the distribution by which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected for each setting. In addition, the distribution random number column for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table (that is, the fluctuation pattern table in FIG. 140(A) and FIG. 145(A) described later) that is selected when the special lottery result is a loss is the one when the reach occurs. and when no reach occurs, the distribution in which the corresponding variation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[11-4. Setting suggestion effect executed after temporary display of special lottery results]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the out-of-order variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A) will be explained. First, the effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 24 to 29 will be explained while also using FIG. 141.

FIG. 141 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A). In the variation of the losing variation pattern 20, after SP Reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is a winning result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the special lottery result is a winning result. A confirmation display indicating that there is something is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the fluctuations of losing fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, after SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is a losing result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the setting is performed. A suggestive performance is executed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on a performance display device 1600.

In this way, in fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, after the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be a failure, the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that even if the temporary display is executed. The player can expect the subsequent setting suggestion performance to occur and maintain a sense of anticipation. In addition, when a setting suggestion performance occurs in a losing variation, even if the special lottery result is a loss, it is possible to suppress the player's disappointment due to the special lottery result and further increase his sense of elation.

In addition, in the variation of the losing variation pattern 24, after SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be a winning result is displayed on the production display device 1600, and then a setting suggestion production is executed. Although a fake performance suggesting that the setting is not performed is executed, a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the performance display device 1600 without performing the setting suggestion performance itself.

Note that SP reach is a reach effect that has a high probability of being selected when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, and a low probability of being selected when the result of the special lottery is a loss. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is high when SP reach is executed.

Hereinafter, effects executed in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29 will be specifically explained. In addition to the contents described below, in each production, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, movement of various movable bodies, and/or display on the production display device 1600, etc. are simultaneously executed. Good too.

In the out-of-reach variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the pre-reach performance is first performed. In the pre-reach performance, all decorative symbols on the performance display device 1600 change. Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the normal reach effect develops. In the normal reach effect, the decorative pattern is in the reach state on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, among the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol is in a fluctuating state.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, SP reach 1 is developed, and the first half performance of SP reach 1 is executed. In SP Reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and they play rock, paper, scissors. In the first half performance of SP Reach 1 in the losing variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game. Note that during the SP reach, the decorative pattern may be smaller and displayed at a position closer to the periphery of the display device 1600, for example, compared to the pre-reach performance and the normal reach performance.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the second half performance of SP reach 1 develops. In the second half performance of SP Reach 1 in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29, for example, a so-called revival performance is executed, and for example, at the start of the second half performance, the voice of the main character such as "Not yet!" is output from various speakers, and the performance is completed. On the display device 1600, an effect is executed again in which a game of rock, paper, scissors is played between the main character and the enemy character. In the second half performance of SP reach 1 in the losing variation patterns 24 to 29, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which the main character loses again to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game.

Subsequently, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is executed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one combination of decorative symbols in the off state (for example, the left and right decorative symbols are the same as the symbol that stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is the same as the symbol that stopped in the reach state, The same pattern and different patterns) are displayed in a manner that appears to be oscillating in a small width.

Subsequently, in the losing variation pattern 20, after the temporary display, a final display indicating that the special lottery result was a losing result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 without any other effects being performed. In the losing variation pattern 24, a setting suggestion false effect is executed after the temporary display, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the losing fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the temporary display, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the final display, for example, in the performance display device 1600, the same combination of decorative symbols as the combination displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped manner. In addition, in the tentative display and the final display, the decorative pattern is displayed, for example, in the center of the effect display device 1600 in the same size as in the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

In the setting suggestion fake performance in the out-of-order variation pattern 24, for example, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance in which one main character discovers two enemy characters and chases the enemy characters but is unable to catch them. It is desirable that the distribution of the variation patterns in which the setting suggestion false effect is performed is equal or approximately equal for all settings, such as the distribution of the out-of-range variation patterns 24 in FIG. 140(A). This is because if the distribution is not equal, the false setting suggestion effect will suggest the setting.

Further, it is desirable that the proportion of the distribution of the outlying variation pattern 24 to the total distribution of variations in which SP reach 1 is executed is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, false setting suggestion performances will occur frequently when the SP reaches 1, and there is a risk that the player's expectations for the occurrence of setting suggestion performances may be diminished.

In the setting suggestion performance in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, for example, on the performance display device 1600, one main character discovers two enemy characters, chases and captures the enemy characters, and then the three characters play a rock-paper-scissors game. The performance is executed.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 25, a performance is performed in which all three players play rock-paper-scissors in a rock-paper-scissors game and end up falling in love. Further, in FIG. 140(A), the deviation variation pattern 25 is determined to be distributed only at low settings (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the deviation variation pattern 25 is a performance that confirms a low setting.

In the example of FIG. 140(A), the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 is the same value as the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 26 etc. in the high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is If this occurs, there is a possibility that the player will stop playing the game early, so the distribution of the losing variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of other setting confirmed effects in other settings, or the distribution of the losing variation pattern 25 25 itself may not exist.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 26, in a rock-paper-scissors game between three people, a performance is performed in which all three players take out the scissors and fall in love with each other. Furthermore, in FIG. 140(A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is determined to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the off-set variation pattern 26 is a performance that confirms the high setting.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 27, a performance is executed in which all three players make par in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players and the game ends in a match. Further, in FIG. 140(A), the deviation variation pattern 27 is determined to be distributed only in even number settings (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the out-of-order variation pattern 27 is a performance that confirms the even number setting.

In the setting suggestion performance in the losing variation pattern 28, a performance is performed in which all three players make different moves in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people and the game ends in love. Further, in FIG. 140(A), the deviation variation pattern 28 is determined to be distributed only in odd number settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion performance in the out-of-order variation pattern 28 is a performance that confirms the odd number setting.

Note that, for example, when odd number settings and even number settings have different characteristics, by installing the odd number setting confirmation effect or the even number setting confirmation effect as described above, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the performance. .

Specifically, for example, the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is highest in the order of settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1 (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, The ratio of probability-variable jackpots among the jackpot wins is high in the order of 2 (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are in the order of settings 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. It is assumed that the probability of winning the jackpot and the variable probability ratio for each setting are determined so that the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out to the winning number of game balls is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest).

In this case, compared to the odd number setting, the even number setting has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the normal state, but the probability variation ratio is lower, that is, the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit tends to be smaller. The total amount of game balls obtained in one consecutive game from the first hit also tends to be small. On the other hand, compared to even number settings, odd number settings have a lower probability of winning the jackpot under normal conditions, but have a higher probability of winning. The total amount of game balls obtained in one consecutive game is likely to be large. In such a case, a situation may occur where one player prefers the ball output tendency with an even number setting and another player prefers the ball output tendency with an odd number setting, so the odd number setting confirmation performance or the even number setting confirmation Players' interest in the performance increases. Moreover, compared to the odd number setting, the even number setting may have a feature such that the probability of winning a jackpot in the normal state is higher, but a jackpot with a small number of rounds is more likely to be selected.

In the above-mentioned deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the presentation until the setting suggestion presentation is started is the same, but the contents of the setting suggestion presentation are different (the results in the rock-paper-scissors game between three people are different). Note that it is preferable that the three-person rock-paper-scissors game presentation be used only in the losing variation patterns 25 to 29. As a result, when the three-player rock-paper-scissors competition performance starts, the player can recognize that the setting suggestion performance has started, and his sense of excitement is further enhanced.

Note that, for example, the out-of-range variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect is executed to confirm a high setting, but it may also be a variation pattern in which an effect indicating that a high setting is likely to be established is executed. Specifically, for example, if the distribution of the variation pattern 25 is present even in the low setting, and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the variation pattern 25 in the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the performance in the out-of-order variation pattern 25 is is not an effect that confirms a high setting, but an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting.

In addition to the variation pattern in which a performance that confirms a high setting is performed, a variation pattern in which a performance indicating that a high setting as described above is likely to be performed may be determined. What has been described above also applies to the low setting confirmation effect, the odd number setting confirmation effect, the even number setting confirmation effect, the highest setting confirmation effect, and the like.

Furthermore, according to the fluctuation pattern table in FIG. 140(B) (the fluctuation pattern table during normal times and when winning a jackpot), if the special lottery result is a jackpot in the normal state, the winning fluctuation pattern other than the winning fluctuation pattern 34 in which the highest setting is determined is determined. The setting suggestion effect is not executed. Further, the distribution of the variation pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than that in the case where the special lottery result is a failure. As a result, the setting suggestion performance is mainly performed when the special lottery result is a loss, and even when the special lottery result is a loss, the player can feel a sense of anticipation.

[11-5. Setting suggestion effect using shortening variation]
The deviation variation pattern 30 will be described below with reference to FIG. 142 as well. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A).

Shortening variation is performed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30. A shortened variation is, for example, a variation whose variation time is short compared to other variation patterns, and after the variation of decorative symbols starts on the effect display device 1600, all the decorative symbols are changed without developing into a reach state. is a fluctuation that stops. In a normal variation, the decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600 stop in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but in the shortened variation, all the decorative symbols may stop at once.

Subsequently, in the losing fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, after a temporary display is performed to show that the special lottery result is likely to be a loser, a final display is performed to show that the special lottery result is a loser. Descriptions of the tentative display and final display are the same as those described above, and will therefore be omitted.

The deviation variation pattern 30 has a variation time that is different from the variation time of all other variation patterns in which shortening variations such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 are executed. In the example of FIG. 140(A), the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. . Furthermore, in FIG. 140(A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is determined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 30 is executed, the highest setting is determined.

In addition, the distribution of the outlier variation pattern 30, which is a variation pattern in which a shortening variation is executed and that suggests setting, is extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns in which a shortening variation is executed (for example, (10% or less of the minimum distribution) is desirable. Further, in each variation pattern in which the shortening variation is executed, it is desirable that the execution time of the temporary display and the final display is the same, and only the time of the shortening variation is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the variation time of the losing variation pattern 30 and the variation time of the variation pattern in which other shortening variations are executed is such that the player can recognize it (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). .

As a result, when the shortening variation is executed, the player assumes a variation time like the variation patterns 1 and 2, which have many distributions, but when the variation variation pattern 30 is executed, the player assumes a variation time that is different from the expected variation time. You can recognize the difference and enjoy the performance where the highest setting is determined. In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 140(A), the variation pattern including the shortening variation is selected only when the player is out of reach, so when the shortening variation is executed, the player loses expectations and loses interest in the shortening variation. I can't hold it anymore. However, by executing the setting suggestion performance using the shortening variation in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the shortening variation that is only selected when the player is out of reach, and this suppresses a decline in interest. can do.

Further, in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, although the content displayed on the effect display device 1600 is the same, only the time of the shortening variation is different. This allows the player to concentrate on the performance so as not to miss the maximum setting confirmed performance.

Note that the deviation variation pattern 30 is a variation pattern in which the maximum setting is determined and a shortening fluctuation is executed, but for each setting other than the maximum setting, there is also a variation in which the setting is determined and a shortening fluctuation is executed. A pattern may exist. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the variation time of each of the variation patterns is different from the variation time of other outlier variation patterns in which shortening variation is executed.

[11-6. Setting suggestion effect executed before provisional display of special lottery results]
Hereinafter, the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 will be explained with reference to FIG. 143 as well. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect executed in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A). In FIG. 140, the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are determined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are executed, the highest setting is determined.

In the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 is played on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. Special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34, that is, it is an effect in which the highest setting is determined.

In the losing variation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be a losing result is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a losing result is performed. In the winning variation pattern 34, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a win is performed.

The losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 are different from the losing variation patterns 25 to 30, etc. in that the setting suggestion effect is started before the temporary display (specifically, for example, at the same time as the start of the variation). Thereby, the player can feel a sense of excitement as he waits for notification of the jackpot lottery result with the highest setting determined. In addition, especially if the display time of Special Movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the settings of the Pachinko machine 1 are at their highest settings, and in turn, the players The player can feel a sense of superiority over the other players, and it becomes easier for the hole to appeal to the other players that they are using the highest settings.

[11-7. Setting suggestion performance that confirms jackpot winning or high setting]
Hereinafter, the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 will be explained with reference to FIG. 144 as well. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the performance executed in the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A). In FIG. 140(A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is determined to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 32 is executed, the highest setting is determined.

In the losing variation pattern 32 and the winning variation pattern 35, for example, the special movie 2 is played on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that occurs only in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34.

In the losing variation pattern 32, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be a losing result is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a losing result is performed. In the winning variation pattern 35, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display is performed to show that the special lottery result is a win, and then a final display is performed to show that the special lottery result is a win.

Therefore, when Special Movie 2 occurs, either the high setting or the jackpot in the variation is determined. In other words, if the special lottery result is a failure after Special Movie 2 occurs, the high setting will be confirmed, so the player can suppress the disappointment of the special lottery result being a failure, and in turn, the high setting will be confirmed. You can feel a sense of elation as the result has been confirmed.

In addition, especially if the display time of Special Movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player may feel superior to other players, and furthermore, when Special Movie 2 occurs, If the special lottery result is a loss, it becomes easier for the hole to appeal to other players that the high setting is being used.

[11-8. Setting suggestion performance in time saving state]
Hereinafter, the variation pattern selected when the gaming state is in the time saving state will be explained. FIG. 145(A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. FIG. 145(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot.

In the example of FIG. 145(A), the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 3 and the smaller the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 2 in the case of a non-reaching deviation. Further, the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 2 is shorter than the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot, and assuming that the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the more likely it is to win the jackpot in a short time, and the There is a risk that the number of game balls paid out will increase, leading to a burden on the hall.

However, as in the example in FIG. 145(A), the higher the setting, the more fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times are distributed, making it difficult to equalize the number of game balls paid out by jackpot per unit time in each setting. can. In addition, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of outlier fluctuation pattern 3, which has a longer fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns including shortening fluctuations, so that outlier fluctuation pattern 3 also functions as a fluctuation pattern that suggests a high setting. I can do it.

Similarly, when there is a reach and a miss, the higher the setting is, the larger the distribution of the miss variation pattern 11 with a long variation time becomes, and the smaller the distribution of the miss variation pattern 12 with a short variation time. Similarly, when winning a jackpot, the higher the setting is, the larger the distribution of the winning variation pattern 2 with a longer variation time is, and the smaller the distribution of the winning variation pattern 3 with a shorter variation time.

As mentioned above, for example, if the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot, and assuming that the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time. In other words, the lower the setting is, the longer it takes to win the jackpot, and the greater the number of game balls fired until the jackpot is won. For example, if the lower the setting, the greater the distribution of fluctuation patterns with longer fluctuation times, and the lower the selection rate of fluctuation patterns with short fluctuation times, if a player stops firing a game ball during fluctuation, each It is possible to equalize the number of game balls fired per unit time in the settings.

Note that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing at which a setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. Note that the predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emitting effect may be exclusive ones that are executed only at the time of setting suggestion effect. In addition, particularly in a setting suggestion performance in which a high setting or a maximum setting is determined, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect or a predetermined light emitting performance be performed only in the setting suggestion performance.

Note that it is desirable that the distribution of a variation pattern in which a performance indicating that a high setting or a maximum setting is determined or is likely to be performed is extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns. If the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, even though the player has only been playing for a short time, if the high setting suggestion performance or the maximum setting suggestion performance is not executed, the player loses expectations and may end up stopping the game early. This is because there is a risk of cancellation.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the distribution of variation patterns in which a performance indicating that a low setting or minimum setting is fixed or highly likely is executed is extremely low compared to distribution of other variation patterns. This is because if the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the low setting suggestion performance and the minimum setting suggestion performance will be executed frequently, and there is a risk that the player will lose his sense of expectation and eventually stop playing the game at an early stage.

Moreover, although the setting suggestion performance that suggests groups of settings such as high setting, low setting, maximum setting, odd number setting, and even number setting has been described, the setting groups in the setting suggestion performance are not limited to these. A setting suggestion performance may be performed for an arbitrary group consisting of one or more settings. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be grouped as low settings, settings 3 and 4 as intermediate settings, and settings 5 and 6 as high settings, or there may be a group consisting of only setting 5.

[11-9. Other forms of pachinko machines with setting functions]
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of mounting the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the above explanation, the setting board 970 was connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquired the operation status of each switch and controlled the display on the setting display 974. The setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation status of each switch and controls the display on the setting display 974.

FIG. 146(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this implementation example. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably accommodates the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the base display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

FIG. 146(B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 146(A). In the example shown in FIG. 146(B), in addition to the main control MPU 1311 and a driver circuit (not shown), a base display 1317, a base display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310. . Note that the RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971) that trigger RAM clearing are provided in the main control board box 1320. Note that, as will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 where data is erased differs between when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

Setting board 970 is provided close to main control board 1310, and setting board 970 and main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected directly by a connector or by an electric wire. Mounted on the setting board 970 are a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying set or selected setting values. Note that a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

The outputs of various switches 971, 972, and 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to the port of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Since the main control board box 1320 is placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position where it can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each pachinko machine manufacturer is set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads out and collates the authentication code set on the setting board 970. If the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 will not be able to start playing. That is, although it is possible to shoot the game ball toward the game area, even if it enters the winning slot, the prize ball will not be paid out, and the variable display game will not be executed. The authentication code may be set for each model of pachinko machine, or a serial number for each pachinko machine may be set. The authentication code can be set using, for example, a DIP switch provided on the setting board 970, a jumper wire, a jumper pin, or a pattern short-circuit, or a logic circuit in which the authentication code is set (for example, A small capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Further, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, by outputting different signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1320 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. do. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs +5V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0V (ground level). Signals from the setting board 970 and dummy board 979 are input to a specific port of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1320. The main control MPU 1320 determines the connected board based on the input signal to the port.

In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (for each model), it is possible to prevent incorrect mounting of the setting board 970 into the main control board box 1320. Furthermore, by setting an authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970 can be prevented.

FIG. 146(C) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 146(A).

As mentioned above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a gaming performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine regarding prize balls won by a player, such as jackpot probability in a special symbol variable display game, and the performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed in accordance with the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, there are some halls where a conventional pachinko machine without a setting function is sufficient and the setting function is not necessary. For this reason, pachinko machine manufacturers need to design and produce both pachinko machines without setting functions and pachinko machines with setting functions. There is a need for efficient design and production of pachinko machines.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 that does not have a setting function, a dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same way as when the setting board 970 is mounted. Make it. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 can be shared between a pachinko machine that does not have a setting function and a pachinko machine that does have a setting function.

The dummy board 979 does not have devices mounted on the setting board 970, such as the setting keys 971 and the setting display 974, but may have a pattern for mounting these devices. That is, although a pattern for mounting a device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, no device is mounted on the pattern.

The dummy board 979 does not have to be a printed circuit board, but may be a member (for example, a unit made of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970.

Furthermore, since the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is not open or grounded on the dummy board 979, but is terminated by a dummy resistor. Good. This can prevent damage to the driver circuit due to overcurrent. Further, when the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310.

When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the hole 971A is not provided in the main control board box 1320. The setting function is provided by providing a small door on the main control board box 1320 that can be moved to close the hole 971A so that it can be operated from inside the main control board box 1320 but cannot be operated from the outside. The main control board box 1320 may be shared between a pachinko machine without a setting function and a pachinko machine with a setting function.

Note that an authentication code for authentication by the main control board 1310 may also be set in a dummy board 979, which will be described later. Further, the dummy board 979 does not require authentication by the main control board 1310, and does not require setting an authentication code. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations of the operating means mounted on the setting board 970 described above are summarized as follows.

(1) With setting change switch 974 and setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, while pressing the RAM clear switch 954), press the pachinko machine. Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the setting change switch 974 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(2) With setting change switch 974, but without setting confirmation switch 973. In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, press the RAM clear switch 954). Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the setting change switch 974 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without setting change switch 974, with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, while pressing the RAM clear switch 954), press the pachinko machine. Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the RAM clear switch 954 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. Note that instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting value to be set may be selected by turning the setting key 971 to the right.

(4) No setting change switch 974, no setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (furthermore, press the RAM clear switch 954). Turn on the power by operating the power switch 1. After operating the RAM clear switch 954 and selecting the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Note that instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting value to be set may be selected by turning the setting key 971 to the right.

147 and 148 are diagrams showing another example of mounting the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

The implementation example shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 differs from the implementation example shown in FIG. 146 in that the main control board box 1320 is provided with a small door 1321.

FIG. 147(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this implementation example. The main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably houses the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, as described above. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the base display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting mode. A hole 976A for operating 976 is provided.

The hole 976A is normally covered by the small door 1321. A key unit 1322 is provided in the small door 1321, and by inserting a key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed, allowing settings to be made. The mode switch 976 can now be operated.

As shown in FIG. 148(A), in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the lock 1323 is at the maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322, the lock 1323 is inserted into the catch 1324, and the lock 1323 and the catch 1324 are are engaged, and the small door 1321 is fixed in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 148(B), when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the bolt 1323 retreats from the maximum protrusion position and the engagement between the bolt 1323 and the catch seat 1324 is released. , the small door 1321 can be opened about the hinge 1325. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 148(B)), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

FIG. 149 is a diagram showing still another example of mounting the main control board 1310. In the implementation example shown in FIG. 149, a key unit 1322 is provided on a back cover 980 that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, by inserting and operating the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322, the back cover 980 is released from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It becomes possible.

That is, in a normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 closes and fixes the back side of the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the back cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 is exposed on the back side. Setting mode switch 976 becomes operable.

When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 147(C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of transparent resin and sealably accommodates the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 includes a hole 1318A for operating the base display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting mode. A hole 976A is provided for operating the. The main control board box 1320 houses the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970. On the main control board 1310, in addition to a main control MPU and a driver circuit (not shown), a base display 1317, a base display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted. Note that the RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be connected directly by a connector or by an electric wire. Mounted on the setting board 970 are a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying set or selected setting values. Note that a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

[11-10. [Details of setting change process]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. The initialization process shown in FIG. 150 is different from the initialization process described above in FIG. 101 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key 971 is operated (step S17, step S30). Note that the same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 101 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs initialization processing by executing the main control program. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Next, the main control MPU 1311 starts the built-in watchdog timer (step S12) and checks whether a predetermined wait time (the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S18).

Note that it is preferable that the RAM clear switch 954 is detected immediately after the power is turned on (for example, before step S12), the detection result is stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value is determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after the power is turned on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after the power is turned on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is being operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 is not operated, this is a normal RAM clear operation, and the process advances to step S30, where a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is operated, that is, when the power is turned on with both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 being operated, the setting mode is entered. That is, since the operation of two switches and the operation of the power switch are required to start the setting mode, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations such as erroneously starting the setting mode.

In the setting mode, first, setting values are displayed (step S60). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on setting display 974. Then, a security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is extremely rare to put the pachinko machine 1 into the setting mode during play, and there is a possibility of fraudulent activity. This is because, if the setting mode is entered during business hours, the hall computer should be notified.

The security signal can be output for a predetermined time from the start of the setting mode, from the start to the end of the setting mode, or from the start of the setting mode to a predetermined period after the end of the setting mode. good. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of the setting mode, the period during which abnormalities can be detected becomes longer, and security can be further improved.

Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting change operation has been performed based on whether or not the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S62), changes the setting value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes it into the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is configured as a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value is changed by one step. Further, when the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned once to the right, the setting value is changed by one step. The main control MPU 1311 then generates data for displaying the changed setting value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

Thereafter, it is determined whether to end the setting mode and confirm the set value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, it ends the setting mode and proceeds to step S30. Alternatively, the setting mode may be ended by returning the setting key 971 to its normal position. Further, the setting mode may be terminated by the operation of other switches or sensors provided in the pachinko machine 1.

In the process described above, after the setting mode ends or when it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30, but the process may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting mode ends, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the checksums match (step S22). If they do not match, a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. Note that if it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process advances to step S30.

After the setting mode ends, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, setting value data, base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), and gaming status (for example, probability change status, time saving status, reserved memory of special symbols and normal symbols, and information regarding prize balls), other data is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24. Note that the gaming state data may be deleted without leaving it. In this case, the storage area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation is the same as the storage area erased by the RAM clear operation.

On the other hand, if an operation to end the setting mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62 and further a setting change operation is detected.

Further, if no operation of the setting key 971 is detected in step S17, in step S30, the setting value data and base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128 ) is left and the other data is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24.

Further, if the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312, and determines whether a power outage flag is set (step S20). .

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128). (step S30), and the process advances to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and performs a check calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cut. The sum is compared (verified) with the checksum stored in step S48 (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 backs up the data in the work area. The data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process advances to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased and step S24 Proceed to.

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the cases in which at least a part of the RAM 1312 is initialized include the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the case that the power outage flag is initialized. There are an abnormality in the power failure flag that is not set (step S20), an abnormality in the RAM where the checksum of the RAM does not match (step S22), and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Among these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the setting value and the gaming state are (For example, the probability change state, time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information regarding prize balls) are left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, or if there is a power outage flag abnormality or a RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack The base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is cleared, but the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike what is shown in the figure, in the case of a power outage flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, or base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed. You may also clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the gaming status will be lost and normal processing will not be possible.If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation are It is best to initialize only Additionally, if the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. No need to clear.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is divided into data types (gaming control area 13126 (setting values, gaming state data), base calculation area 13126, Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the setting value is erased, but the setting value and base calculation area 13128 is not erased. This is because if the set values are erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set values each time the RAM clearing operation is performed, making maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall complicated. Therefore, the set values are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of a process (steps S50, S52) of calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

In the initialization process described above, the setting confirmation process is not executed, but is executed in the setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process described later (Figures 151 and 152), but the setting confirmation process is not executed in the initialization process. May be executed. By executing the setting confirmation process in the initialization process, setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and confirmation of setting values due to careless operations while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation can be prevented.

In this case, apart from the setting key 971, an operation section (for example, a push button switch) for confirming the settings is provided (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of an operation section for confirming the settings), and when the power is turned on, When the setting confirmation operation unit is operated, the current setting value is read from the main control RAM 1312, data to be displayed on the setting display 974 is generated, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 974. It's good to do that. In this case as well, it is preferable to output a security signal along with the display of the set value.

The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear process even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting mode ends (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clearing process and executes the RAM clearing process after a predetermined condition is satisfied (the setting mode ends). During the setting mode, it can be said that the main control MPU 1311 performs control so as to remember that the RAM clearing process is to be executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting mode (step S30).

The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described in detail above, and next, clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be explained.

After the setting mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may also be cleared at the same time. Further, it is not necessary to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952. Furthermore, whether or not to clear the RAM of the payout control unit may be switched by operation. For example, if you turn on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 will be cleared, and with the setting key 971 turned on, If the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared, but the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared. In this way, by changing the operating method, it is possible to clear a part of the main control RAM 1312 and execute processing that does not clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952.

In addition, when clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952, there is a difference between the timing when the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the timing when the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared, depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. This may occur. That is, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, it immediately clears the RAM. Therefore, depending on the conditions (operations), although the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared, a state may occur where the main control RAM 1312 is not cleared.

In addition, not only when the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310 but also in the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 or the power supply board 931, it is possible to change the setting value while operating the RAM clear switch 954. It is preferable that the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared when the power is turned on. That is, instead of the payout control unit 952 clearing the RAM by a RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, the payout control unit 952 detects the level of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. It is determined whether the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is to be cleared. Providing a RAM clear switch on the payout control board 951 has the effect of being compatible with various models without changing the control program on the frame side.

[11-11. [Details of settings confirmation process]
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 151 is different from the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. The object ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. Furthermore, a setting confirmation process (S802) for displaying a setting value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operating ratio of the condition device) is added. Note that the same steps as in the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG. 23 and FIG. 104 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1 and switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the base calculation area 13128 ( (see FIG. 103) and calculates a base value (step S801; see FIGS. 105 and 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) can be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it is better to execute it in an early order to ensure that it is executed every timer interrupt. .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86), and normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing (step S86). Step S88) is executed.

Thereafter, a setting confirmation process (S802) for displaying setting values indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation process, a hall employee performs a predetermined operation to display the current setting value on the setting display 974. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later using FIG. 152.

Subsequently, output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches the register bank (returns). When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is ended and the process returns to the one before the interrupt.

FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 151).

In the setting confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting confirmation operation is in progress (S8021). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is being operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers a transition to the setting mode (step S17 in FIG. 150), and if operated during operation, it becomes a setting confirmation operation and the current settings can be displayed.

If no operation of the setting key 971 is detected, since the setting key 971 has been returned to its normal position, data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (S8025).

On the other hand, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display conditions are satisfied (S8022).

As a setting display condition, it is determined whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 based on the output of the frame opening switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is opened. However, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected even though the outer frame 2 is closed, it is assumed that some kind of abnormality (malfunction or fraudulent activity) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and in this case, the setting It is better not to display it. Further, since the setting display 974 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is open, and there is no need to display the settings.

The setting values may be displayed at any time while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. Further, a setting display condition may be provided that allows display at a specific time. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the elapsed time since the power is turned on (or the CPU initialization in step S28), and to enable display of the set value until the timer times out.

Furthermore, a setting display condition may be provided that allows the setting value to be displayed in a specific gaming state. For example, the set display conditions cannot be displayed during variable display of special symbols or during a jackpot game. That is, a setting display condition is provided that allows the setting value to be displayed during periods other than during special symbol fluctuations and during jackpots. Note that the set value may not be displayed in game states other than those described above. In this case, if the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or jackpot game, the setting value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation game or jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the set display conditions are met, a security signal is output (step S8023). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare for the pachinko machine 1 to check the settings during play, and this can be a precursor to fraudulent activity. This is because if a setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours, the hall computer should be notified.

The security signal can be output for a predetermined time from the start of the set value display, from the start to the end of the set value display, or from the start of the set value display to a predetermined period after the end of the set value display. good. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the set value display ends, the period during which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and security can be further improved.

In the illustrated setting confirmation process, a security signal is transmitted when the setting display conditions are met, but even if the setting display conditions are not met, a security signal may be sent if a setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key 971) is detected. good.

Thereafter, the set value is displayed (step S8024). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on setting display 974.

Note that if the setting display conditions are not met, the conditions will be checked until the setting display conditions are met, but there is a possibility that you will not be able to get out of the loop for a long time. The confirmation process may be ended. For example, after it is determined that the set value is not displayed because the special symbol variation display is in progress, if the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the setting display condition will be satisfied with the end of the special symbol variation display. The setting value will be displayed. Further, if the setting conditions are not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be immediately ended without repeating the confirmation of the setting conditions.

At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol variation display start condition. In this way, a new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is being displayed, and a new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the set value can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, so the set value can be confirmed without interfering with other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the setting value is displayed with priority during setting confirmation, so the base value is not displayed even though the base value is being calculated. In a gaming situation where many prize balls are paid out in a short period of time, it may be desirable to check changes in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without interfering with the real-time display of the base value.

[11-12. Output of security signal when changing settings or checking settings]
FIG. 153 is a timing chart of security signals output in conjunction with setting changes and setting confirmations.

As described above, a security signal is output during setting mode and setting confirmation (S61 in FIG. 150, S8023 in FIG. 152).

In the setting mode, as shown in FIG. 153(A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is outputted may be longer than the time required for the hall computer to recognize the security signal, and may be one second or less or several tens of seconds long.

Furthermore, the security signal may be output for a period from the start to the end of the setting mode instead of for a predetermined time from the start of the setting mode.

Further, in the setting mode, as shown in FIG. 153(B), a security signal may be output for a predetermined period of time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clearing process executed in conjunction with the setting mode.

At the time of setting confirmation, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 153(C). The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is outputted may be longer than the time required for the hall computer to recognize the security signal, and may be one second or less or several tens of seconds long.

Further, the security signal may be output not for a predetermined time from the start of setting confirmation, but for a period from the start to end of setting confirmation (the period during which the setting value is displayed).

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined period of time (T seconds) after the detection of the error, as shown in FIG. 153(D). If the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during setting confirmation, a security signal is output for a predetermined period of time after the detection of the error, as shown in FIG. 153(E). That is, a security signal caused by setting confirmation and a security signal caused by error detection are output continuously for more than a predetermined time (T seconds) (predetermined time from error detection). Note that even if an error is detected during setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal does not need to be extended. That is, even if an error is detected during output of the security signal, the security signal resulting from the error detection is not output, but is absorbed by the security signal being output.

Note that during the setting mode, the pachinko machine 1 does not detect errors, so the security signal caused by setting confirmation and the security signal caused by error detection do not overlap. That is, during the setting mode, the output time of the security signal is not extended even if an error occurs, but if an error occurs during setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal is extended.

[12. slot machine]
Up to this point, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM of a pachinko machine has been described.Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of a slot machine (player-type gaming machine) will be explained. Note that although the pachinko machine has been briefly described with reference to FIG. 26, programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM, similar to the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[12-1. structure]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 154 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 opened.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment has a box-shaped casing 4100 with an open front, and various devices are provided inside the casing 4100. 4200 is provided in a single-opening manner so that it can be opened and closed. At the top of the front member 4200, an image display body 4500 that displays effects and information according to the progress of the game, a speaker that produces sounds, and the like are provided. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to presentations related to games. Various effects displays and history information displays on the image display body 4500 are controlled by an effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 serves as an effect display means that can display an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 serves as a display control means that can control the display of the effect display means. Eggplant.

In the center of the front member 4200, there is a front panel that prevents the rear from being seen and has a decorative pattern drawn on it, and a front panel that makes the rear visible (for example, a transparent ) A symbol display window 4401 is formed. Note that the front panel may be configured with a display device, and when no image is displayed in the symbol display window 4401, the reels 4301 are made visible, and images that produce the game are mainly displayed around the symbol display window 4401. do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for producing a game in the symbol display window 4401.

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), it is possible to visually recognize the symbols that are variably displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 disposed within the housing. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. A plurality of symbols are arranged in a predetermined arrangement by winding strip-shaped sheets on which a plurality of symbols are drawn along the longitudinal direction around the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c.

Each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel drive motor 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 156), which is a stepping motor, and independently drives and stops rotation of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It is now possible to do so. That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c serve as the drive source for each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c are controlled by a two-phase excitation method to increase their driving torque and static torque, similarly to the payout motor 839 of the pachinko game machine 1 described above. This makes it possible to use a small-sized motor as the drive source, thereby reducing costs.

Note that in the following, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c will be referred to as a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c are defined as a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c. Furthermore, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to each reel are designated as a left reel drive motor 4341a, a middle reel drive motor 4341b, and a right reel drive motor 4341c.

Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, the plurality of types of symbols visible from the symbol display window 4401 are varied so as to circulate from the top to the bottom, for example (variable display). On the other hand, when the reels 4301 are stopped, a predetermined number of consecutive symbols (for example, 3), that is, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3, are displayed through the symbol display window 4401 for each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. It is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 4401, the effective display portions of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the game are visible.

A predetermined enablement line is set for the 3×3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401. In this embodiment, a line (middle line) that crosses the symbols in the middle of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a line (middle line) that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the lower part of the left reel 4301a to the middle part of the middle reel 4301b to the upper part of the right reel 4301c ( The line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the upper left reel 4301a to the middle reel 4301b to the lower right reel 4301c (lower right line) is the activation line. Then, the activation line is activated by the player inserting medals or inputting credits (hereinafter referred to as "bet operation"), and based on the pattern combination (roll) formed on this activation line, It is determined whether a prize (win) is achieved or not.

When a winning is achieved, in addition to the case where three predetermined symbols are lined up on the active line, there are also cases where three predetermined symbols are lined up on another line visually. Such a line includes a line (upper line) that crosses the upper symbols of each reel 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. In addition, a line (lower line) that crosses the lower symbols of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, and a front part (visible part) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above. The patterns may be visually aligned with the virtual line where they are located. Below, the lines that can be activated (middle row, upward-right, downward-right lines), lines where symbols can be visually aligned when winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are grouped together to form a symbol stop line (symbol alignment). line).

The upper, middle, lower, right-up and right-down lines are activated lines, and a predetermined activation line is activated according to the number of bets, and winnings are made based on the pattern combinations formed on these activated lines. Determine whether or not the winning combination is successful or unsuccessful. For example, for bet number 1, the middle line is the active line, for bet number 2, in addition to the middle line, the upper and lower lines are active lines, and for bet number 3, in addition to the upper, middle, and lower lines, the upward-right and downward-right lines are active lines. shall be. Further, all lines may be made valid regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2), or may be made exclusive to 3-coin bets.

A payout number display LED 4562 that displays the number of medals paid out in the game is provided around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401. A credit display that displays the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display that displays the number of remaining games in the special prize may be provided.

A step portion protruding toward the front is formed below the symbol display window 4401, and the upper surface of this step serves as an operation portion 4202 that slopes downward on the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a single coin insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation unit for advancing the game.

The medal slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The game becomes executable when the player inserts medals into the medal slot 4203 and performs a betting operation. An insertion sensor 4207b that detects the passage of medals is provided on the route through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the detection information from the insertion sensor 4207b.

The one-card insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The one-sheet input button 4205 allows one credit card to be input by pressing the button once. By pressing the max bet button 4206 once, you can input up to the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) from credits, but if the number of credits is less than the maximum number, the number of credits is input as the number of bets. It looks like this.

Below the operation unit 4202, a payout button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided. The payout button 4209 is used to pay out medals inserted from the medal slot 4203, medals input as the number of bets (bet medals) using the 1-card insert button 4205, the max bet button 4206, or when a winning is established, and is stored as a credit. It is used when giving a command to return the medals (accumulated medals) stored in the medal tray 4201 to the medal receptacle 4201. In addition, when medals are inserted from the medal slot 4203 after an automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a replay win (replay win), or when medals exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as credits are used as medals via the medal selector 4207, It is returned to the tray 4201.

The starting lever 4210 is an operating lever for starting one game. The key device 4215 is used to insert a key when opening the front member 4200 or resetting an error (eg, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used to return medals inserted through the medal slot 4203 and stuck inside the medal selector 4207 to the medal tray 4201.

The reel stop button 4211 is composed of a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c, which are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, middle reel 4301b, and right reel 4301c, respectively. This is for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c in response to a stop operation.

Furthermore, a decorative plate (decorative panel) constituting a lower area of the front member 4200 is provided below the portion where these operation buttons are provided. Furthermore, below the decorative plate and at the lowest part of the front member 4200, there are provided a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout opening, a speaker 4512 for outputting audio, and the like.

A main board (gaming control device) 4600 (see FIG. 156) that controls the entire slot machine 4000 is disposed at the top inside the housing. On the main board 4600, an accessory ratio display 1317 and an accessory ratio display switch 1318 are provided. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main board 4600.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display provided on the front of the slot machine 4000 (for example, the payout number display LED 4562 or the image display 4500), and the payout number display LED 4562 Alternatively, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the image display body 4500.

When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It is preferable to display (print, engrave, sticker, etc.) on the printed circuit board near the accessory ratio display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100 that the switch is for operating the accessory ratio display. Note that the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is preferably provided near the accessory ratio display 1317, but even if it is not on the main control unit 1300, it can be installed on another board (for example, in a place where it is easy to operate). It may be provided on the control board 4700, the power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. Further, as described later, the accessory ratio display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the accessory ratio display switch 1318 in a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it incorrectly.

Further, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided approximately at the center inside the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are placed thereon. Further, inside the casing of the slot machine 4000, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided for outputting signals from the main board 4600 to an external device.

Furthermore, a medal dispensing device (hopper) 4110 is disposed at the bottom inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 accepts and stores medals inserted through the medal slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination pattern is formed on the active line and a winning is achieved, the winning is achieved. The number of medals corresponding to (payout medals) or the amount of medals exceeding the upper limit of credits due to additions due to winnings are paid out to the medal receptacle 4201. By operating the payout button 4209, the medals equivalent to the credits are paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110. Further, on the right side of the medal dispensing device 4110, medals that overflow from the medal dispensing device 4110 and flow in are stored, and medals that flow in are sent to the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for guiding.

[12-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 156 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 4600 is equipped with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input/output interface 4604, and the like.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with an accessory ratio display 1317 that displays the accessory ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and an accessory ratio display switch 1318 that switches the display of the accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display switch 1318 is preferably configured as a push button switch that operates momentarily, but it may also be a switch of another type. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

The aforementioned one-piece input button 4205, max bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, payout button 4209, etc. are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are operated by sensors (not shown). is used to perform operations by the player, and the detected operation signals are output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal is output to the main board 4600 that starts the above-mentioned symbol variation display device 4300 (starts rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c), and the reel stop button 4211a is activated. , 4211b, 4211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively, is output to the main board 4600.

Further, the slot machine 4000 houses a main board 4600 and other devices, and various signals are input to the main board 4600 from these devices. In addition to the symbol variation display device 4300, the devices include a medal payout device 4110 and the like.

As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 consists of a stepping motor, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c can be rotated and stopped independently, and when rotating, multiple types of symbols are displayed from above in the symbol display window 4401. It is displayed continuously changing downward.

Further, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a position sensor 4331a, 4331b, 4331c for detecting a reference position regarding rotation of the reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. They are provided correspondingly within the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

Inside the medal selector 4207, the above-mentioned solenoid 4207a and insertion sensor 4207b are installed. Input sensor 4207b detects medals inserted from medal input port 4203, and outputs a medal detection signal to main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medals are detected by the inserted sensor 4207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the passage that reaches the input sensor 4207b within the medal selector 4207 is locked out and the insertion of medals is no longer accepted. The medals that flowed through the return gutter return to the medal receiving tray 4201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is also disabled, so neither bets nor accumulation of medals are made by inserting medals.

The medal dispensing device 4110 has a dispensing sensor 4110e in the dispensing port that detects the dispensed medals one by one, and a dispensing medal signal for each medal is input from the dispensing sensor 4110e to the main board 4600. . Further, the auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 4111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal indicating that the number of medals exceeds a predetermined quantity is sent to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display is performed on the image display 4500, error lamp 4554, etc. to inform of an abnormality in medal storage, and the players, hall employees, etc. are notified of the occurrence of the abnormality.

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 4600 to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, the main board 4600 outputs a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the aforementioned reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c. Further, a drive signal is inputted to the medal payout device 4110 from the main board 4600 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the active line, and in response to this, the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110, or if there are no medals at all, detection of the number of medals by the payout sensor 4110e will be delayed. When a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the payout sensor 4110e outputs an abnormality signal of the medals being paid out to the main board 4600, and in response, the main board 4600 sends a message indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of medals. is displayed on the error lamp 4554, image display 4500, etc. to notify players, hall employees, etc. that an abnormality has occurred.

The slot machine 4000 includes a production control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600, and this production control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, ROM 4702, RAM 4703, input/output interface 4707, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and AMP (audio amplifier). ) 4705, sound source IC 4706, etc. are installed. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600, and controls the display of the image display body 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, turning off, etc.) of the lighting device 4502, etc., and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to a hall computer 4800 of the gaming hall via the external relay terminal board 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays the role of relaying various signals (input medal signal, payout medal signal, gaming status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

The power supply device 4112 generates multiple types of DC power from the 24 volt AC (24 VAC) power supplied from the island equipment. For example, three types of power supplies are created: +5V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), +12V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and +24V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+24V"). Three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each component included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies, +5V and +12V, are supplied to the reels 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. The symbol fluctuation display device 4300 is supplied with the symbol fluctuation display device 4300.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is attached with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000, and can only be operated by opening the front member 4200. The power switch 4112v is for turning ON/OFF the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the settings of the slot machine 4000 (for example, settings 1 to 6). Further, the reset switch 4112u is used to cancel an error that has occurred in the slot machine 4000, and is also operated together with the setting change key switch 4112t when changing settings.

Further, the main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. When obtaining drive torque for rotationally driving the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 to rotate the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, HI) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. Control is performed by outputting +12V to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining static torque to maintain the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 in a stopped state, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting +5V to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage, control is performed.

The above is an example of the configuration of the slot machine 4000. In a game played by the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 after determining the number of medals to bet, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c rotates, and then the player presses the reel stop button 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. When you operate the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the active line and Accordingly, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be awarded.

As mentioned above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a reel strip with a symbol drawn on it. Then, when all reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are stopped, a symbol corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is selected from the display contents displayed in the symbol display window 4401 (the combination of symbols displayed on the active line). It is determined whether the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned active line in the symbol display window 4401. Note that it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of active lines. As a result, if it is determined that symbol combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are displayed, medals are paid out in an amount equal to the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations.

[12-3. Storage area configuration]
Next, storage areas provided by the ROM 4602, RAM 4603, etc. provided on the main board 4600 will be described. Note that the storage area of the pachinko machine has been outlined in FIG. 24, but is configured in the same way as the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 157 to 160. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing details of the access area for game control of the slot machine 4000 and the ROM area 5100, which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602, in this embodiment.

The storage area in this embodiment is provided by media such as ROM 4602 and RAM 4603, and is provided as one access area assigned addresses from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Furthermore, the access area of this embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I/O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. It is. Note that each area does not necessarily have to correspond to a medium that provides an access area; one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

By configuring the access area of this embodiment as described above, the CPU 4601 can access programs and data by specifying an address without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. The details of the access area will be explained below.

[12-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 5100 will be explained. ROM area 5100 corresponds to a storage area provided by ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium that retains its stored contents even when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, and although the stored data can be read out, it cannot be updated or deleted. It is now impossible to do so. Note that the ROM 4602 may be any nonvolatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updatable.

The ROM area 5100 is assigned addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH". The data stored in the ROM 4602 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying addresses "1FFFH" from "0000H".

The ROM area 5100 has a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. A start address and an end address are set for each area.

The first control area is a game control area, and stores programs and the like for controlling games. Further, the first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for controlling the game is stored. That is, the game is controlled by executing the program stored in the first control area and referring to the data stored in the first data area. Note that the area used for game control (first control area, first data area) is defined as a game control area (first storage area).

The second control area stores a program for debugging (function testing) the control program, and the like. Further, the second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (functional testing). Note that the second data area is not necessarily required, and debug data may be stored in the second control area. In addition, the area (second control area, second data area) in which programs and data for debugging (function testing) the gaming control program without being used for gaming control is stored in the area for debugging (inspection function) ( (second storage area).

The third control area stores a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio. The third control area also stores data for calculating the accessory ratio. A third data area may be provided to store data for calculating accessory ratios. Note that an area (third control area) in which programs and data for calculating accessory ratios are stored without being used for game control is referred to as an area for accessory ratio calculation (third storage area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, it is possible to inspect the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. This can be done separately from the inspection of the slot machine 4000, and the effort required to inspect the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Furthermore, the accessory ratio calculation/display code 13135 can be used in common with multiple models without depending on the model.

The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas to which access is prohibited. In the processing by the CPU 4601, if the isolated area is accessed, the CPU 4601 is configured to forcibly execute reset processing. The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas that are continuous with the preceding and succeeding areas. For example, the starting address of the first isolated area is the next one of the ending address of the first control area. The end address of the first isolated area is the address immediately before the first data area ("0AFFH"). Further, the third isolated area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (function test) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the third isolation area is the debug (function test) area. It may be treated as Similarly, the fourth isolated area is located between the debug (function test) area and the accessory ratio calculation area, and is treated as the debug (function test) area in FIG. It may also be treated as an area for calculating physical ratios.

[12-3-2. RAM area]
Next, the configuration of RAM area 5200 will be explained. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 5200 in this embodiment. RAM area 5200 corresponds to the storage area provided by RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium whose stored contents are erased when the gaming machine 1 is powered off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores programs and data stored in the ROM area 5100, and stores data derived by executing programs. Note that the RAM 4603 only needs to be capable of reading and writing data, and may be a nonvolatile storage medium. Further, in the event of a power outage, the data stored in the RAM 4603 can be retained for a predetermined period of time by the backup power source.

The RAM area 5200 is assigned addresses from "3000H" to "31FFH". The data stored in the RAM 4603 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying addresses "3000H" to "31FFH".

The RAM area 5200 includes a work area for game control, a work area for debugging (inspection function), a save area, and an isolation area. A start address and an end address are set for each area.

The game control work area is a work area (temporary area) used when executing game control (first control). The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing program debug control (second control). The accessory ratio calculation work area is an area for storing data for calculating the accessory ratio and calculated accessory ratios (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, advantageous section accessory ratio, etc.). It should be noted that it is not necessary to secure a dedicated work area for the debugging (inspection function) work area and the accessory ratio calculation work area, and the work area for game control may be used, or the work area for game control A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating accessory ratios may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area will be reduced. However, if the program is structured so that it does not use the debugging (inspection function) work area or the accessory ratio calculation work area, it is not necessarily necessary to use the debugging (inspection function) work area or the accessory ratio calculation work area. Good too.

The save area is an area for temporarily storing data used in game control, debug (inspection function) control, or accessory ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, before executing the predetermined process, the values of various registers of the CPU (arithmetic register, flag register, stack pointer, etc.) are copied to the save area, After processing is completed, the copied values are returned to the various registers of the CPU. Note that the evacuation area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation; however, similar to the work area, it can be used for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation. It may be calculated separately. Thereby, it is possible to maintain more independence in game control, debug (inspection function) control, and accessory ratio calculation.

The isolation area is between the work area for game control, the work area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories, and the work area for debugging (inspection function), the evacuation area, and the evacuation area for calculating the ratio of accessories. This area is continuous with each area (previous and subsequent areas). For example, the start address of the isolated area between the work area for game control and the work area for debugging (inspection function) is the next address ("3076H") after the end address of the work area for game control, and the end address is This is the previous address ("307FH") of the debugging (inspection function) work area. Furthermore, the isolated area is an area to which access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute reset processing when accessed during processing by the CPU 4601.

FIG. 158 shows details of the accessory ratio calculation work area on the right side. The accessory ratio calculation work area may include a main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored, as well as a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which copies of the data stored in the main area are stored. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code can be set in the initialization process when the slot machine 4000 is powered on, or each time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process, or the check code can be set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 161). ) may be set. In particular, if the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when data is deleted, and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 161). good. The check code may also be used as a power outage flag. That is, if the check code in the main area is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the power outage flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set to the power outage flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Note that in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 161), it is preferably determined whether the data in the backup area is normal or not, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal is copied to the main area. Further, in the power-off processing executed when the power is turned off, the values of the main area may be copied to each backup area.

Unused space is provided between the main area and backup area 1 and between backup area 1 and backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

FIG. 159 is a diagram showing a specific structure of the work area for storing each data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio.

FIG. 159(A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 159(A), the number of paid out bonus objects, the number of consecutive paid out bonus items, the total number of paid out items, the ratio of bonus items, the ratio of consecutive bonus items, the number of games played in an advantageous area, the number of games played in a non-advantageous area, and the number of games played in an advantageous area. Store the percentage. The number of accessory payouts is the number of medals that are paid out during the operation of the accessory (for example, during a regular bonus). The number of consecutive bonus balls acquired is the number of medals that are paid out during continuous bonus items operation (for example, during a big bonus). The total number of payouts is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of accessory items paid out by the total number of paid items. The continuous accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of consecutive prizes paid out by the total number of prizes paid out. The number of games played in an advantageous period is the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which the number of medals in hand is difficult to reduce, such as ART (Assist Replay Time)), and the number of games played in a non-advantageous period is the number of games played in a non-advantageous period. , is the number of games executed in gaming states other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of advantageous section games by (the number of advantageous section games + the number of non-advantageous section games).

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 159(A), the number of paid out accessories, the number of consecutive paid out characters, the total number of paid outs, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are the total number of paid out objects in FIG. 159(B), which will be described later. Each storage area corresponds to a cumulative total of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal notation. Since this data will not be deleted unless something goes wrong with the data, a large storage area is provided to store data for a long period of time. Moreover, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

The number of accessory payouts, the number of continuous accessory payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous area games, and the number of non-advantageous area games are updated in the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 161), and the accessory ratio , the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated in the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 162) and stored.

FIG. 159(B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 159(B), the number of replays, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, the number of games, the bonus ratio, the consecutive bonuses ratio, the number of advantageous area games, and the number of bonus payouts. The number of games played in advantageous sections and the advantageous section ratio are stored. In addition, the storage area for each data is constituted by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games), and the storage area for each data is a ring buffer that has n storage areas for each predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games). When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointers of all data move, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After data for a predetermined number of games have been stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data moves every predetermined number of prize balls. Further, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to a storage area that lags behind the write pointer by one. This is to calculate the accessory ratio using data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer goes through one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. , even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 159(B), the number of replays, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of accessory payouts, the number of consecutive accessory payouts, and the number of games in the ring buffer are each 2-byte storage areas, Can store numbers up to 65535 in decimal. The number of re-games, the number of wins and payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, and the cumulative number of games are each a 3-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal can be stored. Since the cumulative total is, for example, the total of data for 400 games×n (6000 games if n=15), a large storage area is provided. The number of re-games, the number of wins and payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, and the total number of games are each a 3 or 4-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal can be stored. Since the cumulative total will not be erased unless something goes wrong with the data, a larger storage area is provided to store long-term data. Moreover, the cumulative total and the total cumulative total of the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio each have a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation. The number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games each have a 3-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal notation. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal notation.

Note that by increasing the number of games (for example, 600 games) corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer, the number of consecutive storage areas for storing time-series data ( Even if n) is reduced to 10, data for the same 6000 games can be stored in total. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as a ring buffer can be reduced.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 159(B), the number of paid out bonuses, the number of consecutive bonus paid out, the ratio of bonus items, the ratio of consecutive bonus items, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio are as follows: This is the same as the explanation in FIG. 159(A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The number of winnings and payouts is the number of all medals paid out in the game. The number of games is the number of times the game has been played, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of re-games, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous zone games, and the number of non-advantageous zone games are determined by the bonus rate calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 161). ), and the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 162).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 159(A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the work area for accessory ratio calculation is deleted in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 161). However, the data will not be deleted due to other triggers. For this reason, data in the work area for accessory ratio calculation may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total sum shown in FIG. 159(B) may be deleted every predetermined period.

Also, if the data in the work area for calculating the ratio of accessories or the calculated ratio of accessories is abnormal (for example, the ratio of accessories is over 100%, or the calculation result of the ratio of accessories has changed significantly from the previous calculation value) , number of accessory payouts>total number of payouts, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted. Further, when the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, the abnormality may be notified. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[12-3-3. I/O area configuration]
Next, the I/O area 5300 will be explained. Input/output ports correspond to the I/O area 5300, and by accessing the I/O area 5300, the CPU 4601 can access each input/output port. The input/output ports correspond to, for example, ports related to inputs such as switches, ports related to outputs such as big prize opening solenoids, and LED drive signals. The input/output port settings (settings regarding use/unuse of input settings, output settings, etc.) are set based on the setting values in the parameter information setting area 5400.

[12-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Next, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be explained. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 5400 of this embodiment. Parameter information setting area 5400 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, as shown in FIG. 160, the various settings include start/end addresses of each control area and data area. In addition, in FIG. 160, the definition of the start address and end address of each area of the third control area, the work area for accessory ratio calculation, and the save area for accessory ratio calculation is omitted from illustration, but the third control area start setting and the third control area end setting are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work area start setting for accessory ratio calculation and the work area end setting for accessory ratio calculation are the same as the start and end settings of other work areas. It is defined in the same way as the end setting, and the accessory ratio calculation retreat area start setting and the accessory ratio calculation retreat area end setting are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other retreat areas. Areas other than the area set here are considered as unused (unset) areas. Thereby, when the CPU 4601 accesses an unused area, a reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. Note that although FIG. 160 shows the parameters set as continuous areas, the set areas do not need to be continuous, and for example, the parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an area other than the setting area (the first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 5100, the isolated area of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, by intentionally accessing the isolated area and causing a reset, it becomes possible to initialize the program. Since slot machines execute processes sequentially, by accessing the isolated area after the last game process is completed, the program can be executed from the startup process and initial settings can be executed again. Thereby, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during a game, the initial setting can be executed again to reset the normal value. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, RAM clearing is determined based on the power outage flag, but it is possible to forcibly cause RAM clearing by accessing the isolated area without setting the power outage flag. Become. On the other hand, in the pachinko machines mentioned above, games are played in parallel, so if the game itself is initialized, it becomes impossible to continue playing, but in the case of slot machines, it is no longer necessary after the game ends. Since it is necessary to initialize the information in the RAM, the processing for initializing the information in the RAM can be made unnecessary by accessing the isolated area.

The values set in the parameter information setting area 5400 are not set sequentially through user program processing such as initialization of the CPU 4601, but by setting the address and setting value of the parameter area in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. , before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at startup, the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU. Thereby, various parameters can be set when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. Since the setting values of various parameters are information to be managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[12-4. Game control]
[12-4-1. System reset startup processing]
Next, control of the slot machine of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 161 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of system reset startup processing that is executed when slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset startup process is a process that is executed when the slot machine 4000 is powered on or when a power outage occurs, and is a process that is activated when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

When the system reset startup process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process to set various parameters necessary for playing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area allocated to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a setting value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated as a used area in the RAM area 5200, and an area that is not allocated as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 158) is treated as an unused area. Assigned. Further, the work area and the save area are divided into game control and debugging (inspection function) (or other uses), respectively. Further, in the ROM area 5100, similarly to the RAM area 5200, areas for storing programs and data are allocated as used areas, and areas that are not allocated as used areas are allocated as unused areas.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes security check processing (step S1012). The security check process is a process for determining whether the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, there is a possibility that the ROM 4602 has been replaced with an incorrect ROM, so starting up of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check has elapsed (step S1014).

Note that the process from the power-on of the slot machine until the end of the security check (processing up to step S1014) is not a process defined by the user program, but is a process configured by hardware within the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It becomes.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes device initialization setting processing for initialization (step S1016). In the device initialization setting process, processes such as startup setting of a periodic process (timer interrupt process in FIG. 162) that periodically executes a predetermined process are executed. In this embodiment, functions such as random number function settings that prevent game lottery settings from being rewritten by the user program after a security check are executed in the parameter setting process, and functions other than these are executed in the device initialization setting process. is running. By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into the parameter setting process and the device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom in game control is increased and fraud is less likely to occur in the game.

Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 or a hot start to return to the game with the backed up contents of the RAM 4603.

When performing a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "Yes"), the CPU 4601 executes initialization processing to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1020). A cold start is performed when the settings of the gaming machine 1 are changed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, when the power outage flag is not set, etc.

On the other hand, when performing a hot start to return to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (result of step S1018 is "No"), the CPU 4601 executes processing to return to the game based on the backed up contents of the RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the return process returns to the process that was interrupted when the power was cut off. Specifically, in any one of steps S1024 to S1042 of the system reset start-up process (described later) or steps S1110 to S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 162), the process that was interrupted at the time of power outage is returned to.

Note that in the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment, a checksum is calculated based on information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power outage occurs and when a recovery process is executed. At this time, only the work area for game control excluding the work area for debugging (inspection function) out of all areas that use the checksum calculation target as work (work area for game control and work area for debugging (inspection function)) You can also use it as The reason why the checksum is calculated only in the gaming control work area is that the debugging (inspection function) processing is designed to maintain independence from the gaming control processing, and to ensure that it does not affect the gaming results. Since this is a non-standard process, it is possible that some bugs may remain due to insufficient verification. Using the checksum as a target for calculation may impair the reliability of normal recovery from a power outage. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is installed in a product with bugs remaining, it will cause a big problem in the market. In some cases, sales may be discontinued and the product may need to be recalled, and in this case, there is a high possibility that it will cause significant damage to the manufacturer and the hall in terms of costs, etc., so please take thorough precautions. This is because the work area for game control has higher reliability than the work area for debugging (inspection function) because verification is performed on a regular basis.

When the initialization process ends or when a series of games ends, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process in order to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process is executed in which information in the RAM 4603 that is no longer necessary for performing a series of game controls is returned to the initial setting state.

When the game initialization process is completed, the CPU 4601 executes information signal 1 output process for outputting a debugging (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output processing, processing such as setting a debugging (inspection function) signal to an initial state is performed. Note that the information signal output processing is defined as information signal 1 to N output processing, and necessary modules are called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when outputting a debug (inspection function) signal (reel rotation start, start lever ON, information regarding winning combinations) accompanying the game start in the game start process, debug (inspection function) regarding the stop of each reel in the symbol stop process Inspection function) When outputting signals (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.), debugging (inspection function) signals related to confirmed roles in the winning determination process (defined roles stopped and displayed on each reel, payouts associated with confirmed roles) At the time of outputting information on the number of coins, output signal information regarding the number of medals to be paid out at the time of payout (number of medals to be paid out, etc.), the "information signal N output processing" module necessary for the processing is appropriately called and executed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process to perform a process before the player operates the starting lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the starting lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether a replay execution instruction has been given, whether medals have been inserted, whether medals have been settled, etc., and further, Confirmation of game setting values, etc. is performed.

When the starting lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes game start processing to start the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for drawing a game is obtained, winning combinations, etc. are determined, and the reels 4301 start rotating. After that, the CPU 4601 executes a Wait process to wait until the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotational speed (step S1032).

When the reels 4301 reach a normal rotational speed, the CPU 4601 makes it possible to accept input from the reel stop button 4211, and executes symbol stop processing to perform processing until all reels 4301 are stopped (step S1034).

Furthermore, when all the reels 4301 stop, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process to determine a winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the winning determination process, a winning combination is determined, and if it is determined that the winning combination is a winning combination, settings are made corresponding to the winning combination, and settings are made to execute a payout process corresponding to the winning combination.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize medals to be paid out as gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and stores the work area for calculating the accessory ratio in the RAM area 5200 (see FIG. 158, see FIG. 159) (step S1038). The process in step S1038 can be skipped if there are no award medals to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Note that even if the slot machine 4000 detects fraud and cancels the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. Regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, data for calculating the accessory ratio can be collected even during fraud notification by executing these processes.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes game ending processing to perform processing at the end of the game (step S1042). In the game end process, a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if there is no win or a win without a payout, the process is skipped. When the game ending process ends, the process returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[12-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, periodic processing, which is interrupt processing that is activated at predetermined intervals while the main loop processing of the system reset initial startup processing is being executed, will be described. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure of periodic processing.

When the regular process is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all registers (step S1110). At this time, the saved data is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. 158. As mentioned above, periodic processing is an interrupt processing that is activated while main loop processing is being executed, so by saving the CPU registers used in main loop processing, processing can be continued after return. It is necessary to

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer built into the CPU (step S1112). This allows the watchdog timer to be cleared periodically.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes switch input processing to sample input signals from various switches (step S1114). Furthermore, a game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of the driving body (stepping motor) that rotates the reels 4301 is performed. Specifically, the pulse output of the stepping motor, the detection of the origin position, etc. are performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes timer measurement processing to update various timers used in game control (step S1118). Since the periodic process is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic process x the set number of times.

Next, the CPU 4601 determines whether the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, calls the accessory ratio calculation/display process, and displays the accessory ratio calculation work. The accessory ratio is calculated by referring to the number of medals stored in the area. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The accessory ratio calculation/display process is the same as the accessory ratio calculation/display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the specific method of calculating the accessory ratio and the specific method of displaying the accessory ratio are the same as the method described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt processing and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to check the accessory ratio (the gambling quality of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data.

Note that when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated; For each operation, only the displayed value may be calculated. In addition, the accessory ratio is calculated regardless of whether the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated. You can.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes LED output processing to control the LEDs (step S1120). The LEDs to be controlled are those controlled by the main board 4600, and are, for example, the payout number display LED 4562. It also outputs data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED.

The CPU 4601 executes information output processing to output a signal to the external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to hall computer 4800 via external relay terminal board 4131. Further, the CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to the production control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes random number update processing to update the random numbers used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, random numbers to be generated by software processing are updated. Here, in addition to random numbers generated only by software, updating processing is performed for soft random numbers built into the CPU. With software random numbers built into the CPU, the counting itself is executed by hardware, but the trigger for updating is determined by this process. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce program processing related to random number updating.

When the random number update process ends, the CPU 4601 performs a process to return to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Furthermore, execution of the interrupt is permitted (step S1130). While periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is being executed, even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending and waits until the previously executed timer interrupt processing has successfully completed and the interrupt is enabled. It is set to be executed. For this reason, the configuration is such that periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is not executed multiple times.

[12-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Next, information signal output processing executed in system reset startup processing and the like will be explained. Information signal output processing is provided for each output signal function (1 to N), and is configured by a plurality of modules. For example, there are "conditional device output signals (signal output related to conditional device operation)" and "lottery determination processing (signal output related to lottery)." Although the signals to be output are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so a description of each flow will be omitted. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of information signal output processing of this embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the values set in the registers from being destroyed by executing information signal output processing (to ensure that they will be restored even if destroyed), and the values of all registers are saved to the stack area. It is designed to allow Further, the stack area used at this time is allocated to a debug (inspection function) save area, and is allocated to a different area separated from the game control save area.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires from the RAM 4603 information to be referred to in order to select (ON/OFF) the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) to be output (step S1212). In each information signal output process, the information stored in the RAM 4603 is only referred to, and no data is written to the RAM 4603 during the process, and if writing is necessary, the information is output to the debugging (inspection function) work area. A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured so that it is not used (including referenced) in processes other than information signal output processing. As a result, even if the program that executes information signal output processing is placed in a different location from other gaming control programs, it does not use a common area and can ensure independence from other gaming control programs. .

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Furthermore, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, has elapsed (step S1218). The information signal output time is determined in advance, and by setting a sufficient time, the debugging (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the destination. Thereafter, the values of all registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process ends.

As described above, an information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output in the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processes from step S1210 to step S1220 are executed for the number of debugging (inspection function) signals to be output. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each output signal function (1 to N). Note that this embodiment is configured such that multiple types of information signal output processing are defined for each function, but the table that defines the output signal corresponding to the function is stored in the area for debugging (inspection function). Information signal output processing may be made common by preparing signals in two data areas, selecting and outputting a signal corresponding to a function designated by a caller.

As described above, in this embodiment, a program that executes information signal output processing (signal output program) is stored in an area that is clearly separated from the area that stores the gaming control program (gaming control area). By providing an area (area for debugging (inspection function)), a program for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) the gaming machine 1 can be placed independently. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) the gaming machine 1, and is a process that does not affect the result of the game and does not impair the fairness of the game. Also, for purposes other than this (for example, to make up for the lack of capacity in the gaming control area by arranging gaming control programs or general-purpose programs), programs will not be placed in the debugging (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is statically called from the game control program and executed, and at this time, the address of the called destination is specified. Furthermore, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and when called, protects all registers used in the game control area. Additionally, as mentioned above, when program processing in the game control area is being executed, access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and program processing in the debug (inspection function) area is executed. If it is, the game control work area is configured so that only reference to it is permitted and writing is prohibited. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling modules (including subroutines) arranged in the game control area from the debugging (inspection function) area. Programs placed in the debug (inspection function) area, including signal output programs, are always called in a subroutine format, and after the subroutine ends, a return instruction returns immediately after the call. Note that the modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the game control program is not affected by the execution of the signal output program (program placed in the debugging (inspection function) area).

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (work area for game control, work area for calculating accessory ratio) may be the same as steps S18 to S26 in FIG. 21 of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. Note that the slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the backup data of the gaming state is erased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects explained in the pachinko machine example described above, it is possible to accurately calculate the ratio of the role parts of the slot machine in operation, and to improve the gambling quality of the gaming machine in operation. You can check it.

Although the present invention has been described above in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such a specific configuration, and various modifications and equivalents can be made within the spirit of the appended claims. It includes the configuration.

Among the inventions disclosed in this specification, the following are representative examples of aspects of the invention other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with an accessory ratio display device that displays information regarding the assigned gaming value,
The accessory ratio display includes a display device and a driver circuit that drives the display device,
The main control device includes:
transmitting data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display to the driver circuit via serial communication;
The game described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that, after power is turned on, a synchronization method, a communication rate, whether to use parity, and whether to use a stop bit are set for serial communication with the driver circuit. Machine.

(1) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than communication between the main control device and peripheral control devices.

This makes it possible to prevent incorrect display of the proportion of the accessory due to garbled data during communication.

(2) The main control device is
It has a work RAM that retains data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the ratio of accessories even when the power is turned off.
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the settings for the serial communication are executed after the work RAM is cleared.

This makes it possible to prevent incorrect display of accessory ratios using data in the RAM with incorrect contents.

(3) The main control device is
It has the function of transmitting the data accumulated in the FIFO buffer through serial communication,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that, after power is turned on, a data storage amount is set to determine the timing of sending out data from the FIFO buffer.

This allows data to be transmitted with any number of bits from the FIFO buffer.

(4) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with an accessory ratio display device that displays information regarding the assigned gaming value,
The accessory ratio display includes a display device and a driver circuit that drives the display device,
The length of the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that a circuit is arranged.

By lengthening the signal line that connects the main control device and the driver circuit, unauthorized modifications can be easily detected without placing any parts around the main control device. Furthermore, the signal line that connects the driver circuit and display device can be easily discovered. By making the line shorter than the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the proportion of the accessory can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are housed in one case.

As a result, unauthorized modifications can be easily detected without placing other parts around the main control device, and the influence of noise can be reduced.

(6) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are arranged on one printed circuit board.

As a result, unauthorized modifications can be easily detected without placing other parts on the printed circuit board around the main control device, and furthermore, the influence of noise can be reduced.

(7) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display is configured by housing the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be reduced. Further, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit can be reduced.

(9) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display orientation of the accessory ratio display is the same as the display orientation of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

Thereby, it is possible to easily check whether the main control device has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) The driver circuit has a standby mode in which characters and numbers are not displayed on the display device and power consumption is reduced;
In the game described in each of the preceding items, the main control device sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the accessory ratio display is in a closed state where it cannot be seen in the installed state of the gaming machine. Machine.

As a result, wasteful power consumption of the gaming machine can be prevented when displaying the accessory ratio is not necessary.

(11) A gaming machine that awards prize balls as gaming value to a player by winning a game ball launched toward a gaming area into a predetermined prize opening,
a main control device that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with an accessory ratio display that displays information about prize balls,
There are two types of entry winning holes: general winning holes whose entrance shape does not change depending on the gaming state, and electric winning holes whose entrance opens or expands depending on the gaming state.
The main control device determines the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player by at least the number of first prize balls paid out upon winning in the general winning hole and the number of first prize balls paid out in response to winning in the electric winning hole. Count the number of second prize balls paid out separately,
The game machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display device displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main controller stores the counted number of prize balls in a memory,
the memory stores a check code for verifying the stored number of prize balls;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the main control device erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory if the check code is not normal.

Thereby, an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory can be detected, and display of an incorrect accessory ratio (ratio between the number of first prize balls and the number of second prize balls) can be suppressed.

(13) The main control device includes:
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off,
storing game control data in the first backup area;
Storing data on the number of prize balls for calculating the ratio of accessories in the second backup area,
The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

As a result, if at least one of the game control data and the prize ball number data for accessory ratio calculation is normal, only the abnormal data can be deleted and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main control device includes:
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off,
storing game control data in the first backup area;
Storing data on the number of prize balls for calculating the ratio of accessories in the second backup area,
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the gaming machine is powered on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. The gaming machines described in Section 1.

If the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be deleted at any timing. Therefore, the backed-up accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 is prevented from being deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, thereby preventing deletion of the accessory ratio calculation/display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall attendant. , it is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the proportion of accessories is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been modified to a state where the ratio of accessory objects is high, and it is possible to prevent the state where the ratio of accessory objects is high from being concealed.

(15A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input/output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information regarding the gaming value is the base;
The control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state is calculated as the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the gaming area, the number of game balls ejected from the gaming machine). The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the base by the number of balls, the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port, and the number of winning balls.

(15C) The control means may use, as the predetermined signal, a winning detection signal that detects a winning in the winning opening, a reception confirmation signal of a prize ball payout command, or a timing of receiving a prize ball payout completion signal, or a timing of receiving a winning ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base to be displayed on the display means is updated at the timing of transmitting a prize ball payout command that instructs payout.

(15D) The control means:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, upon receiving a signal that detects winning of a game ball into a winning hole provided in the gaming area, calculates the number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole,
updating the total number of prize balls using the calculated number of prize balls;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) comprising a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, a number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) comprising a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a prize of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, a number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
receiving a confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction that received the reception confirmation;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) comprising a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, a number of prize balls determined corresponding to the entered prize hole is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
receiving from the payout control means the completion of payout of the prize balls according to the instruction;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction received for completion of the payout;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15H) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by the input/output of a predetermined signal; The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 15A to 15H, processing related to acquiring game media can be executed accurately.

(16A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means in connection with the gaming situation satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the base is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means:
It remembers the total number of prize pitches used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the gaming area, the number of prize balls determined corresponding to the winning hole is calculated and stored in a buffer;
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total number of prize balls at a predetermined timing, and the total number of prize balls is calculated as the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls hit into the game area). , the number of game balls ejected from the game machine, the sum of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls) to calculate the base.

(16D) The predetermined timing is the timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, thereby removing the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the predetermined number is moved to a number.

(16E) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input/output of a predetermined signal; and an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from the game nature while maintaining the game nature within the constraints of the main control device according to the rules.

(17A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
Count the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated in relation to the fact that the counted number of balls consumed satisfies a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is calculated at the timing when the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means determines the number of consumed balls based on the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the gaming machine counts .

(17D) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The control means includes:
It remembers the total number of out pitches used to calculate the base,
Calculating the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state and storing it in a buffer;
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out pitches at a predetermined timing, and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out pitches. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that:

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of pitches consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out pitches, thereby calculating the total number of out pitches from the buffer. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the gaming machine moves a predetermined number to a number.

(17F) The control means:
Executing a special symbol fluctuation display game that derives the special gaming state, triggered by winning a prize in the starting prize opening,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that, when the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game is at an upper limit value, the number of winning balls is counted without storing the winning in the starting winning hole.

(17G) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input/output of a predetermined signal; The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from the game quality while maintaining the game quality.

(18A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a main body frame to which a game board having a game area where the game is played is removably attached;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the display means displays information regarding the gaming value even when the main body frame is in a closed state.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to island equipment of a game center,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine that is visible when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the main body frame,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided in a case of the control means so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine.

According to the inventions 18A to 18C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in hall sales.

(19A)
A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
information updating means for updating information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means in connection with satisfying a predetermined condition in the game;
It has a game execution means for performing a special symbol fluctuation display game triggered by winning a prize in the starting prize opening,
Each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display game is being played by the game execution means. The game machine described.

(19B) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The control means sets the predetermined condition at any one of the following timings: detecting a winning in the winning opening, transmitting a prize ball payout command, receiving confirmation of receipt of the prize ball paying out command, and receiving a prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of prize balls used to calculate the base to be displayed on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that takes sufficient measures against fraud even during a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a main control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
A performance control means for controlling the performance of a special symbol variable display game that is triggered by winning a prize in the starting slot;
and a gaming value information display means for displaying information regarding the awarded gaming value,
The performance control means is
controlling the transition to a low power mode in which the power consumption of the gaming machine is lower than the normal mode;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that during the low power mode, the display mode is not changed so as to reduce the power consumption of the gaming value information display means.

(20B) displaying an effect of the special symbol variation display game, comprising an effect display means constituted by a liquid crystal display means having a backlight;
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value information display means is comprised of a light emitting diode, and does not reduce brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) comprising a performance display means for displaying a performance of the special symbol variation display game;
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game has been exhausted;
The gaming value information display means is characterized in that it does not change the display mode to reduce power consumption even after a predetermined period of time has passed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. The gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a full range of energy saving modes.

(21A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
comprising a normal gaming state and a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state;
As described in each of the preceding items, the information regarding the gaming value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state. gaming machines.

(21B) The control means determines whether the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls ejected from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state is counted.

(21C) The control means:
When the special symbol variation display game results in a jackpot, the advantageous gaming state is derived and control is performed to open a prize opening through which the player can obtain a large amount of gaming value;
The period from the confirmation of a jackpot in the special symbol variation display game to the start of the next special symbol variation display game is set as the advantageous gaming state, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information regarding the gaming value. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(21D) The control means:
In the advantageous gaming state, control is performed to open winning openings through which the player can obtain a large amount of gaming value;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of gaming balls entered into the winning slot is excluded from the number of gaming balls launched into the gaming area, and the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state is counted.

According to the inventions 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that awards game balls when predetermined conditions are met,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and a display means for displaying information regarding the given game ball,
In the game area where the launched game balls roll, there is a starting port that is a trigger for deriving a special gaming state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and a trigger for deriving the open state from the closed state of the starting port. At least a passage opening is provided,
The control means includes:
It is also possible to control a special game state in which it is easy to derive the open state of the starting port,
The number of prize balls awarded to the player is the number of balls awarded to the player, excluding the number of prize balls awarded and the number of consumed balls consumed by the player when controlled in either the special gaming state or the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming balls is calculated and updated by dividing the information by the number of balls consumed by the player.

(22B) The control means determines whether the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls ejected from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of balls consumed in the normal state is counted.

(22C) The control means sets the period from confirmation of winning in the normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game as the expansion state, and determines the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period with respect to the game balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the gaming machine is excluded from the calculation of information.

(22D) The control means counts the number of balls consumed in the normal state by excluding the number of game balls that entered the starting hole from the number of game balls launched into the game area. Gaming machines listed in each section.

According to the inventions 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) A firing device that can be operated by a player and fires a game ball toward a gaming area;
a prize ball giving unit that gives a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball is detected in a prize opening provided in the gaming area;
a main control means that executes a lottery to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player when the game ball is detected in a predetermined winning hole among the entered prize holes;
A gaming machine comprising: a peripheral control means that determines an effect to be displayed based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means has an information updating means that can update information regarding the given game ball either to increase or decrease,
a first state in which the information regarding the assigned game balls can be updated either to increase or decrease by the information updating means; and a first state in which the information regarding the assigned game balls can be updated to increase or decrease by the information updating means; There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information regarding the given game ball is updated to increase is suppressed compared to the first state;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the first state has shifted to the second state.

(23B) The information regarding the gaming value is a base;
The main control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
Calculating the base by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect by setting the timing when the base is likely to decrease as the second state.

(23C) The main control means:
Writes information regarding game balls into a storage area at a predetermined time interval, a predetermined number of prize balls, or a predetermined number of consumed balls;
Comparing the information regarding the gaming balls written in the storage area with the information regarding the gaming balls stored in the storage area before the writing to determine an increase or decrease in the information regarding the gaming balls;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase/decrease.

According to the inventions 23A to 23C, even if the variable display game remains interrupted for a long time, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(24A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that repeatedly executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a prize ball number acquisition means for acquiring the number of prize balls that a player obtains at a predetermined timing;
and a consumption ball detection means for detecting consumption balls consumed by a player,
The control means includes:
If the predetermined timing and the detection of consumed balls by the consumed pitch number detecting means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected number of consumed balls are determined within the same repetition. Count with
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that information regarding the gaming value is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(24B) The information regarding the gaming value is based,
The control means includes:
controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
counting the total number of prize balls in the normal gaming state and the number of gaming balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state within the same repetition;
The game described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of gaming balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state. Machine.

According to the inventions 24A to 24B, information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
an out port detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through an out port provided at the bottom of the gaming area;
Winning ball detection means for detecting winning balls entering a predetermined winning opening;
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls that have passed through the out port from the output of the out port detection means;
counting the number of winning balls from the output of the winning ball detection means;
Counting the number of consumed balls consumed by the player by the sum of the counted number of game balls that passed through the output port and the number of prize balls entered,
The information regarding the gaming value is calculated at a predetermined timing by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(25B) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
and detection means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area,
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls launched into the game area from the output of the detection means, and counting the number of game balls consumed by the player;
The information regarding the gaming value is calculated at a predetermined timing by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(25C) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
and detection means for counting the number of game balls ejected from the game machine,
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls ejected from the gaming machine from the output of the detection means to count the number of consumed balls consumed by the player;
The information regarding the gaming value is calculated at a predetermined timing by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 25A to 25C, processing related to acquiring game media can be executed accurately.

(26A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game;
and display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value,
The control means includes:
A game state control means for controlling the game state to one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which the player can obtain more gaming value than the normal game state;
a prize ball number counting means for counting the number of prize balls excluding the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball launched toward the right side of the gaming area enters a winning slot in which winning is possible;
a consumption ball counting means for counting the number of consumed balls consumed by the player excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the gaming area;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates the information regarding the gaming value using the counted number of prize balls and number of consumed balls.

(26B) The information regarding the gaming value is based,
counting the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state, excluding the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball launched toward the right side of the gaming area enters a winning hole that is considered to be a winning hole;
counting the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the gaming area;
As described in each of the preceding items, the control means is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is calculated by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state. gaming machines.

(26C) The control means controls the control means for a predetermined period after detecting passage of a game ball through a gate provided on the right side of the game area or detection of winning into a winning opening provided on the right side of the game area. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls are excluded from counting.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period based on either the elapse of a predetermined time from the last detection, the time when a predetermined number of game balls are consumed, or the time when a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(26E) The control means excludes the number of balls passing through the gate provided on the right side of the gaming area and the number of winning balls entering the winning opening provided on the right side of the gaming area, and controls the number of winning balls and The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the number of balls consumed is counted.

According to the inventions 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
first data setting means for setting first data according to the result of the game;
a second data setting means for setting second data not depending on the result of the game;
third data setting means for setting third data according to the result of the game;
a first conversion means for obtaining first conversion data from first data set by the first data setting means and second data set by the second data setting means;
a second converting means for obtaining second converted data from the first converted data obtained by the first converting means and third data set by the third data setting means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: display means for displaying the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

(27B) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display means does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value within a predetermined range.

(27C) The first conversion means is a multiplication means, and is characterized in that it multiplies the first data and the second data to obtain first conversion data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(27D) The second conversion means is a division means, and is characterized in that the first conversion data is divided by the third data to obtain second conversion data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , the gaming machines described in each of the preceding sections.

(27E) The first data is the gaming value given to the player (for example, the number of prize balls),
The third data is the gaming value consumed by the player (for example, the number of out pitches),
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain information regarding the awarded gaming value as second conversion data,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the display device displays information (for example, base) regarding the gaming value obtained by the second conversion means.

According to the inventions 27A to 27E, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, base values necessary for evaluating gaming machines can be accurately displayed in real time. Furthermore, by using the second conversion means (division means), information regarding the gaming value (for example, base value) can be accurately displayed in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a control means for executing periodic processing for controlling the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a conversion means for calculating information regarding the gaming value;
The control means includes:
Passing an argument to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, and obtaining a result converted by the conversion means based on the argument from the conversion means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the process of passing the argument and the process of obtaining the result of the conversion can be executed within one periodic process.

(28B) The conversion means:
It is an arithmetic circuit that performs division operations,
It has a divisor register into which the divisor is input, a dividend register into which the dividend is input, and a result register for outputting the quotient of the division operation,
The control means includes:
writing arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register;
After a predetermined time has elapsed since writing the argument, read the quotient from the result register,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the process of writing arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) Prize game media number counting means for counting the game media given to the player in a predetermined gaming state;
a consumed gaming media number counting means for counting gaming media consumed by the player in the predetermined gaming state;
The control means includes:
writing a value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game media number counting means by 100 into the dividend number register;
writing the number of consumed gaming media counted by the consumed gaming media number counting means into the divisor register;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that a base value is read from the result register.

According to the inventions 28A to 28C, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of acquiring the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed in one repetitive process (timer interrupt process), complexity of control can be suppressed.

(29A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A prize opening where game balls can be won;
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a display means for displaying information regarding the granted gaming value;
a consumption ball counting means for counting consumption balls consumed by a player;
comprising a prize ball counting means for counting prize balls given to the player;
At least one of the winning openings is a specific winning opening that can be switched between an open state in which winning a game ball is easy and a closed state in which winning is difficult;
The control means includes:
updating information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means based on the counted number of consumed balls and number of prize balls;
If a winning to the specific winning opening is detected even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that there is a winning abnormality, and when this determination is made, the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality is determined. A game machine characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated by excluding the number of balls consumed from the number of balls consumed.

(29B) At least one of the entered winning holes is a starting winning hole that becomes an opportunity to derive a special gaming state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls;
When a winning in the starting winning opening is detected while the starting winning opening is in a closed state, the control means determines that there is a winning abnormality, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of balls consumed. , the gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29C) At least one of the entry prize holes is a big prize hole that is opened in a special gaming state,
The control means determines that there is a winning abnormality when a winning in the big winning opening is detected when the big winning opening is in a closed state, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of balls consumed. , the gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that information regarding gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29D) having a consumption ball detection means for detecting consumption balls consumed by a player;
Each of the foregoing features is characterized in that the consumed balls counting means counts the consumed balls consumed by the player by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls detected by the consumed balls number detecting means. The gaming machine described in Section 1.

(29E) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed, which is used to calculate information regarding the gaming value;
The consumed pitch counting means adds the number of consumed pitches detected by the consumed pitch number detecting means to the total number of consumed pitches, and subtracts the number of winning pitches related to the prize entry abnormality from the total number of consumed pitches to determine the number of pitches consumed. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by counting.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed used for calculating the information regarding the gaming value,
The consumed pitch counting means counts the consumed pitches by adding a value obtained by subtracting the consumed pitch count related to the prize entry abnormality from the consumed pitch count detected by the consumed pitch number detection means to the total consumed pitch number. A gaming machine as described in each of the preceding items, which is characterized by:

(29G) The entry prize opening is switchable between an open state in which it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize,
The control means determines that there is a winning abnormality when a winning in the input prize opening is detected in the closed state and no prize balls are paid out in connection with the winning, and controls the number of winning balls related to the winning. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated by excluding it from the number of balls consumed.

(29H) If a winning abnormality in the entered prize opening is detected multiple times within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls and displays it on the display means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that information regarding a gaming value for playing is updated.

According to the inventions of Nos. 29A to 29H, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, by excluding the number of winning balls associated with winning abnormalities from the number of out balls, information regarding gaming value (for example, base value) can be accurately displayed in real time.

(30) A gaming machine that awards gaming media as a prize to a player,
A gaming area with multiple winning openings,
an award awarding means for awarding a predetermined specific award from among a plurality of awards when a gaming medium is detected in each of the winning openings;
arithmetic processing means for performing predetermined arithmetic processing using the number of gaming media flowing into the gaming area and the number of gaming media awarded as prizes awarded by the award awarding means;
processing means for processing the results of the arithmetic processing performed by the arithmetic processing means;
Display means for displaying the results of the arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device,
When a specific award among the plurality of awards occurs in the game, the award award means awards the specific award, and the display means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so that it does not change. Game machine.

According to the invention of No. 30, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, awards (for example, prize balls paid out when a prize is placed in a winning slot where a high-value prize is awarded (such as a general winning slot with a large number of prize balls or a grand prize opening)) The result of arithmetic processing (calculated base value) can be displayed so that it does not change even if the ball is awarded, making it easy to judge whether the gaming machine is exhibiting the specified performance (for example, whether the ball output rate is as per the set ball rate). can.

(31A) A game comprising a main control means including a lottery means for executing a lottery regarding winning or losing when specific conditions are met, and a peripheral control means for controlling a predetermined effect based on a signal from the main control means. It is a machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
temporary storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means;
information storage means updated by information stored in the temporary storage means;
and a first information output means for outputting at least part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to grasp the status history of the gaming machine.

(31B) Equipped with a general prize opening where game balls launched into the gaming area can win prizes even if there is no special gaming state;
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating a winning in the general winning opening,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first information output means outputs information regarding winnings to the general winning opening to the outside when predetermined conditions are met.

(31C) external output means for outputting information based on the predetermined condition to an external terminal board when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing more detailed information than the information output to the external terminal board when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, further comprising information presenting means for presenting the information stored by the information storing means.

(31D) comprising a first initializing means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
The peripheral control means includes:
storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means;
The game described in each of the preceding items is characterized by comprising: limited initialization means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storage means even when initialized by the first initialization means. Machine.

(31E) first initializing means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
a second initializing means for initializing the storage contents of the information storage means,
The information storage means is capable of retaining stored contents even when the gaming machine is powered off,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the first initializing means does not initialize the stored contents of the information storage means, but initializes the stored contents of the temporary storage means.

(31F) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of signal received from the main control means and the time at which the signal was received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signals transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means include a signal related to a counting event that is counted according to the progress of the game, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. including;
The peripheral control means includes:
temporary storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means;
information storage means updated by information stored in the temporary storage means;
a first information output means for outputting at least part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
The peripheral control means includes:
counting the counting events based on a signal received from the main control means and storing the counting results in the temporary storage means;
Upon receiving a signal related to the state change event from the main control means, the state change event is stored in the information storage means, and the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized by:

(31H) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event that is counted for managing the gaming machine, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting results of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
counting signals related to the counting event received from the main control means and storing them in the temporary storage means;
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the type of the signal related to the state change event and the time at which the signal was received are stored in the information storage means, and the counted event stored in the temporary storage means is stored. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the counting results of the counting events stored in the information storage means are added to the counting results of the counting events.

(31I) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event that is counted for the management of the gaming machine, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores the counting results of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
counting signals related to the counting event received from the main control means and storing them in the temporary storage means;
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means. The gaming machines listed in the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 31A to 31I, it is possible to know the history of changes in the number of balls. In particular, according to the inventions 31D and 31E, information regarding games can be stored appropriately.

(32) A gaming machine that provides prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for executing periodic processing related to the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
a first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the game including a variable display of symbols;
a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the given gaming value;
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and has
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is respectively connected. and has
The first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output driving means,
The control means outputs a selection signal to the first terminal and the third terminal at a common timing, but during a period in which the selection signal is output, at least one of the first light emitting element group a signal outputted to the plurality of second terminals in order to light up one light emitting element; and a signal outputted to the plurality of fourth terminals in order to light up at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group; A gaming machine characterized in that the display of the first light emitting element group and the second light emitting element group is controlled within one periodic process by outputting at different timings.

According to the invention of No. 32, the circuit for displaying information regarding the awarded gaming value (for example, base value and accessory ratio) can be configured simply, and the information regarding the gaming value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A gaming machine that provides prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for executing periodic processing related to the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
a first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the game including a variable display of symbols;
a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information regarding the given gaming value;
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and has
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is respectively connected. and has
a selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group; and at least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group in response to the selection signal output to the first terminal. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal. The signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals in order to light up at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group in response to a selection signal outputted to one terminal and a signal outputted to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal; and a selection signal outputted to the third terminal and a signal outputted to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal. A gaming machine characterized in that the process of outputting the signals to be outputted to the plurality of corresponding fourth terminals is outputting signals at different timings within the periodic process by different processes within the same periodic process. .

According to the invention of No. 33, it is possible to simply configure a circuit for displaying information regarding the awarded gaming value. Therefore, information regarding gaming value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) A gaming machine that grants prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
and calculation result display means for displaying information regarding the gaming value calculated by the calculation means,
The control means includes:
a control device that executes processing for game control;
timing means for generating a signal (for example, a clock signal or a reset signal) that determines the operation timing of the control device;
an output drive means that is controlled by the control device and outputs at least a control signal for displaying on the calculation result display means;
In a board on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction when viewed from the control device, and the output drive means and the calculation result display means are arranged in another direction different from the one direction. A gaming machine characterized by being placed apart from a timing means.

(34B) A connection line between the control device and the timing means and a connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to intersect with each other. The gaming machines described in each of the preceding paragraphs.

(34C) The timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal that is input to the control device, and an oscillation circuit that generates a clock signal that is input to the control device;
On a printed circuit board on which the control means is implemented, the reset circuit is arranged in the same direction from the processor as the oscillation circuit, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged apart from the reset circuit and the oscillation circuit. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized by:

According to the inventions 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress interference between signals related to game control and signals for displaying information related to games. Therefore, the influence on game control can be suppressed, and information regarding game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(35A) A gaming machine that provides prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
a display means that is controlled by the control means and displays information regarding the gaming value;
The control means includes:
a control device that executes processing for game control;
a memory that is accessed by the control device when executing the process and stores at least information regarding the gaming value;
The gaming machine is provided with an input means for instructing initialization of the memory,
The control means includes:
first initializing means that determines whether the data stored in the memory is normal or not at a predetermined timing, and initializes a predetermined first area of the memory when it is determined that the data is abnormal; ,
a second initializing means that determines whether or not the input means is operated when the power is turned on, and initializes a predetermined second area of the memory when it is determined that the input means is operated; have,
The first area initialized by the first initializing means and the second area initialized by the second initializing means are also initialized by the first initializing means. Including duplicate areas that are commonly initialized by the
At least the first area includes an area that does not overlap with the second area,
A gaming machine characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first area other than the overlapping area.

(35B) Data used to calculate information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first area,
The second area stores data used to control the progress of the game,
The control means includes:
If it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, initializing the first area;
If it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, initializing the second area;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35C) Data used to calculate information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first area,
The second area stores data used to control the progress of the game,
The control means includes:
If it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, initializing the first area and the second area;
If it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, initializing the first area and the second area;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35D) Each of the preceding items characterized in that the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time a periodic process is executed repeatedly at a predetermined time interval. The gaming machine described in .

(35E) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time the information regarding the gaming value is calculated. .

(35F) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal when the gaming machine is powered on.

According to the inventions 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory that stores information regarding the game value to be awarded (base value and accessory ratio). Therefore, information regarding the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A gaming machine that grants prize gaming media to players as gaming value,
A control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a consumption game media counting means for counting the consumption game media consumed by the player;
Prize game media counting means for counting prize game media given to players;
Calculating means for calculating information regarding the awarded gaming value using the counted number of consumed gaming media and the number of prize gaming media;
Display means for displaying information regarding the gaming value;
an electric accessory operated by the control means,
Under certain conditions, if multiple game media win a prize while the electric accessory is activated due to a single win, information regarding the gaming value of some of the winning game media may be displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that, although other gaming media are not used for calculating the information regarding the gaming value, any of the gaming media can serve as a trigger for a variable display game.

(36B) The control means:
Execute a variable display game when a predetermined starting condition is met,
Depending on the result of the variable display game, a first gaming state that is advantageous to the player (time saving, high probability state, jackpot, etc.) and a second gaming state that is less advantageous than the first gaming state (normal state) and control either
If a plurality of game media win during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in the second game state are used to calculate information regarding the game value, and The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized in that, although game media won in a winning state are not used for calculating the information regarding the gaming value, any of the game media can serve as an opportunity for a variable display game.

(36C) The control means:
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in gaming machines,
If a plurality of game media win a prize during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media that win while a predetermined type of error is detected are not used to calculate the information regarding the game value. First, although a game medium that wins a prize without a predetermined type of error being detected is used to calculate the information regarding the game value, any game medium can be used as a trigger for a variable display game. The gaming machines listed in the preceding sections.

According to the inventions 36A to 36C, since it is switched whether or not game media are used to calculate information regarding gaming value depending on the state of the gaming machine, information regarding gaming value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(37A) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting change operation section for changing the setting state related to the game. hand,
Difficulty in changing settings that makes it more difficult to operate the setting change operation unit when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame than when the main body frame is in an open state with respect to the outer frame. 1. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for converting.

(37B) An outer frame, a main body frame that is supported in an openable/closable manner relative to the outer frame, and on which a game board is provided; A gaming machine comprising a setting status display section for displaying,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a visibility-improving means that makes it difficult to view the display contents of the setting state display section when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) An outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting determining operation section on which a setting determining operation for determining a setting state related to a game is performed. A gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a decision making device that makes it difficult to operate the setting deciding operation section when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting change operation section for changing setting states related to games. hand,
The settings change operation section has a settings key insertion section into which a settings key is inserted,
When the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame, a specific portion of the outer frame is configured to prevent the setting key from being inserted into the setting key insertion portion. A gaming machine.

According to the inventions No. 37A to No. 37D, it is possible to make it difficult for an unauthorized person to change the setting state and improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37E) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when a symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and a winning result is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a setting information determining unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on the specific operating unit;
A gaming machine characterized in that the variable time determining means is capable of determining a specific variable time when the setting information is determined to be specific information based on an operation on the specific operation section.

(37F) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when a symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and a winning result is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a probability determining unit that determines the probability that the winning result will be derived as one of a plurality of probabilities based on the operation on the specific operating unit,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the variable time determining means is capable of determining a specific variable time when a probability determined based on an operation on the specific operation section is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when displaying a symbol in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a setting information determining unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on the specific operating unit;
The variation time determining means may determine a common variation time regardless of the setting information, or may determine different variation times depending on the setting information,
A gaming machine characterized in that a probability that different variable times are determined according to the setting information is set lower than a probability that the common variable time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming profit when displaying a symbol in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbol,
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol;
a setting information determining unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding the game based on an operation on the specific operating unit;
A production control unit that performs a predetermined production,
The variable time determining means is capable of determining different variable times according to the setting information,
When a specific variation time is determined by the variation time determining means in response to specific setting information of the setting information, the production control section controls the variation display of the symbol within the specific variation time. A gaming machine characterized in that a result suggestion performance that suggests a result and a setting suggestion performance that suggests the content of setting information determined by the setting information determining section are sequentially performed.

According to the inventions of No. 37E to No. 37H, it is possible to make the player aware of the setting state in a new manner and improve his/her interest in the game.

(37I) A main control board provided with a game control unit that controls games; a separate control board connected to the main control board and provided with a control unit different from the game control unit; and the game control board. A gaming machine comprising: a setting-related operation section for changing a setting state related to a game played by the department;
The game control section has a setting change permission state generating means that allows an operation related to changing the setting state on the setting related operation section,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting change permission state generating means allows an operation related to changing the setting state when information transmitted from the separate control board to the main control board is specific information. .

According to the invention of No. 37I, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent person to change the setting state illegally, thereby increasing the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37J) A game control section that performs control related to the game, and a setting change operation section that changes the setting state related to the control performed by the game control section, and the game area is controlled by the player's operation of a predetermined firing operation section. A gaming machine that grants gaming profits when a gaming ball launched toward a player enters a predetermined winning slot,
It is characterized by comprising a firing disabling means that disables firing of game balls by operating the firing operation unit for a predetermined period when the setting change operation unit is operated to change the setting state. Game machine.

According to the invention of No. 37J, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally changing the setting state.

(38A) A game machine comprising a game control section that performs control related to the game, and a setting operation section for changing settings related to the control performed by the game control section,
A game machine characterized in that a game control board constituting the game control section and a setting board constituting the setting operation section are housed in one case.

(38B) The case is characterized in that, in place of the setting operation section, a dummy unit that cannot perform operations for changing settings can be accommodated together with the game control section. Game machine.

(38C) The setting operation section is
a first operation unit for starting a setting state in which the settings can be changed;
a second operation unit for confirming the settings and terminating the setting state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, characterized by having a setting display that displays the contents of settings.

(38D) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the dummy unit does not have any of the first operation section, the second operation section, and the setting display.

According to the inventions No. 38A to No. 38D, specifications can be shared between a game machine having a setting function and a game machine without a setting function, and efficient design and production can be achieved.

(39A) a game control unit having a processor that executes a program for controlling games, and a memory accessed by the processor;
a clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation section for changing settings related to control performed by the gaming control section,
The setting operation section includes a setting change operation section for starting a setting state in which the settings can be changed,
The game control section includes:
When the gaming machine is powered on, detecting the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation section;
A gaming machine characterized in that when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation section is operated, the setting state is started.

(39B) The game machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit initializes the first area of the memory after the setting state ends.

(39C) When the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation section is not operated, the game control section controls the game control section in a second region that is at least partially different from the first region. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items is characterized in that the memory is initialized.

According to the inventions 39A to 39C, it is possible to prevent erroneous settings change operations.

(40A) A game machine comprising a game control section that performs control related to the game, and a setting operation section that changes settings related to the control performed by the game control section,
The game control unit includes a game value display means for displaying information regarding the awarded game value,
The setting operation section includes a setting change operation section for starting a setting state in which the settings can be changed, and a setting display means for displaying the contents of the settings,
The game machine, wherein the game control section displays the game value display means and the setting display means in a manner that does not confuse the game value display means in the setting state.

(40B) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming control section and the setting operation section are housed in one case.

(40C) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are comprised of one display.

(40D) the gaming value display means displays information regarding the awarded gaming value on the display without delay as the game progresses;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting on the display in place of information regarding the assigned gaming value in the setting state.

(40E) The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are constituted by separate displays.

(40F) The gaming value display means is
In other than the setting state, information regarding the awarded gaming value is displayed without delay as the game progresses,
In the setting state, displaying any of letters, numbers, or figures that are not displayed in the setting state;
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The gaming value display means is
In other than the setting state, information regarding the awarded gaming value is displayed without delay as the game progresses,
In the setting state, the light is turned off or turned on completely,
The gaming machine described in each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

According to the inventions 40A to 40G, it is possible to prevent confusion between a plurality of displays arranged on a substrate.

1 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 930 Power supply board box 951 Payout control board 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1311 Main control MPU (CPU)
1312 RAM
13121 Arithmetic circuit 1313 ROM
1314 Main control I/O port 1317 Accessory ratio display (base display)
1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2002 First starting port 2004 Second starting port 4000 Slot machine (gaming machine)
4210 Start lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Symbol fluctuation display device 4301 Reel 4341 Reel drive motor 4500 Image display body 4600 Main board (gaming control device)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 Production control board 5100 ROM area 5200 RAM area 5300 I/O area 5400 Parameter information setting area

Claims (1)

Equipped with a firing device that can be operated by a player and fires a game ball toward a gaming area,
A gaming machine in which a predetermined number of prize balls are awarded when the game ball enters a prize opening provided in the gaming area,
a lottery means that performs a lottery regarding a win when the game ball enters a specific winning hole among the entered prize holes;
performance determining means for determining one of the plurality of performances based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means;
a performance display means for displaying the performance determined by the performance determination means;
a calculation processing means that executes a predetermined calculation process based on the number of game balls fired toward the game area and the number of game balls given when a specific condition is met;
A gaming machine comprising: information display means capable of displaying a result calculated by the calculation processing by the calculation processing means,
A game ball is fired toward the game area, and the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls given by the number of game balls fired toward the game area is the first level when the game situation is such that play is possible. If the result of the lottery by the lottery means is not a win, the performance determining means determines a performance from a first performance group in which the special performance cannot be displayed on the performance display means, and fires a game ball toward the game area. and the value obtained by dividing the number of game balls given by the number of game balls fired toward the game area is less than the value obtained by subtracting 3% of the value of the first level from the value of the first level. If the result of the lottery by the lottery means is not a win in a gaming situation where the game can be played at the second level where the value is the second level, the performance determining means can display the special performance on the performance display means. Deciding on a performance from a group of performances,
The plurality of effects include a special reach effect, and the size of the decorative pattern when the special effect is displayed on the effect display means is the size of the decorative pattern when the special reach effect is performed. It is greater than
When the special performance is displayed on the performance display means in a game situation where games can be played at the second level, it is possible to perform a display that makes it possible to recognize that the game situation is a game situation where games can be played at the second level,
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first level becomes a gaming situation in which games can be played at the second level, a specific effect different from the special effect can be displayed ;
The time for displaying the special performance is longer than the variation time of the performance that is most likely to be selected as a performance when a performance is determined from the first performance group.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images